Offshore Concrete Strucctures PDF

OFFSHORE STANDARD
DNV-OS-C502
OFFSHORE CONCRETE
STRUCTURES
JULY 2004
DET NORSKE VERITAS

--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright Det Norske Veritas

Provided by IHS under license with DNV
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale
FOREWORD
DET NORSKE VERITAS (DNV) is an autonomous and independent foundation with the objectives of safeguarding life, prop-
erty and the environment, at sea and onshore. DNV undertakes classification, certification, and other verification and consultancy
services relating to quality of ships, offshore units and installations, and onshore industries worldwide, and carries out research
in relation to these functions.
DNV Offshore Codes consist of a three level hierarchy of documents:
~ Offshore Service Specifications. Provide principles and procedures of DNV classification, certification, verification and con-
sultancy services.
~ Offshore Standards. Provide technical provisions and acceptance criteria for general use by the offshore industry as well as
the technical basis for DNV offshore services.
~ Recommended Practices. Provide proven technology and sound engineering practice as well as guidance for the higher level
Offshore Service Specifications and Offshore Standards.
DNV Offshore Codes are offered within the following areas:
A) Qualification, Quality and Safety Methodology
B) Materials Technology
C) Structures
D) Systems
E) Special Facilities
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
F) Pipelines and Risers
G) Asset Operation
H) Marine Operations
J) Wind Turbines
Amendments and Corrections

This document is valid until superseded by a new revision. Minor amendments and corrections will be published in a separate
document on the DNV web-site; normally updated twice per year (April and October). To access the web-site, select short-cut
options "Technology Services" and "Offshore Rules and Standards" at http://www.dnv.com/
The electronic web-versions of the DNV Offshore Codes will be regularly updated to include these amendments and corrections.
Comments may be sent by e-mail to rules@dnv.com

For subscription orders or information about subscription terms, please use distribution@dnv.com
Comprehensive information about DNV services, research and publications can be found at htt,d/www.dnv.com, or can be obtained from DNV,
Veritasveien 1,NO-1322 Hwik, Norway; Tel +47 67 57 99 00, Fax +47 67 57 99 11.
O Det Norske Veritas. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including
photocopying and recording, without the prior written consent of Det Norske Veritas.
Computer Typesetting (FM+SGML) by Det Norske Ventas.
Printed in Norway.
If any person suffers loss or damage which is proved to have been caused by any negligent act oromission of Det Norske Veritas, then Det Norske Veritas shall pay compensation to such person
for his proved direct loss or damage However, the compensation shall not exceed an amount equal to ten times the fee charged for the selyice in question, provided that the maximum compen-
sation shall never exceed USD 2 million
In this provision "Det Norske Veritas" shall mean the Foundation Det Norske Veritas as well as all its subsidiaries, directors, officers, employees, agents and any other acting on behalf of Det
Copyright Det Norske
Norske Veritas
Veritas
Offshore Standard DNV-OS-C502, July 2004
Contents - Page 3
CONTENTS
Sec. 1 Introduction ........................................................... 7 E. Grout and Mortar ................................

E 1O0 General considerations................
A. General .................................................................................... 7
A 100 Introduction 7 F. Reinforcement ....................................................................... 23
. .
A 200 Objective.... ....................
A 300 Scope and applications...................................................... 7 F 200 Mechanical sp
A 400 Non DNV codes and standards.............................. 7 reinforcement .................................... 23
A 500 Classification ........................... ........... 7 F 300 Approval of
B. References ................................................................... 7 G. Prestressing Steel .................................................................. 23

B 100 General..................................... ........... 7 G 100 General........................................
G 200 Components for the prestressing
.. 8
C. Definitions ....................................................................
H. Embedded Materials ...........................
C 100 Verbal forms
C 200 C200Terms.
......................................... 8
......................................... 8 " 100 General........................................
D. Abbreviations and Symbols ..................................... 11 I. Testing of Materials ............................
D 100 Abbreviations.................................................................. 11 I loo Testing Of freshly mixed
D 200 Symbols ................................... ......... 11 I 200 Testing of concrete in the structure
I 300 Grout for mestressinp.tendons..
Sec. 2 Safety philosophy ................................................ 14 I
I
400 Reinforcement
500 Prestressing steel.........................
.................................... 23
14 I 6oo
.................... 14 I 700 Components for the prestressing system ........................ 23
.........14 I 800 Welding procedures .................................................
......... 14 I 900 Testing of repair materials
............................. i: Sec. 5 Loads and Analyses Requirements ................... 25

A. Requirements to Design - ........................................................ 25
B. Design Format ................................. ........ 15 A 100 General........................................
B 100 General....... ....................................... 15 A 300 Design principles .................................... 26
C. Identification of ........ 15 B. Load and Load Effects .................................. 26
C 100 General....... ....................................... 15
B 200 Environmental loads ....................................................... 26
Sec' Documentation"""""""""""""""""""" l6 B 300 Extreme wave loads. ...................................................... .26
B 400 Diffraction analysis......................................................... 27
A. Overall Planning .............................. B 500 Additional requirements for dynamic analysis
A 100 General....... ........................... 16 under wave load ....................................................... 27
A 200 Description B 600 Model testing .................................... 27
A 300 Meteorologi B 700 Current load ............................................................. 27
A 400 Layoutofth ....................... 16 B 800 Wind Loads ..................................................................... 27
B 900 Functional loads.......................... 27
B 1000 Accidental loads....................................................... 27
Sec. 4 Structural Concrete and Materials ................... 19

A. Classification ................................... ........ 19
A 100 Application. ....................................... 19
A 200 Concrete constituents and reinforcements...................... 19
B. Definitions ........... ..................................... 19
D 400 Special loade
B 200 General terms ........................... D 500 Physical representation
D 600 Loads...........................................
C 600 Additions.... D 1300 Probabilistic analysis

C 700 Admixtures. D 1400 Reliability analysis....
C 800 Repair materials .......................
C 900 Non-cementitious materials .....
C 1O00 Equivalent materials ................
D. Concrete ...........................................
D 1O0 General considerations.............
D 200 Concrete categorization ....................................... 21 D 2100 Seismic analysis
D 2200 Accidental and o
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Provided by IHS under license with DNV DET NORSKE
VERITAS
Page 4 - Contents
D 2300 Platform removalireuse ................................................... 35 M 300 Bending moment and axial force .................................... 56
M 400 Shear force
35 M 500 Anchorage
35
35 N. Accidental Limit State ......................
35 N 100 General ......................................
36 N 200 Explosion and impact ................
E 500 Transportation.......... ...................... 36 N 300 Fire ............................................
F. Barge Type Structures ...................................... 36 O. Serviceability Limit State ..................................................... 58
F 100 General ..................... ...................... 36 O 1O0 General .....
O
Sec. 6 Detailed Design of Offshore O
Concrete Structures ............................................ 37 O
O
A. General.............................................................. O
A 100 Introduction.............. ...................... 37 O
O
A 300 Load effects ............. ...................... 37 O
O 1000 Temperature effects...................
A 500 Composite structures ...................... 37
A 600 Prestressed structures wi ons ................38
P 100 Genera ...................................... 60
P 200 The tes
B. Design Principles .............. .................... 38 ................................................................. 61
B 100 General ....................................................... 38
B 200 Limit states ................................................
B 400 Partial safety factors for materials ...................... 38
B 500 Design by testing ............................................................. 38 Q. Rules for Detailing of Reinforcement................................... 62
B 600 Design material strength ...................... 39 Q 100 Positioning ...................................... 62
Q 200 Concrete .................................
C. Basis for Design by Calculation ....................... Q 300 Splicing .... ...................................... 62
C 100 Concrete grades and in situ strength of concrete ............39 Q 400 Bending .................................
C 200 Reinforcement steel................................... Q 500 Minimum area ofreinforcement ................................
C 300 Concrete stress strain curves for strength design .........40
~
C 400 Geometrical dimensions in the calculation of sectional R. Structural Detailing Rules .................................... 64
capacities ....................................................... 42 R 100 Slabdplate
C 500 Tension in structural members .................. 43 R 200 Flat slabs .. ...................................... 65
C 600 Fatigue strength relationships ......................................... 43 R 300 Beams ......
C 700 Deformation induced loads, prestressing and creep ........43 R 400 Columns ... ...................................... 66
C 800 Effect of water pressure .................................................. 43 R 500 Walls .......
R 600 Reinforced foundations ...................................... 66
D. Bending Moment and Axial Force (ULS) ............................ 43 R 700 Prestressed structures................
D 100 General ...................................................... 43
D 200 Ductility ................................. 44 S. Corrosion Control ................................................................. 67
S 100 General ......................................
E. Slender Structural Members .................... 44 S 200 Corrosion zones and environme
E 100 General ...................................................... .44 S 300 Forms of corrosion and associated corrosion rates .........67
S 400 Cathodic protection ...................
F.Shear Forces in Beams and Slabs ......................................... 45
F 100 Basis ................................................................................ 45 Sec. 7 Construction ....................................................... 69
F 200 Simplified method .... ..................... .46
F 300 Truss model method. ...................... 46 A. General.................................................................................. 69
F 400 Additional force in the longitudinal reinforcement from A 100 Application................................
shear force ................................................. 47 A 200 Codesand
F 500 Slabs subjected to concentrated actions .......................... 47 A 300 Scope ........ ...................................... 69
G. Torsional Moments in Beams .................... 48 B. Definitions ........................................

G 100 General .......................... ...................... 48 B 1 0 0 Terms
H. General Design Method for Structural Members Subjected to c . Documentation... ................................... 69

--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
In-dane Forces ..................................................................... 49 c 100 General.....

H 100 General ............................................................................ 49
H 200 Membrane (in-plane) shear resistance ............................ 49 D. Quality Control - Inspection, Testing and
Corrective Actions ............................................................. ...69
I. Regions with Discontinuity in Geometry or Loads .............. 50 D 100 General ...................................... .....69
I 100 General ............................................................................ 50 D 200 Inspection Classes ........................................................... 69
D 300 Inspection of materials and products .....69
J. Shear Forces in Construction Joints ................. 51 D 400 Inspection of execution ..................... .....70
J 100 General ...................................................... 51
E. Construction Planning .......................................................... 71
K. Bond Strength and Anchorage Failure ............. 51 E 100 General .......................................................................
K 100 General ...................................................... 51
F. Materials and Material Testing ............................................. 7 1
L. Partially loaded areas ......... 54 F 100 General ......................................
L 100 General ..................... ...................... 54 F 200 Constituent Materials ................
F 300 Reinforcement and prestressing system components......72
M. Fatigue Limit State ........... .................... 55 F 400 Production testing ..................
M 100 General ....................................................... 55 F 500 Testing of concrete in the stru
M 200 Fatigue gn life ...................... 56 F 600 Non-cementitious materials ...

Provided by IHS under license with DNV DETNORSKEVERITAS
Contents - Page 5
G. Formwork ............................................................................. 73 A 400 Planning .......................................................................... 83

G 100 Design, materials and erection A 500 Programme for inspection and condition monitoring..... 83
G 200 Slipform systems .................... A 600 Inspection and condition monitoring milestones and
G 300 Jumpforming systems ..................................................... 74 intervals........................................................................... 83
G 400 Inserts in formwork, recesses and blockouts ..................74 A 700 Documentation................................................................84
G 500 Removal of formwork and falsework ... A 800 Important
. . items related to inspection and condition
G 600 Surface treatment and final preparation monitoring....................................................................... 84
A 900 85
H. Reinforcement and Embedded Steel A 1000 ..................... 85
H 100 Reinforcement.......................... A 1100 86
H 200 Prestressing ducts and anchorages A 1200 Guidance for inspection of special areas ........................ 86
H 300 Embedded steel ........................
H 400 Inspection and survey ..................................................... 76 App. A Environmental Loading (Guidelines) ............... 88
I. Production of Concrete and Grout ........................................ 76 A.General .................................................................................. 88
I 100 General............................................................................ 76 A 1O0 Environmental Loads
A 200 Extremewavel
J. Transport, Casting, Compaction and Curing of Concrete .... 77 A 300 Diffraction analysis
J 100 Transpo A 400 Additional requ
J 200 Casting .................................................. 77 load ................................................................................. 89
J 300 Curing ........ A 500 Model testing .................................................................. 89
J 400 Completion A 600 Current load .................................................................... 89
A 700 Windloads 90
K. Completion of Prestressing Systems
K 200 Tensioning of tendons App. B Structural Analyses - Modelling (Guidelines). 91
K 400 Post-tensioning ............................................................... 79 A. General 91

K 500 Protective measures, grouting, greasing, concreting A 100 P 91
K 600 Unbonded tendons .................................................... A 200 Loads............................................................................... 92
K 700 Grouting of ducts ............................................................ 79 A 300 Mass simulation.............................................................. 92
K 800 Greasing operations ........................................................ 80 A 400 Damping 92
L. Repairs .................................................................................. 80 App. C Structural Analyses (Guidelines) ........... 94

L 100 General............................................................................ 80
A. Gener 94
M. Corrosion protection A 100 ........................................... 94
M 100 General........... A 200 94
A 300 94
N. Site Records a A 400 95
N 100 General
O. Precast Concrete Elements
App. D Seismic Analysis (Guidelines) .............. 96
O 200 Handling and storage
O 400 Jointing and completion works ....................................... 81 App. E Use of Alternative Detailed Design Standard
P. Geometrical Tolerances ........................................................ 81 (Guidelines) ....................................................................... 98
P 100 General............................................................................ 81
P 200 Reference system ............................................................ 82 A. General 98
P 300 Member tolerances (Guidelines)..................................... 82 A 100 Introduction..................................................................... 98
P 400 Cross-sectionaltolerances (Guidelines).......................... 82 A 200 Conditions....................................................................... 98
P 500 Embedments and penetrations (Guidelines) 82
App. F Crackwidth Calculation (Guidelines) ............. 100
Sec. 8 In-service Inspection, Maintenance and
Conditional Monitoring ...................................... 83 A.
A
General ................................................................................
100 Introduction...................................................................
100
100
A. Gener 83 A 200 Stabilized crackpattern.................................................. 100
A 100 ...................................................................... 83 A 300 Distance between cracks with deviations between the
A 200 83 principle strain directions and the direction of the
A 300 Personnel qualifications.................................................. 83 reinforcement................................................................ 100
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page 6 - Contents
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.1 - Page 7
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
A. General ~ Deep water caisson type concrete foundation of bridges

~ Floating foundations for bridges, parking houses or stor-
A 100 Introduction age buildings.
101 This offshore standard provides principles, technical re-
quirements and guidelines for the design, construction and in 303 Appendices A to F are appended to the standard. These
service inspection of Offshore Concrete Structures. The Con- appendices contain guidelines for the design of Offshore Con-
crete Structures may be a floating or gravity based structure. crete Structures.
102 This standard shall be used together with the general off- 304 Floating Offshore Concrete structures shall be designed
shore design standards for steel structures DNV-OS-C101, with freeboard and intact stability in accordance with DNV-
DNV-OS-C102, DNV-OS-C103, DNV-OS-C105 and DNV- OS-C301. For temporary phases the stability shall be in ac-
OS-C106. These standards cover a wide range of different cordance with DNV Rules for Planning and Execution of Ma-
structures rine Operations.
103 The standard covers design, fabricationlconstruction, in- 305 The development and design of new concepts for Off-
stallation and inspection of offshore concrete structures. shore Concrete Structures requires a systematic hazard identi-
fication process in order to mitigate the risk to an acceptable
104 Design, construction, inspection and maintenance of risk level. Hazard identification is therefore a central tool in
Offshore Concrete LNG Terminals are covered by DNV-OS- this standard in order to identiSl hazards and mitigate these to
C503. an acceptable risk level.
105 For design and construction of offshore concrete wind-
mills, reference is made to DNV-OS-J101 “Design of Offshore A 400 Non DNV codes and standards
Wind Turbines Structures”. 401 In case of conflict between the requirements of this
106 This standard cover design of platformslstructures for standard and a reference document other than DNV standard,
oil production, oil storage, harbours and deep water foundation the requirement of this standard shall prevail.
of bridges where reinforced and prestressed concrete is used as 402 The provision for using non-DNV codes or standards is
structural material. that the same safety level as provided by this DNV standard, is
For structures like deep water foundation of bridges and har- obtained.
bours special considerations will be required on load specifica- 403 Where reference is made to non - DNV codes, the valid
tions. revision shall be taken as the revision which is current at the
date of issue of this standard, unless otherwise noted.
A 200 Objective
404 In addition to the requirements mentioned in this stand-
201 The objectives of this standard are to: ard, it is also the responsibility of the designer, owner and op-
~ provide an international standard for the design, construc- erator to comply with additional requirements that may be
tion and in-service inspection of Offshore Concrete Struc- imposed by the flag state or the coastal state or any other juris-
tures with an acceptable level of safety by defining dictions in the intended area of deployment and operation.
minimum requirements for design, construction control
and in-service inspection A 500 Classification
~ serve as a contractual reference document between suppli- 501 Classification principles, procedures and application
er and purchasers related to design, construction and in- class notations related to classification services of offshore
service inspection units are specified in the DNV Offshore Service Specifications
~ serve as a guideline for designer, supplier, purchasers and given in Table A l .
regulators.
A 300 Scope and applications Reference Title
301 The standard is applicable to Design, Construction, In- DNV-OSS-101 Rules for Classificationof Offshore Drilling and
spection and Maintenance of Offshore Concrete Structures, us- Support Units
ing concrete as the structural material in the support structure DNV-OSS-102 Rules for Classification of Floating Production
as defiied in 302 below. and Storage Units
302 The standard can be used in the structural design of the DNV-OSS-103 Rules for Classification of LNGLPG Floating
following types of support structures: Production and Storage Units or Installations
DNV-OSS-121 Classification Based on Performance Criteria
~ GBS (Gravity Based Structures) offshore concrete struc- Determined by Risk Assessment Methodology
tures for oil/gas production
~ GBS structures for oil/gas production with oil storage fa-
cility
~ Floating concrete structures for production of oil/gas. The B. References
structure may be of any type floating structure, i.e. Ten-
sion leg platform (TLP), Column stabilised units and B 100 General
Barge type units
Concrete harbours 101 The DNV documents in Tables B1 and B2 and recog-
nised codes and standards in Table B3 are referred to in this
~
~ Artificial concrete export/import harbours, either floating

or fixed and with storage facilities, allowing transport of standard.
articles and goods with small boats to the artificial harbour 102 The latest valid revision of the DNV reference docu-
for reloading on large sea going vessels. Cargo may be dif- ments in Tables B1 and B2 applies. These include acceptable
ferent types or ore or oil/gas methods for fulfilling the requirements in this standard. See
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page8 - Sec.1
also current DNV List of Publications. for fulfilment or compliance with the present standard. Devia-
103 Other recognised codes or standards may be appliedpro- tions are not permitted unless formally and rigorously justified,
vided it is shown that they meet or exceed the level of safety of and accepted by all relevant contracting parties.
the actual DNV Offshore Standard. 102 Should: Indicates a recommendation that a certain
course of action is preferred or particularly suitable. Alterna-
Table B1 DNV Reference Documents I tive courses of action are allowable under the standard where
Reference agreed between contracting parties but shall be justified and
DNV Rules Rules for the Classification of Ships. documented.
103 May: Indicates a permission, or an option, which is per-
DNV Rules mitted as part of conformance with the standard.
nne Ouerations
DNV-OS-A1O1 Safety Principles and Arrangement C200 Terms
DNV-OS-B101 Metallic Materials 201 Accidental Limit States (ALS): Ensures that the structure
DNV-OS-C401 Fabrication and Testing of Offshore Structures resists accidental loads and maintain integrity and performance
of the structure due to local damage or flooding.
DNV-OS-E301 Position Moorinn I
Rules for Planning and Execution of Marine Op- 202 Accidental Loads (A): Rare occurrences of extreme en-
erations vironmental loads, fiie, flooding, explosions, dropped objects,
DNV-RP-C201 Buckling Strength of Plated Structures
collisions, unintended pressure differences, leakage of LNG
etc.
DNV-RP-C202 Buckling Strength of Shells
DNV-RP-C203 Fatigue Strength Analysis of Offshore Steel
203 Aggregates are the main ingredient both with respect to
Structures volume and weight in a structural concrete mix.
DNV-RP-E3O 1 Design and Installation of Fluke Anchors in 204 Air Gap: Free distance between the 100 year design
Clay- wave and the underside of a topside structure supported on col-
DNV-RP-E302 Design and Installation of Plate Anchors in Clav umn supports allowing the wave to pass under the topside
Classification Buckling Strength Analysis, structure. When air gap is sufficiently large, thenno wave pres-
Note 30.1 Sec.2 Bars and Frames sure is applied to the topside structure.
Classification Foundations 205 AS-BUILT Documentation: Documentation of the off-
Note 30.4 shore Structure as finally constructed. Includes design basis/
Classification Environmental Conditions and Environmental design brief documents, updated designed calculations, updat-
Note 30.5 Loads ed construction drawings, construction records and approved
Classification Structural Reliability Analysis of Marine Struc- deviations reports.
Note 30.6 tures 206 Atmospheric zone: The external surfaces of the unit
Classification Fatigue Assessments of Ship Structures above the splash zone.
Note 30.7
207 Cathodic protection: A technique to prevent corrosion
of a steel surface by making the surface to be the cathode of an
Table B2 DNV Offshore Object Standards for Structural
electrochemical cell.
Design 208 Cement is the binder component in a structural concrete
Reference I Title I mix
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
209 Characteristic load: The reference value of a load to be
DNV-OS-C101
(LRFD Method) I
Design of Offshore Steel Structures, General
used in the determination of load effects. The characteristic
load is normally based upon a defined fractile in the upper end
of the distribution function for load.
210 Characteristic resistance: The reference value of struc-
tural strength to be used in the determination of the design
FD method) strength. The characteristic resistance is normally based upon
DNV-OS-C105 StructuralDesign of TLP (LRFD method) a 5% fractile in the lower end of the distribution function for
DNV-OS-C106 StructuralDesign of Deep Draught Floating
resistance.
1 Jni ts 211 Characteristic material strength: The nominal value of
DNV-OS-C503 Concrete LNG Terminal Structures and material strength to be used in the determination of the design
Containment Systems resistance. The characteristic material strength is normally
DNV-OS-J101 Design of Offshore Wind Turbine Structures based upon a 5% fractile in the lower end of the distribution
function for material strength.
212 Characteristic value: The representative value associat-
Table B3 Other references ed with a prescribed probability of not being unfavourably ex-
ceeded during some reference period.
213 ClassiJication Note: The Classification Notes cover
proven technology and solutions which is found to represent
NORSOK N-003 Actions and Action Effects good practice by DNV, and which represent one alternative for
satisSling the requirements stipulated in the DNV Rules or oth-
er codes and standards cited by DNV. The classification notes
will in the same manner be applicable for fulfilling the require-
ments in the DNV offshore standards.
C. Definitions 214 Coating: Metallic, inorganic or organic material applied
to steel surfaces for prevention of corrosion.
C 100 Verbal forms 215 Concrete Grade: A parameter used to defiie the con-
101 Shall: Indicates a mandatory requirement to be followed crete strength. Concrete Grade for different characteristic val-

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.1 - Page 9
ues of concrete strength is provided in Sec.6 Table C1. 238 Hindcasting: A method using registered meteorological
216 Corrosion allowance: Extra wall thickness added during data to reproduce environmental parameters. Mostly used for
design to compensate for any anticipated reduction in thick- reproducing wave parameters.
ness during the operation. 239 Inspection: Activities such as measuring, examination,
217 Cryogenic Temperature: The temperature of the stored testing, gauging one or more characteristics of an object or
LNG. service and comparing the results with specified requirements
to determine conformity.
218 Deck mating: The operation when the deck floated on
barges are mated with the concrete support structure. 240 Light Weight Aggregate Concrete (LWA): A concrete
made with lightweight aggregates conforming to requirements
219 Deformation loads (D): Loads effects on the Terminal contained in recognized standards, e.g. relevant ASTM, AC1
caused by termal effects, prestressing effects, creep/shrinkage or EN standard.
effects, differential settlements/deformationsetc.
241 Limit State: A state beyond which the structure no long-
220 Design Hazards: Hazards, which based on risk assess- er satisfies the requirements. The following categories of limit
ment is likely to occur. The Design Hazards are mitigated into states are of relevance for structures:
the structural design of the Terminal.
ULS = ultimate limit states
221 Design briefi An agreed document where owners re-
quirements in excess of this standard should be given. FLS = fatigue limit states
222 Design temperature: The design temperature for a unit ALS = accidental limit states
is the reference temperature for assessing areas where the unit SLS = serviceability limit states.
can be transported, installed and operated. The design temper-
ature is to be lower or equal to the lowest daily mean tempera- 242 Limit State Design: Design of the Offshore Concrete
ture in air for the relevant areas. For seasonal restricted Structure in the limit states of ULS, SLS, FLS and ALS.
operations the lowest daily mean temperature in air for the sea- 243 Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD): Method
son may be applied. The cargo temperature shall be taken into for design where uncertainties in loads are represented with a
account in the determination of the cargo temperature. load factor and uncertainties in resistance are represented with
223 Design value: The value to be used in the deterministic a material factor.
design procedure, i.e. characteristic value modified by the re- 244 Load eflect: Effect of a single design load or combina-
sistance factor or load factor. tion of loads on the equipment or system, such as stress, strain,
224 Driving voltage: The difference between closed circuit deformation, displacement, motion, etc.
anode potential and the protection potential. 245 Lowest daily mean temperature: The lowest value on the
225 Ductility: The property of a steel or concrete member to annual mean daily average temperature curve for the area in
sustain large deformations without failure. question. For temporary phases or restricted operations, the
226 Ductility level Earthquake (DLE): The ductility level
lowest daily mean temperature may be defiied for specific sea-
earthquake is defined probabilistically as an earthquake pro- sons.
ducing ground motion with a mean recurrence as a minimum Mean daily average temperature: the statistical mean av-
of 10 O00 years. erage temperature for a specific calendar day.
227 Environmental Loads (E): Loads from wind, wave, tide, Mean: statistical mean based on number of years of obser-
current, snow, ice and earthquake. vations.
228 Expected loads and response history: Expected load and Average: average during one day and night.
response history for a specified time period, taking into ac-
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
246 Lowest waterline: Typical light ballast waterline for

count the number of load cycles and the resulting load levels ships, transit waterline or inspection waterline for other types
and response for each cycle. of units.
229 Expected value: The most probable value of a load dur-
ing a specified time period. 247 Mill certificate: A document made by the Manufacturer
of cement which contains the results of all the required tests
230 Fatigue: Degradation of the material caused by cyclic and which certifies that the tests have been carried out by the
loading. Manufacturer on samples taken from the delivered cement
231 Fatigue critical: Structure with calculated fatigue life themselves.
near the design fatigue life. 248 Mildly aggressive environment (LA): Indoor structures
232 Fatigue Limit States (FLS): Related to the possibility of in dry climate without aggressiveness
failure due to the effect of cyclic loading. 249 Moderately aggressive environment (NA): outdoor
233 Functional Loads: Permanent (G) and variable loads structures or indoor structures in humid environment and
(Q), except environmental loads (E), to which the structure can structures in fresh water
be exposed. 250 Non-cementitious materials are defiied within the con-
234 Grout is a cementitious material and includes the context of this Standard as materials such as epoxy and poly-
stituent materials; cement, water and admixture. Appropriate urethane which are specially made for use together with
aggregates may be included structural concrete either to improve the concrete properties or
to supplement, repair or replace the concrete.
235 Guidance note: Information in the standards in order to
increase the understanding of the requirements. 251 Non-destructive testing (NDT): Structural tests and in-
236 Hazards Identification: A list of critical elements, if spection of welds with radiography, ultrasonic or magnetic
failed, will have the potential to cause, or contribute substan- powder methods.
tially to, a major accident. The list is based on consequence of 252 Normal Strength Concrete: A concrete of Grade C30 to
failure only, not on likelihood for failure of the individual haz- C65. The Concrete Grade is derived from the characteristic
ards. cylinder strength of concrete in accordance with Sec.6 Table
237 High Strength Concrete: A concrete of Grade in excess c1.
of C65. 253 Object Standard: The standards listed in Table B2.

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page 10 - Sec.1
254 Offshore Standard: The DNV offshore standards are the Offshore Concrete Structure.
documents which presents the principles and technical require- 269 Risk: The qualitative or quantitative likelihood of an ac-
ments for design of offshore structures. The standards are of- cidental or unplanned event occurring considered in conjunc-
fered as D W ’ s interpretation of engineering practice for tion with the potential consequences of such a failure. In
general use by the offshore industry for achieving safe struc- quantitative terms, risk is the quantified probability of a de-
tures. f i e d failure mode times its quantified consequence.
255 Offshore installation: A general term for mobile and 270 Service temperature: Service temperature is a reference
fixed structures, including facilities, which are intended for ex- temperature on various structural parts of the unit used as a cri-
ploration, drilling, production, processing or storage of hydro- terion for the selection of steel grades or design for crackwidth
carbons or other related activities or fluids. The term includes etc. in SLS.
installations intended for accommodation of personnel en-
gaged in these activities. Offshore installation covers subsea 271 Serviceability Limit States (SLS): Corresponding to the
installations and pipelines. The term does not cover traditional criteria applicable to normal use or durability.
shuttle tankers, supply boats and other support vessels which 272 Sheaths: Ducts for post-tensioning tendons. Sheaths
are not directly engaged in the activities described above. shall in general be of a semi rigid or rigid type, water tight and
256 Operating conditions: Conditions wherein a unit is on with adequate stiffness to prevent damages and deformations.
location for purposes of production, drilling or other similar 273 Slamming: Impact load on an approximately horizontal
operations, and combined environmental and operational load- member from a rising water surface as a wave passes. The di-
ings are within the appropriate design limits established for rection of the impact load is mainly vertical. Slamming can
such operations (including normal operations, survival, acci- also occur within tanks due to stored liquids.
dental).
274 Specijed Minimum Yield Strength (SMYS): The mini-
257 Partial Load Factor: The specified characteristic per- mum yield strength prescribed by the specification or standard
manent, variable, deformation, environmental or accidental under which the material is purchased.
loads are modified with a load factor. This load factor is part of
the safety approach and varies in magnitude for the different 275 Specially aggressive environment (SA): Structures ex-
load categories dependent on the individual uncertainties in the posed to strong chemical attack which will require additional
characteristic loads. protective measures. This may require specially mixed con-
crete, membranes or similar.
258 Permanent Functional Loads (G): Self-weight, ballast
weight, weight of permanent installed part of mechanical out- 276 Specijed value: Minimuni or maximum value during
fitting, external hydrostatic pressure, prestressing force etc. the period considered. This value may take into account oper-
ational requirements, limitations and measures taken such that
259 Potential: The voltage between a submerged metal sur- the required safety level is obtained.
face and a reference electrode.
277 Severely aggressive environment (MA): Structures in sa-
260 Prestressingsystems: Tendons (wires, strands, bars), an- line water, in the splash zone or exposed to sea spray, struc-
chorage devices, couplers and ducts or sheaths are part of a tures exposed to aggressive gases, salt or other chemical
prestressing system. substances, and structures exposed to repeated freezing and
261 Quality Plan: A plan implemented to ensure quality in thawing in a wet condition
the design, construction and in-service inspectiodmainte- 278 Splash zone: The external surfaces of the unit that are pe-
nance. An interface manual shall be developed defiing all in- riodically in and out of the water. The determination of the
terfaces between the various parties and disciplines involved to splash zone includes evaluation of all relevant effects includ-
ensure that the responsibilities, reporting routines and informa- ing influence of waves, tidal variations, settlements, subsid-
tion routines are established. ence and vertical motions.
262 Recommended Practice (RP): The recommended prac-
tice publications cover proven technology and solutions which 279 Stability: The ability of the floating structure to remain
have been found by DNV to represent good practice, and upright and floating when exposed to small changes in applied
which represent one alternative for satisSl the requirements loads.
stipulated in the DNV offshore standards or other codes and The ability of a structural member to carry small additional
standards cited by DNV. loads without buckling.
263 Reinforcement is defied as the constituents of structural 280 Strength level Earthquake (SLE): The strength level
concrete providing the tensile strength that will give the con- earthquake is defined probabilistically as an earthquake pro-
crete its ductile characteristics. In these Rules reinforcement is ducing ground motion with a mean recurrence at a minimum
categorised as: interval of 100 years.
ordinary reinforcement 281 Structural concrete is defied as a cementitious compos-
ite material and is the main ingredient for construction of con-
~
prestressing reinforcement
crete structures.
~
~ special reinforcement.
282 Submerged zone: The part of the unit which is below the
264 Robustness: A robust structure is a structure with low splash zone, including buried parts.
sensitivity to local changes in geometry and loads.
283 Survival condition: A condition during which a unit may
265 Redundancy: The ability of a component or system to be subjected to the most severe environmental loadings for
maintain or restore its function when a failure of a member or which the unit is designed. Drilling or similar operations may
connection has occurred. Redundancy may be achieved for in- have been discontinued due to the severity of the environmen-
stance by strengthening or introducing alternative load paths tal loadings. The unit may be either afloat or supported on the
266 Reference electrode: Electrode with stable open-circuit sea bed, as applicable.
potential used as reference for potential measurements. 284 Target safety level: A nominal acceptable probability of
267 Reliability: The ability of a component or a system to structural failure.
perform its required function without failure during a specified 285 Temporary conditions: Design conditions not covered
time interval. by operating conditions, e.g. conditions during fabrication,
268 Repair Materials: Material used to structurally repair mating and installation phases, transit phases, accidental
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Sec.1 - Page 11
286 Temporary Phase: Reference is made fabrication, mat- I ESD I Emergencv shut down
ing, transit/towing and installation phases. I FLS I Fatigue limit state I
287 Test report: A document made by the Manufacturer I FM I Fracture mechanics
which contains the results of control tests on current produc-
tion, carried out on products having the same method of man-
FMEA I Failure mode effect analysis
ufacture as the consignment, but not necessarily from the FTM I Fault tree method
delivered products themselves. IG I Permanent loads I
288 Tensile strength: Minimum stress level where strain I HAT I Highest astronomical tide
hardening is at maximum or at rupture for steel. For concrete it HAZOP I Hazop and operability study
is the direct tensile strength of concrete. HISC I Hvdrogen induced stress cracking
289 Transit conditions: All unit movements from one geo- I HS I High strength I
graphical location to another. I IGC International gas carrier
290 Ultimate Limit States (ULS): Corresponding to the max- IMO International maritime organisation
imum load carrying resistance. IS0 International organisation of standardisation
291 Unit: is a general term for an offshore structure. I LA I Mildlv agmessive environment I
LAT Lowest astronomic tide
292 Utilisation factor: The fraction of anode material that LNG Liquified natural gas
can be utilised for design purposes. For design of Terminal
structures, the utilisation factor also means the ratio of used LRFD Load and resistance factor design
strength to failure strength of concrete, reinforcement or pre- LWA I Light weight aggregate concrete
stressing steel. MA I Severely aggressive environment
293 Variable Functional Loads (Q): Weight and loads MPI I Magnetic particle inspection
caused by the normal operation of the Offshore Structure. Var- MSF I Model suuuort frame
iable Functional Loads may vary in position, magnitude and I MSL I Mean sea level I
direction during the operational period and includes modules,
gas weight, stored goods, pressure of stored components, pres- I NA Moderately aggressive environment
sures from stored LNG, temperature of LNG, loads occurring NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
during installation, operational boat impacts, mooring loads NDT Non-destructive testing
etc. I NS I Norwegian standard I
I
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
294 Verification: Examination to confirm that an activity, a I NW Normal weight concrete
product or a service is in accordance with specified require- QRA I Quantitative risk analysis
ments. RP I Recommendedpractise
295 Works' certificate: A document made by the Manufac- I SA I Sueciallv aggressive environment I
turer which contains the results of all the required tests and I SLS Serviceabilitylimit state
which certifies that the tests have been carried out by the Man- SLE Strength level earthquake
ufacturer on samples taken from the delivered products them-
selves SMYS Specified minimum yield stress
I SN-curves Curves suecifvim fatigue life
I ULS I Ultimate limit state
D. Abbreviations and Symbols D200 Symbols

201 Latin characters
D 100 Abbreviations
101 Abbreviations as shown in Table D1 are used in this A Accidental loads
standard. Al loaded area
A? assumed distribution area
I Table D1 Abbreviations A" I concrete area of a longitudinal section of the beam web
I Abbreviation I In full I cross-sectionalarea of uncracked concrete
A Accidental loads
AC1 American Concrete Institute
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
I ALS I Accidental limit states I the reinforcement area that is sufficiently anchored on
American Petroleum Institute both sides of the joint and that is not utilized for other
uuruoses
Alkali silica reaction
A,, Amount of shear reinforcement
American Society for Testing and Materials
As, amount of reinforcement in x-direction
British Standard (issued by British Standard Insti-
tute)
I Classificationnote I Ast the area of transversereinforcementnot utilized for other
tensile forces and having a spacing not greater than 12
COG Centre of gravity times the diameter of the anchored reinforcement. If the
D Deformation loads reinforcement is partly utilized, the area shall be propor-
DDF Deeu draught floaters tionallv reduced
I DLE I Ductilitv level earthauake I a I distance from the face of the suuuort
DNV Det Norske Ventas a, vertical acceleration
E Environmental loads be, the part of the slab width which according to Sec.6 A400
is assumed as effective when resisting tensile forces
EN Eurouean norm
bX length of the side of the critical section (Sec.6 F510)
I ETM I Event tree method I

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page 12 - Sec.1
b., I length of the side ueruendicular to b, G permanent load

b... I width of beam (web) ímm) acceleration due to mavitv
C concrete grade (normal weight concrete) cross-section height
factor on Wehler curves concrete (Sec.6 M200) h’ distancebetween the centroid of the reinforcementon the
factor on Wehler curves concrete (Sec. 6 M200) “tensile” and “compression” side of the member
C, I factor on Wehler curve reinforcement íSec.6 M200) 1.0 m (Sec.6 D107)
factor on Wehler curve reinforcement (Sec.6 M200) thickness of the flange (the slab)
C the least of the dimensions c1, c2 and (sl - 412 given in IC moment of inertia of Ar
Fig.13 k number of stress-blocks(Sec.6 M107)
I minimum concrete cover, see Sec.6 Table Ql kl a factor depending of the type of reinforcement,given in
I actual nominal concrete cover Sec.6 Table K2
D I deformation load kl constant used in calculations of crackwidth
íSec.6 Table 03)
Dk I diameter of the concrete core inside the centroid of the
suiral reinforcement. A,,
distance from the centroid of the tensile reinforcement to
k2 has the value 1.6 if the spacing s between the anchored
bars exceeds 94or (6c + 4) whichever is the larger, k2 has
the value 1.O ifs is less than the larger of 5 @and(3c + 4).
outer edge of the comuression zone For intermediatevalues interpolate linearly (Sec.6 K116)
k3 a factor dependent on the transverse reinforcement and
e eccentricity of loading its position as given in Fig. 14. The factor k3 is taken as
E environmental load zero for strands
design value of Young’s Modulus of concrete used in the 100 MPa
Ecd
stress-strain curve factor used for prediction of Young’s modulus.
Ecn normalized value of Young’s Modulus used in the stress- 0.004 %o/ MPa. (Sec.6 C301)
strain curve a factor dependent on the number of bars in the bundle
design value of Young’s Modulus of reinforcement and is taken as:
characteristic value of Young’s Modulus of reinforce- 0.8 for bundle of 2 bars
ment (200 O00 MPa)
~
~ 0.7 for bundle of 3 bars

~ 0.6 for bundle of 4 bars.
for slabs and beams without shear reinforcement the fac-
tor k, is set equal to 1.5 dd1, but not greater than 1.4
~
nor less than 1.O

concrete cvlinder strength coefficient dependent on cross-sectional height h=l.5 ~
fnnlr I characteristic concrete comuressive strength híh, > 1.0, where hl = 1.0 m (Sec.6 0700)
fcck2 94 MPa (Sec.6 C102) Li distance between zero moment points
fcckj characteristic strength of the taken specimens converted lb develoument length bond bars or bundle of bars
~
into cylinder strength for cylinders with heightldiameter I’b development length for welded wire fabric
ratio 2: 1
de\vlopiiieiii leiipili t¿)r ilie presiressiiip t¿)rce
characteristic compressive cylinder strength at 28 days
based on in-situ tests e t‘t Cci ive leiizili, i Iicorciiciil buckl iiiz leiizili
f”,I I desim comuressive strength of concrete Isk the influence length of the crack, some slippage in the
bond between reinforcement and concrete may occur
fc2d truss analogy: design compressive strength (Sec.6 F308) íSec.6 0700)
in the compression field = 0.6 fCd
general: reduced design compressive strength (Sec.6 M moment
H107) = fCdl(o.8 + 100 El) < fCd Mf total moment in the section acting in combination with
normalized compressive strength of concrete the shear force Vf
fc n
reference stress for the type of failure in question MO -Nt-WCIA,.
frd
(Sec.6 M200) I MOA I numerical smallest member end moment calculated from
f+A desim strength of concrete in uni-axial tension 1. order theorv at end A
f+L I characteristic tensile strength of concrete numerical largest member end moment calculated from
1. order theorv at end B
ftk ftk + 0.5 pw for structures exposed to pressure from liq-
uid or gas in the formulae for calculating the required m ~ c 1oEcn
amount of minimum reinforcement (Sec.6 0503) n number
f+.. I normalized tensile strength of concrete number of cycles in stress-block I (Sec.6 M107)
fsd design strength of reinforcement nt- Nf IfcdAc
fssd design strength of the spiral reinforcement, Ass N desim life of concrete subiected to cvclic stresses
characteristic strength of reinforcement Nf design axial force (positive as tension)
FA I comuressive cauacitv Ni number of cycles with constant amplitude which causes
Fd design load fatigue failure íSec.6 M107)
force in accordance with Fig. 15 NX axial force in x-direction
Ff
characteristic load N, axial force in y-direction
I NX, shear force in the x-v dane
CFvnly, sum of forces Fvncorrespondingto shear failure at cross
P load
Pnressiire
I to shear Pd design pressure
O variable functional load
F.. I N.. + I N.... I tan 0 R radius
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.1 - Page 13
r, I radius of curvature &-TT

I max strain, NW concrete (2.5 m ~ 1 . 5 ) ~ ~(Sec.6
- C301)
RA I design resistance I E".. I max strain. LWA concrete íSec.6 C303)
Rk characteristic resistance
S centre to centre distance between the spiral reinforce- ,E mean stress dependent tensile strain in the concrete at the
ment, measured in the longitudinal direction of the col- same layer and over the same length as 5, (Sec.6 0700)
umn íSec.6 D106) free shrinkage strain of the concrete (negative value)
E,,
S1 I spacing of the transverse reinforcement I íSec.6 0700)
area moment about the centroid axis of the cross-section tensile strain in reinforcement slightly sensitive to corro-
SC
for one part of the concrete section sion on the side with highest strain íSec.6 0206)
design load effect tensile strain at the level of the reinforcement sensitive to
Sd corrosion íSec.6 0206)
Sk characteristic load effect ,
E mean principal tensile strain in the reinforcement in the
crack's influence length at the outer layer of the reinforce-
t specified longitudinal tolerance for the position of the ment (Sec.6 0700)
bar end
n ratio of fatigue utilization
Vcd design shear capacity of a concrete cross-section
Vccd I design shear capacity of a concrete cross-section (com-
uression mode of failure)
Y.
"~f
I material coefficient concrete
load factor
maximum shear force within fatigue stress block y, material factor (material coefficient)
Vmx
material coefficient reinforcement
V, minimum shear force within fatigue stress block il I geometric slenderness ratio = 80 í1+4 a)0.5
Vsd design shear capacity of a concrete cross-section (shear Ze / i, i = (IJA,)
tension mode of failure) force dependent slenderness = il ( - nf / (1+4 O ~ ) ) O . ~
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Vf design shear force for the cross section under considera- angle between the inclined concrete compression struts and
tion the longitudinal axis in the truss model method
WC section modulus of the concrete cross section with re- diameter of the reinforcement bar
spect to the extreme tension fibre or the fibre with least
comuression d,. I eauivalent diameter in term of reinforcement cross section
Wck crackwidth calculated in accordance with Sec.6 0700 P friction coefficient
nominal characteristic crackwidths P density
Wk
Di 2 400 íSec.5 D306). 2 200 íSec.6 C102ì
Z I 0.9 d for sections with a compression zone I o.. I reinforcement ratio in x direction = A"-./íb.d)
I the greater of 0.7 d and I,/ S,
~
z1 I P, reinforcement ratio in y direction = A,, /(b.d)

~
P creep coefficient
202 Greek characters
concrete stress due to long-term loading
angle between transverse shear reinforcement and the lon- DA I design stress
gitudinal axis edge stress due to bending alone (tension
the angle between the reinforcement and the contact sur- uositive)íSec.ó 0700)
face, where only reinforcement with an angle between 90" numerically largest compressive stress, calculated as the
and 45" (to the direction of the force) shall be taken into ac- average value within each stress-block
count numerically least compressive stress, calculated as the av-
erage value within each stress-block
ar I stress due to axial force (tension Dositive) íSec.6 0700)
ratio between the numerically smallest and largest stresses o, I the steel stress due to prestressing
acting simultaneously in the local compressive concrete
zone. The distance between the points used when calculat- z,d I bond strength in accordance with Sec.6 Table J1
ZL.~., I maximum bond stress within fatime stress block
TL.. I minimum bond stress within fatigue stress block
203 Subscripts
6 I deflection
AIS stress variation of the reinforcement ( m a ) (Sec.6 M202) d design value
E strain k characteristic value
Ei - 1.9 %O íSec.6 C301) o olastic
E, I average urinciual tensile strain íSect.6 H107)
E
, I EI - kef,, (Sec.6 C301), - 2 %O (Sec.6 C302)

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page 14 - Sec.2
SECTION 2
SAFETY PHILOSOPHY
A. General critical scenarios that might jeopardise the safety and reliability
of the Structure. Other methodologies for identification of poten-
A 100 Objective tial hazards are Failure Mode and Effect Analysis ( M E A ) and
Hazard and Operability studies (HAZOP).
101 The purpose of this section is to present the safety phi-
losophy and corresponding design format applied in this stand-
ard.
A 300 Safety class methodology
102 This section applies to Offshore Concrete Structures
which shall be built in accordance with this standard. 301 The Offshore Concrete Structure is classified into the
103 This section also provides guidance for extension of this safety class 3 based on failure consequences. For definition see
standard in terms of new criteria etc. Table A l .
104 The integrity of a Offshore Concrete Structures designed I Table A l - Safetv Classes I
and constructed in accordance with this standard is ensured Class for consequences of failure Safety Class
through a safety philosophy integrating different parts as illus-
Minor seriousness 1
trated in Figure 1.
Serious 2
105 An overall safety objective shall be established, planned
and implemented, covering all phases from conceptual devel- I V e n Serious I 3 I
opment until abandonment. A 400 Quality assurance
401 The safety format within this standard requires that
gross errors (human errors) shall be controlled by requirements
for organisation of the work, competence of persons perform-
ing the work, verification of the design, and quality assurance
during all relevant phases.
402 For the purpose of this standard, it is assumed that the
owner of the Offshore Concrete Structure has established a
quality objective. The owner shall, in both internal and exter-
nal quality related aspects, seek to achieve the quality level of
/ \
Systematic products and services intended in the quality objective. Fur-
Review ( Q U ) ther, the owner shall provide assurance that intended quality is
being, or will be, achieved.
403 The quality system shall comply with the requirements
of IS0 9000 and specific requirements quoted for the various
engineering disciplines in this Standard.
404 All work performed in accordance with this standard
Figure 1 shall be subject to quality control in accordance with an imple-
Safety Philosophy structure mented Quality Plan. The Quality Plan should be in accord-
ance with the IS0 9000 series. There may be one Quality Plan
covering all activities, or one overall plan with separate plans
A 200 Systematic review for the various phases and activities to be performed.
201 As far as practical, all work associated with the design, 405 The Quality Plan shall ensure that all responsibilities are
construction and operation of the Offshore Concrete Structure defined. An Interface Manual should be developed that defines
shall be such as to ensure that no single failure will lead to life- all interfaces between the various parties and disciplines in-
threatening situations for any person, or to unacceptable dam- volved, and ensure that responsibilities, reporting and informa-
age to the Structure or the environment. tion routines as appropriate are established.
202 A systematic review or analysis shall be carried out for A 500 Health, safety and environment
all phases in order to identisl and evaluate the consequences of
single failures and series of failures in the Offshore Concrete 501 The objective of this standard is that the design, materi-
Structure, such that necessary remedial measures can be taken. als, fabrication, installation, commissioning, operation, repair,
The extent of the review or analysis shall reflect the criticality re-qualification, and abandonment of the Offshore Concrete
of the Offshore Concrete Structure, the criticality of a planned Structure are safe and conducted with due regard to public
operation, and previous experience with similar systems or op- safety and the protection of the environment.
erations. A 600 Qualifications of personnel
Guidance note:
601 All activities that are performed in the design, construc-
A methodology for such a systematic review is quantitative risk tion, transportation, inspection and maintenance of offshore
analysis (QRA). This may provide an estimation of the overall
risk to human health and safety, environment and assets and structures according to this Standard shall be performed by
comprises: skilled personnel with the qualifications and experience neces-
sary to meet the objectives of this Standard. Qualifications and
- hazard identification, relevant experience shall be documented for all key personnel
- assessment of probabilities of failure events,
- accident developments, and and personnel perfoming tasks that normally require special
- consequence and risk assessment. training or certificates.
It should be noted that legislation in some countries requires risk 602 National provisions on qualifications of personnel such
analysis to be performed, at least at an overall level to identie
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
as engineers, operators, welders, divers, etc. in the place of use

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.2 - Page 15
apply. Additional requirements may be given in the project ~ significant damage to the asset
specification. ~ significant damage to the environment.
There should be a clear and documented link between major

accident hazards and the critical elements.
B. Design Format
103 The following inputs are normally required in order to
B 100 General develop the list of critical elements:
101 The design format within this standard is based upon a ~ description of Structure and mode(s) of operation, includ-
limit state and partial safety factor methodology, also called ing details of the asset manning
Load and Resistance Factor Design format (LRFD). ~ equipment list and layout
The design principles are specifiedin Sec.2 ofDNV-OS-C101. ~ hazard identification report and associated studies
safety case where applicable.
The design principle is based on LRFD, but design may addi-
~
tionally be carried out by both testing and probability based de- 104 The basic criteria in establishing the list of critical ele-
sign. ments is to determine whether the system, component or
The aim of the design of the Offshore Concrete Structure and equipment which should they fail have the potential to
~ ~
its elements are to: cause, or contribute substantially to, a major accident. This as-
sessment is normally based upon consequence of failure only,
~ sustain loads liable to occur during all temporary operating not on the likelihood of failure.
and damaged conditions if required 105 The following methodology should be applied for con-
~ maintain acceptable safety for personnel and environment f i i i n g that prevention, detection, control or mitigation meas-
~ have adequate durability against deterioration during the ures have been correctly identified as critical elements:
design life of the Offshore Concrete Structure.
~ identiSl the major contributors to overall risk,
102 The design of a structural system, its components and ~ identiSl the means to reduce risk,
details shall, as far as possible, account for the following prin- ~ link the measures, the contributors to risk and the means to
ciples: reduce risk to the assets’ systems these can be seen to
~
~ resistance against relevant mechanical, physical and equate to the critical elements of the asset.
chemical deterioration is achieved 106 The record of critical elements typically provides only a
~ fabrication and construction comply with relevant, recog- list of systems and types of equipment or structure etc. In order
nised techniques and practice to complete a meaningful list, the scope of each element should
~ inspection, maintenance and repair are possible. be clearly specified such that there can be no reasonable doubt
as to the precise content of each element.
103 Structures and elements there of, shall possess ductile
resistance unless the specified purpose requires otherwise. 107 The above processes should consider all phases of the li-
fecycle of the Structure.
104 Requirements to materials are given in Sec.4, Loads and
Analyses Requirements in Sec.5, Detailed Design of Offshore 108 The hazard assessment shall consider, as a minimum the
Concrete Structures in Sec.6, Construction in Sec.7 and In- following events:
service Inspection, Maintenance and Conditioned Monitoring
in Sec.8. damage to the primary structure due to:
105 Additionally, in Appendices. A to F, guidelines for: ~ extreme weather
~ ship collision
~ environmental loading (A) ~ dropped objects
~ structural analysis modelling (B)~
~ helicopter collision
~ structural analyses (C) ~ exposure to unsuitable coldwarm temperature
~ seismic analyses (D) ~ exposure to high radiation heat.
~ use of alternative design standard (E)
~ crackwidth calculation (F). fiie and explosion
loss of Primary Liquid Containment (duration shall be de-
termined based on an approved contingency plan)
oil/gas leakage
C. Identification of Major Accidental Hazards release of flammable or toxic gas to the atmosphere or in-
C 100 General side an enclosed space
loss of stability
101 The Standard identified common accidental hazards for loss of any single component in the Station Keeping/
an Offshore Concrete Structure. The designer shall ensure it- Mooring system
self of its completeness by documenting through a hazard iden- loss of ability to offload oil/gas
tification and risk assessment process that all hazards which
may be critical to the safe operation of the Offshore Concrete loss of any critical component in the process system
Structure have been adequately accounted for in design. This loss of electrical power.
process shall be documented.
109 The results of the Hazard Identification and Risk As-
102 Criteria for the identification of major accident hazards sessment shall become an integrate part of the structural design
shall be: of the Offshore Concrete Structure.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page 16 - Sec.3
SECTION 3
DESIGN DOCUMENTATION
A. Overall Planning An earthquake is defined by the horizontal and vertical accel-

erations of the ground. These accelerations are described by
A 100 General their:
101 A fixedfloating concrete offshore Structure shall be frequency spectrum
planned in such a manner that it can meet all requirements re-
~
amplitude.
lated to its functions and use as well as its structural safety and
~
durability requirements. Adequate planning shall be done be- Guidance note:

fore actual design is started in order to have sufficient basis for A site specific earthquake analysis shall be performed. This anal-
the engineering and by that obtain a safe, workable and eco- ysis shall be reported in a Seismic Report where geological and
nomical structure that will fulfil the required functions. seismic characteristics of the location of the gravity based facili-
102 The initial planning shall include determination and de- ties and the surrounding region as well as geotectonic informa-
scription of all the functions the structure shall fulfil, and all tion from the location have to be taken into account. As a
conclusion this report shall recommend all seismic parameters
the criteria upon which the design of the structure are based. required for the design.
Site-specific data such as water depth, environmental condi-
tions and soil properties shall be sufficiently known and docu- The potential of earthquake activity in the vicinity of the pro-
posed site is determined by investigating the seismic history of
mented to serve as basis for the design. All functional and the region (320 km radius) surrounding the site, and relating it to
operational requirements in temporary and service phases as the geological and tectonic conditions resulting from the soil sur-
well as robustness against accidental conditions that can influ- vey.
ence the layout and the structural design shall be considered. These investigationsinvolve thorough research, review and eval-
103 All functional requirements to the Structure affecting the uation of all historically reported earthquakes that have affected,
layout and the structural design, shall be established in a clear or that could reasonably be expected to have affected the site.
format such that it can form the basis for the engineering proc- The geological, tectonic and seismological studies help to estab-
ess and the structural design. lish:
104 Investigation of site-specific data such as seabed topog- - strength level earthquake (SLE)
raphy, soil conditions and environmental conditions shall be - ductility level earthquake @LE).
carried out in accordance with requirements of DNV-OS- ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--.
C101, IS0 19901-1 and IS0 19901-4.
SLE and DLE shall be established as either:
A 200 Description of Offshore Concrete Structure
201 The objective is to provide an overview of the offshore ~ probabilistically, as those that produce ground motions
Structure, highlighting key assumptions and operational phas- with the mean recurrence as a minimum interval of 10 O00
es of the development. years for the DLE and 100 years for the SLE, andor
~ deterministically, assuming that earthquakes which are
202 The overview should be presented in three sections: analogous to maximum historically known earthquakes
a) Overview of facility are liable to occur in future with an epicentre position
which is the most severe with regard to its effects in terms
b) Development bases and phases of intensity on the site, while remaining compatible with
c) Staffing philosophy and arrangements. geological and seismic data. In this case, the SLE acceler-
ations shall be one-half those determined for the DLE.
Cross-references to data sources, figures etc. should be provid-
ed. A 400 Layout of the offshore concrete structure
A 300 Meteorological and ocean conditions 401 The objective is to provide a description of the Offshore
Structure, its unique features (if any), equipment layout for all
301 The objective is to summarise key design parameters decks, and interaction with existing offshore/onshore facilities.
with cross-references to key technical documents.
402 This section should include a description of at least the
302 The metoceadclimatology conditions section should following (where applicable):
cover at least the following:
General:
storm/wave/current conditions
wind ~ structure/platform
seawatedair temperature ~ geographical location
earthquakes ~ water depth.
cyclones
other extreme conditions Layout:
seabed stability
tsunami ~ orientation of the structure
atmospheric stability ~ elevation/plan views
range and rates of changes of barometer pressure ~ equipment
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
rainfall, snow ~ escape routes

corrosive characteristics of the air ~ access to sea deck
frequency of lightening strikes ~ emergency assembly area etc.
relative humidity. ~ structural details, including modelling of structure and
loadings.
303 Seismology for Gravity Based Structure in Seismic Ac-
tive Zones: Interaction with existing facilities:

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.3 - Page 17
~ physical connections A 700 Documentation

support from existing facilities.
701 Documentation shall be prepared for all activities that
~
~ Interaction with expected facilities (where applicable). shall be performed in the design, construction, transportation
and installation of offshore concrete structure. Documentation
A 500 Primary functions shall also be prepared showing records of all inspection and
501 To provide a description of the functions of the Facility control of materials used and execution work performed that
by describing key processes: has an impact on the quality of the final product. The documen-
tation shall be to a standard suitable for independent verifica-
~ oil storage system tion.
~ pipeline systems 702 Necessary procedures and manuals shall be prepared to
~ marine and helicopter operations. ensure that the construction, transportation, installation and in-
service inspection are performed in a controlled manner in full
This information is required as background information essen- compliance with all assumptions of the design.
tial for identification of structural hazards of importance for
the design of the structural load bearing structure of the termi- 703 The most important assumptions, on which the design,
nal. construction and installation work is based with regard to the
502 The primary functions section should include a descrip-
Offshore Concrete structure, shall be presented in a Summary
tion of at least the following (where applicable): Report. The Summary Report shall be available and suitable
for use in connection with operation, maintenance, alterations
Process systems: and possible repair work. The summary report will normally
be based on the documentation identified in A800 and A900.
process description (overview)
process control features A 800 Documentations required prior to construction
safety control systems for use during emergencies e.g.
controls at the TR or emergency assembly area. 801 The technical documentation of concrete structure,
available prior to construction, shall comprise:
storage system
~ design calculations for the complete structure including
oil storage tank individual members
piping ~ project specification and procedures
layout ~ drawings issued for construction and approved by design
electrical manager.
monitoring.
802 All technical documentation shall be dated, signed and
Pipeline and riser systems: verified.
~ location, separation, protection 803 The Project Specification shall comprise:
~ riser connect/disconnect system.
~ construction drawings, giving all necessary information
Utility systems: such as geometry of the structure, amount and position of
reinforcing and prestressing steel and for precast concrete
~ power generation and distribution elements, tolerances, lifting devices, weights, inserts, etc.
~ communications ~ description of all products to be used with any require-
~ other utility systems (e.g. instrument air, hydraulics, ments to the application of the materials. This information
cranes). should be given on the drawings andor in the work de-
Inert gas systems scription. Material specifications, product standards, etc.,
shall be included
~ safety features (e.g. blow-out prevention systems) ~ work description (procedures) related to the construction
~ integration with platform systems. activity.
Workover and wireline systems: 804 The work description should also include all require-
ments to execution of the work, i.e. sequence of operation, in-
~ extent and type of activity planned stallation instructions for embedment plates, temporary
integration with platform systems. supports, work procedures, etc.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Marine functiondsystems: 805 The work description shall include an erection specifica-
tion for precast concrete elements comprising:
supply
standby vessels ~ installation drawings consisting of plans and sections
diving showing the positions and the connections of the elements
ballast and stability systems in the completed work
mooring systems ~ installation data with the required materials properties for
oil/gas offloading system materials applied at site
oil/gas vessel mooring system. ~ installation instructions with necessary data for the han-
dling, storing, setting, adjusting, connection and comple-
Helicopter operations: tion works with required geometrical tolerances
~ onshore base ~ quality control procedures.
~ capability of aircraft
~ helicopter approach. A 900 AS-BUILT documentation
901 The As-Built documentation shall comprise:
A 600 Standards
601 A design brief document shall include references to ~ quality records
Standards and design specifications. ~ method statements

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page 18 - Sec.3
sources of materials, material test certificates andor sup- ~ records of possible dimensional checks at handover
pliers' attestation of conformity, mill certificate, approval ~ a diary or log where the events of the construction process
documents are reported
applications for concessions and responses ~ documentation of the inspection performed
as-built drawings or sufficient information to allow for Geotechnical Design Report (GDR).
preparation of as-built drawings for the entire structure in- ~
cluding any precast elements A 1000 Inspection/monitoring plans for structure in serv-
a description of non-conformities and the results of possi- ice
ble corrective actions
a description of accepted changes to the project specifica- 1001 Plans for monitoring and inspection of the installation
tion shall be prepared.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.4 - Page 19
SECTION 4
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE AND MATERIALS
A. Classification C. Material Requirements

A 100 Application C 100 General
101 The requirements in this Chapter apply to concrete, 101 Requirements to material properties, composition, ex-
grout and reinforcement materials to be used in structural content of testing, inspection etc. are given in this subsection.
crete. 102 The materials selected for the load-bearing structures
shall be suitable for the purpose. The material properties and
A 200 Concrete constituents and reinforcements verification that these materials fulfil the requirements shall be
201 Approval of concrete constituents and reinforcements is documented.
based on material testing where chemical composition, me- 103 The materials, all structural components and the struc-
chanical properties and other specified requirements are ture itself shall be ensured to maintain the specified quality
checked against this Standard and other approved specifica- during all stages of construction and for the intended structural
tion(s). life.
202 Material certification requirements for concrete constit- 104 Material specifications shall be established by the Own-
uents and reinforcements are given in this Chapter. er for all relevant materials to be used in the manufacture of
structural concrete. The specification shall comply with the re-
quirements in this Standard.
B. Definitions 105 Materials complying with recognized standards may be
accepted as an alternative to this Standard.
B 100 Documentation 106 Material with properties other than specified in this
101 Test report is a document made by the Manufacturer Chapter may be accepted after special consideration.
which contains the results of control tests on current produc- 107 Material may be rejected during manufacture or, after
tion, carried out on products having the same method of man- being delivered to the construction site, notwithstanding any
ufacture as the consignment, but not necessarily from the previous acceptance or certification if it is established that the
delivered products themselves. Inspections and tests shall be conditions upon which the approval or certification was based
witnessed and signed by a qualified department different from were not fulfilled.
the production department.
108 All testing is to be performed in accordance with recog-
102 Works’ certificate is a document made by the Manufac- nized standards and documented in accordance with the re-
turer which contains the results of all the required tests and quirements of this standard. In addition, relevant requirements
which certifies that the tests have been carried out by the Man- stated in this Section and in Sec.6 and 7 shall be complied with.
ufacturer on samples taken from the delivered products them-
selves. 109 Constituent materials for structural concrete are cement,
aggregates and water. Structural concrete may also include ad-
103 Mill certificate is a document as for B102, but applying mixtures and additions.
to the production of cement.
110 Constituent materials shall be sound, durable, free from
B 200 General terms defects and suitable for making concrete that will attain and re-
tain the required properties. constituent materials shall not
201 Structural concrete is defined as a cementitious compos- contain harmfùl ingredients in quantities that can be detrimen-
ite material and is the main ingredient for construction of con- tal to the durability of the concrete or cause corrosion of the re-
crete structures. inforcement and shall be suitable for the intended use.
202 Grout is a cementitious material and includes the con- 111 Approval of concrete constituents and reinforcements
stituent materials; cement, water and admixture. Appropriate shall be based on material testing where chemical composition,
aggregates may be included. mechanical properties and other specified requirements are
203 Reinforcement is defiied as the constituents of structural tested according to, and are checked against, applicable Inter-
concrete providing the tensile strength that will give the con- national Standards and approved specifications. In lieu of rel-
evant International Standards for specific test methods and
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
crete its ductile characteristics. In these Rules reinforcement is

categorised as: requirements, other recognized national standards shall be
used. In the absence of such standards, also recognized recom-
a) Ordinary reinforcement mendations from international or national bodies may be used.
b) Prestressing reinforcement 112 Material specifications shall be established for all mate-
rials to be used in the manufacture of concrete, in the reinforce-
c) Special reinforcement. ment system and the prestressing system.
204 Cement is the binder component in a structural concrete 113 All testing shall be performed in accordance with recog-
mix. nized standards as stated in the project specification or other-
wise agreed upon.
205 Aggregates are the main ingredient both with respect to
volume and weight in a structural concrete mix. C200 Cement
206 Non-cementitious materials are defiied within the con- 201 Only cement with established suitability shall be used.
text of this Standard as materials such as epoxy and poly- Its track record for good performance and durability in marine
urethane which are specially made for use together with environments, and after exposure to stored oil if relevant, shall
structural concrete either to improve the concrete properties or be demonstrated. Cement shall be tested and delivered in ac-
to supplement, repair or replace the concrete. cordance with a standard recognized in the place of use.

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page20 - Sec.4
202 Cement is to be tested according to an approved method. quired for documentation (references to recognized standards
Table C1 gives the tests and the preferred method of testing re- are given).
Code References
Property Method/Apparatus
ASTM I BS DIN NS IS0
Fineness Blaine C204-75 I 12:2:71 I 1164:4 I 3049 I R679-68
Oxide composition C114-69 4550:2:70 1164:3 3090
Normal consistency Vicat C187-74 12:2:71 1164:5 3049
Volumetric stability Le Chatelier 12:2:71 3049
Initialífinal set Vicat C191-74 12:2:71 1164:5 3049
203 The compound (mineral) composition of cements may mally be used without further investigation.
be calculated with sufficient accuracy from Bogue's unmodi- 302 The required water content is to be determined by con-
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
fied formulae, as given in ASTM C 150-74. sidering the strength and durability of hardened concrete and
Guidance note: the workability of fresh concrete. The water to cement ratio by
The tricalcium aluminate (C3A) content calculated according to weight may be used as a measure. For requirements to W/C ra-
C202 should preferably not exceed 10%. However, as the corro- tio, see D303.
sion protection of embedded steel is adversely affected by a -low
C3A -content, it is not advisable to aim for values lower than ap- 303 Water resulting in a concrete strength of less than 90%
prox. 5%. The imposed limits should not be too strictly enforced, of that obtained by using distilled water, shall not be used, nei-
but should be evaluated in each case. ther shall water that reduces the setting time to less than 45
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
min. or change the setting time by more than 30 min. relative
to distilled water, be used.
204 Cement is to be delivered with a Mill Certificate con- 304 Salt water (e.g. raw seawater) shall not to be used as
taining, at least, the following information: mixing or curing water for structural concrete.
~ Physical properties. i.e. fineness, setting times, strength in 305 Water source(s) shall be investigated and approved for
mortar, volumetric stability, normal consistency and their suitability and dependability for supply.
soundness. 306 Icy water may be used as mixing water provided the wa-
~ Chemical composition, including mineralogic composi- ter melts before or during the mixing process, ensuring a re-
tion, loss on ignition, insoluble residue, sulphate content, sulting good mixture of the water, cement, aggregate and
chloride content and pozzolanity. admixture.
The certificate should, in addition to confirming compliance C 400 Normal weight aggregates
with the specified requirements, also to state the type/grade 401 Aggregate source(s) (sand and gravel) shall be investi-
with reference to the approved standardspecification, batch gated and approved for their suitability and dependability for
identification and the tonnage represented by the document.
supply.
205 The following types of Portland cement are, in general, Only aggregates with established suitability shall be used. Ag-
assumed to be suitable for use in structural concrete andor gregates for structural concrete shall have sufficient strength
grout in a marine environment if unmixed with other cements: and durability. They shall not become soft, be excessively fri-
~ Portland cements able or expand.
~ Portland composite cements They shall be resistant to decomposition when wet. They shall
~ Blastfurnace cements, with high clinker content. not react with the products of hydration of the cement-forming
products and shall not affect the concrete adversely. Marine
Provided suitability is demonstrated also the following types aggregates shall not be used unless they are properly and thor-
of cement may be considered: oughly washed to remove all chlorides.
Blastfurnace cements 402 Aggregates shall be delivered with a test report contain-
ing, at least, the following listed information:
~
~ Pozzolanic cements
~ Composite cement. Description of the source.
The above types of cement have characteristics specified in in- Description of the production system.
ternational and national standards. They can be specified in Particle size distribution (grading) including silt content.
grades based on the 28-day strength in mortar. Cements shall Particle shape, flakiness, etc.
normally be classified as normal hardening, rapid hardening or Porosity and water absorption.
slowly hardening cements. Content of organic matter.
Density and specific gravity.
Guidance note: Strength in concrete and mortar.
Low heat cement may be used where heat of hydration may have Potential reactivity with alkalis in cement.
an adverse effect on the concrete during curing. Petrographical composition and properties that may affect
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- the durability of the concrete.
403 Normal weight aggregates shall, in general, be of natural
C 300 Mixing water mineral substances. They shall be either crushed or uncrushed
301 Only mixing water with established suitability shall be with particle sizes, grading and shapes such that they are suit-
used. The mixing water shall not contain constituents in quan- able for the production of concrete. Relevant properties of ag-
tities that can be detrimental to the setting, hardening and du- gregate shall be defined, e.g. type of material, shape, surface
rability of the concrete or can cause corrosion of the texture, physical properties and chemical properties. Aggre-
reinforcement. Drinking water from public supply may nor- gates shall be free from harmful substances quantities that can

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.4 - Page21
affect the properties and the durability of the concrete adverse- culated as free calcium chloride, is not to exceed 0.3% of the
ly. Examples of harmful substances are claylike and silty par- weight of cement.
ticles, organic materials, and sulphates and other salts.
C 700 Admixtures
404 Aggregates shall be evaluated for risk of Alkali Silica
Reaction (ASR) in concrete according to Internationally recog- 701 Admixtures to be used in concrete shall be tested under
nized test methods. Suspect aggregates shall not be used unless site conditions to verifj that these products will yield the re-
specifically tested and approved. The approval of an aggregate quired effects, without impairing the other properties required.
that might combine with the hydration products of the cement A test report is to be prepared to document such verification.
to cause ASR shall state which cement the approval applies to. The test report is to form a part of the concrete mix design doc-
The aggregate for structural concrete shall have sufficient umentation.
strength and durability. 702 Relevant test report(s) from a recognized laboratory
405 An appropriate grading of the fine and coarse aggregates shall be submitted before use of an admixture.
for use in concrete shall be established. The grading and shape 703 The extent of testing is normally to be in accordance
characteristics of the aggregates shall be consistent throughout with the requirements given in recognized International Stand-
the concrete production. ards.
406 Aggregates of different grading shall be stockpiled and 704 Air-entraining admixtures may be used to improve the
transported separately. properties of hardened concrete with respect to frost resistance,
407 Aggregates may generally be divided into two groups, or to reduce the tendency of bleeding, segregation or cracking.
these being: 705 For investigations carried out under site conditions, the
~ sand or fine aggregate (materials less than 5 mm) following properties shall be tested:
~ coarse aggregate (materials larger than 5 mm). ~ consistence, e.g. at 5 and 30 minutes after mixing.
~ water requirement for a given consistence.
408 Maximum aggregate size is to be specified based on shrinkagelswelling.
considerations concerning concrete properties, spacing of rein-
~
strength in compression and tension (bending) at 1-3, 28

forcement and cover to the reinforcement.
~
and 91 days.
409 Testing of aggregates is to be carried out at regular inter-
vals both at the quarry and on construction site during concrete C 800 Repair materials
production. The frequency of testing is to be determined taking 801 The composition and properties of repair materials shall
the quality and uniformity of supply and the concrete produc- be such that the material fulfils its intended use. Only materials
tion volume into account. The frequency of testing shall be in with established suitability shall be used. Emphasis shall be
accordance with International standards. given to ensure that such materials are compatible with the ad-
C 500 Lightweight aggregates
jacent material, particularly with regard to the elasticity and
temperature dependent properties.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
501 Lightweight aggregates in load bearing structures shall
802 Requirements for repair materials shall be subject to
be made from expanded clay, expanded shale, slate or sintered case-by-case consideration and approval. Deterioration of such
pulverized ash from coal-fired power plants, or from other ag- materials when applied for temporary use shall not be allowed
gregates with corresponding documented properties. Only ag- to impair the function of the structure at later stages.
gregates with established suitability shall be used.
803 The extent of testing of repair materials shall be speci-
502 Lightweight aggregates shall have uniform strength
properties, stiffness, density, degree of burning, grading, etc. fied in each case.
The dry density shall not vary more than I7.5%. C 900 Non-cementitious materials
C 600 Additions 901 The composition and properties of non-cementitious
601 Additions shall conform to requirements of International materials shall be determined so that the material fulfils its in-
standards, and only additions with established suitability shall tended use. Special emphasis is to be given to ensure that such
be used. materials are as similar as possible to the adjacent material,
particular in the sense of elasticity and temperature dependent
602 Additions shall not be harmfùl or contain harmful impu- properties. Its properties shall be documented with respect to
rities in quantities that can be detrimental to the durability of its intended application.
the concrete or the reinforcement. Additions shall be compati-
ble with the other ingredients of the concrete. The use of com- C 1000 Equivalent materials
binations of additions and admixtures shall be carefully 1001 When using equivalent material based on experience,
considered with respect to the overall requirements of the con- the equivalence shall be documented. Such documentation
crete. The effectiveness of the additions shall be checked by shall as a minimum identifj the main properties including
trial mixes. project specific requirements and parameters affecting these. It
603 Latent hydraulic or pozzolanic supplementary materials shall be demonstrated that the experience is relevant for all
such as silica fume, pulverized fly ash and granulated blast fùr- identified parameters.
nace slag may be used as additions. The amount is dependent
on requirements to workability of fresh concrete and required
properties of hardened concrete. The content of silica fume
used as additions should normally not exceed 10% of the D. Concrete
weight of Portland cement clinker. When fly ash, slag or other
pozzolana is used as additions, their content should normally D 100 General considerations
not exceed 35% of the total weight of cement and additions. 101 Material specifications for structural concrete shall be
When Portland cement is used in combination with only established for all materials to be used.
ground granulated blast fumace slag, the slag content may be
increased. The clinker content shall, however, not be less than D 200 Concrete categorization
30% of the total weight of cement and slag. 201 Normal Strength Concrete is a concrete of Grade C30 to
604 The total amount of chlorides in the fresh concrete, cal- C65. The Concrete Grade is derived from the characteristic

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page22 - Sec.4
cylinder strength of concrete in accordance with Sec.6, Table adequate frost resistance. This requirement may be considered
C 1 “Concrete Grade and structural strength(MPa)”. to be satisfied if the air content in the fresh concrete made with
202 High Strength Concrete is a concrete of Grade in excess natural aggregates is at least 3% for a maximum particle size
of C65. of 40 mm, or at least 5% for a maximum particle size of 20
mm. The air pores should be evenly distributed, with a calcu-
203 Light Weight Aggregate Concrete (LWA) is a concrete lated spacing factor not exceeding 0.25 mm.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
made with lightweight aggregates conforming to requirements

contained in recognized standards, e.g. relevant ASTM, AC1 307 To improve the resistance against attacks from salts in
or EN standard. the seawater, cement with a moderate C3A content may be
used, see Sec. 4 C200.
204 LWA concrete may be composed using a mixture of
LWA and normal weight aggregate. 308 The total chloride ion content of the concrete shall not
exceed O. 10% of the weight of cement in ordinary reinforced
D 300 Concrete mix concrete and in concrete containing prestressing steel.
301 The concrete composition and the constituent materials 309 In the splash zone the cement content is not to be less
shall be selected to satisSl the requirements of this Standard than 400 kg/m3. For reinforced or prestressed concrete not
and the project specifications for the fresh and hardened con- within the splash zone, the cement content is dependent on the
crete such as consistence, density, strength, durability and pro- maximum size of aggregate, as follows:
tection of embedded steel against corrosion. Due account shall
up to 20 mm ag regate requires a minimum cement con-
be taken of the methods of execution to be applied. The re-
quirements of the fresh concrete shall ensure that the material
~
tent of 360 kg/m 3

is fully workable in all stages of its manufacture, transport, from 20 mm to 40 mm ag regate requires a minimum ce-
placing and compaction.
~
ment content of 320 kg/m !

from 40 mm and greater the minimum required cement
302 The required properties of fresh and hardened concrete
~
shall be specified. These required properties shall be verified content is to be established by appropriate testing.
by the use of recognized testing methods, International Stand- 310 The concrete grades are defined as specified in Sect. 6.
ards or recognized national standards. Recognized standard is
relevant ASTM, AC1 and EN standard. The properties of hardened concrete are generally related to the
concrete grade. For concrete exposed to sea water the mini-
303 Compressive strength shall always be specified, in addi- mum grade is C40. For concrete which is not directly exposed
tion tensile strength, modulus of elasticity (E-modulus) and to the marine environment, the concrete grade shall not be less
fracture energy may be specified. Properties which can cause than C30.
cracking of structural concrete shall be accounted for, i.e.
creep, shrinkage, heat of hydration, thermal expansion and 311 Where lightweight aggregates with a porous structure is
similar effects. The durability of structural concrete is related used, the mean value of oven dry ( 105OC) density for two con-
to permeability, absorption, diffusion and resistance to physi- crete specimens after 28 days shall not deviate by more than 50
cal and chemical attacks in the given environment, a low wa- kg/m3 from the required value. Any individual value shall not
tedcement-binder ratio is generally required in order to obtain deviate by more than 75 kg/m3. The mean value for the entire
adequate durability. The concrete shall normally have a water/ production should lie within +20 kg/m3 to -50 kg/m3
cement-binder ratio not greater than 0.45. In the splash zone, 312 If the water absorption of the concrete in the final struc-
this ratio shall be not higher than 0.40. ture is important, this property shall be determined by testing
The tensile strength shall be determined based on splitting under conditions corresponding to the conditions to which the
strength test. concrete will be exposed.
The tests shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant
International recognised standard, ASTM, ACI, EN or ISO.
304 If pozzolanic or latent hydraulic additions are used in the E. Grout and Mortar
production of concrete, in combination with Portland cement
or Portland composite cement, these materials may be included E 100 General considerations
in the calculation of an effective watedcement (W/C) binder
ratio. The method of calculation of effective W/C ratio shall be 101 The mix design of grout and mortar shall be specified for
documented. its designated purpose.
305 The durability of structural concrete is to be related to 102 The constituents of grout and mortar shall meet the same
permeability and resistance against physical and chemical at- type of requirements for their properties as those given for the
tacks. constituents of concrete.
Guidance note: 103 The properties of fresh and hardened grout and mortar
To protect the reinforcement against corrosion, and to give the shall be specified as required for the intended use. The cement
concrete sufficient durability, the coefficient of permeability of grout for injection in prestressing ducts and the ingredients
concrete should be low (10-l2 - mísec). The test shall be car- used shall have adequate properties complying with the speci-
ried out in accordance with relevant ACI, ASTM, EN or IS0 fications from design. The strength and stiffness shall be given
standard. due attention, and be consistent with design requirements. In
This is normally obtained by use of order to obtain stiffness commensurable with that of the con-
crete, special fine grain aggregates or admixtures may have to
- Sound and dense aggregates
- Proper grading of fine and coarse aggregates be considered.
- Rich mixes with a minimum cement content of 300kg/m3 104 All materials shall be batched by mass, except the mix-
- Low water-cement ratio; i.e. not greater than 0.45 ing water, which may also be batched by volume. The batching
- Good concreting practice and workmanship ensuring ade- shall be within an accuracy of 2% for cement and admixtures
quate workability, proper handling, transportation, placing and 1% for water. The watedcement ratio should not be higher
and consolidation, and no segregation. than 0.45. Batching and mixing shall be such so that specified
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- requirements for fluidity and bleeding in the plastic condition,
volume change when hardening, and strength and stiffness
306 Concrete subjected to freezing and thawing is to have when hardened are complied with.

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.4 - Page23
F. Reinforcement G. Prestressing Steel

F 100 Reinforcement steel G100 General
101 Reinforcement shall be suitable for their intended serv- 101 Prestressing steel as a product shall comply with IS0
6934 andor relevant International standards on prestressing
ice conditions and are to have adequate properties with respect steel.
to strength, ductility, toughness, weldability, bond properties
(ribbed), corrosion resistance and chemical composition. 102 Prestressing steel shall be delivered with a Works Cer-
tificate.
These properties shall be specified by supplier or determined
by recognized test methods 103 The fatigue properties (S-N curves) for the prestressing
steel shall be documented.
102 Reinforcing steel shall comply with IS0 6935, Parts 2
and 3 or relevant international standards on reinforcing steel. G 200 Components for the prestressing system
103 Consistency shall be ensured between material proper- 201 Tendons (wires, strands, bars), anchorage devices, cou-
plers and ducts or sheaths are part of a prestressing system de-
ties assumed in the design and requirements of the standard scribed in the project specification. All parts shall be
used. In general, hot-rolled, ribbed bars of weldable quality compatible and clearly identifiable.
and with high ductility shall be used. Where the use of seismic 202 Prestressing systems shall comply with the requirements
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
detailing is required, the reinforcement provided shall meet the of project specifications by design and shall have the approval
ductility requirements of the reference standard used in the de- of an authorized institution or the national authority.
sign. 203 Sheaths for post-tensioning tendons shall in general be
104 Fatigue properties and SN-curves shall be consistent of a semi rigid or rigid type, water tight and with adequate stiff-
with the assumptions of design. ness to prevent damages and deformations. The ducts shall be
of steel unless other types are specified by design.
105 Reinforcement steel shall be delivered with a Works 204 Components for the prestressing system shall be deliv-
Certificate. The requirement for a Works Certificate may be ered with a Works Certificate.
waived if the reinforcement is produced and tested under a na-
205 Fatigue properties (S-N curves) for the complete assem-
tional or international certification scheme, and all the required bly system shall be documented.
test data are documented based on statistical data from the pro-
ducer. All steel shall be clearly identifiable. 206 Friction loss parameters between the prestressing steel
and the ductdsheaths shall be documented.
106 Galvanised reinforcement may be used where provi-
sions are made to ensure that there will be no reactions with the
cement that has a detrimental effect on the bond to the galva-
nised reinforcement.
H. Embedded Materials
107 Stainless steel may be used provided the requirements to H100 General
mechanical properties for ordinary reinforcing steel, are met. 101 Embedded materials, such as steel and composites, shall
be suitable for their intended service conditions and shall have
108 Epoxy coated reinforcement may be used provided the adequate properties with respect to strength, ductility, tough-
requirements to mechanical properties for ordinary reinforcing ness, weldability, laminar tearing, corrosion resistance and
bars, are met. chemical composition. The supplier shall document these
properties.
109 Tempcore reinforcement may be used provided the re-
quirement to mechanical properties for ordinary reinforcing
bars, are met.
I. Testing of Materials
F 200 Mechanical splices and end anchorages for rein-
forcement I 100 Testing of freshly mixed concrete
201 Anchorage devices or couplers shall comply with na- 101 Requirements to the testing of freshly mixed concrete
are given in Sec.7 D and E.
tional standards and be as defined in the project specification.
Fatigue properties and SN-curves shall be consistent with the I200 Testing of concrete in the structure
assumptions of the design and be documented for the actual 201 Requirements to the testing of concrete in structures are
combinations of rebars, couplers or end anchorages. given in Sec.7 F.
202 Mechanical splices and end anchorages shall be deliv- I300 Grout for prestressing tendons
ered with Works Certificate.
301 The requirements for the cement used in the grout are
203 Friction welded end anchorages on rebars (T-heads) given in Sec.7 F. For testing of the grout, see Sec.7 F.
shall be qualification tested in advance with the actual type of
rebar and be routinely tested during production. The test pro- I400 Reinforcement steel
gram shall include a tension test and a bend test to document 401 Reinforcement steel is to be delivered with a Works Cer-
strength and ductility of the connection. The friction weld shall tificate. See F105.
not fail before the rebar. I500 Prestressing steel
F 300 Approval of welding procedures 501 Prestressing steel is to be delivered with a Works Certif-
icate. See G102.
301 Welding procedures, together with the extent of testing
for weld connections relevant to reinforced concrete and con- I 600 Mechanical splices for reinforcement
crete structures, shall be specified and approved in each case. 601 Mechanical splices shall be delivered with Works Cer-

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page24 - Sec.4
tificate. See F202. (for weld connections relevant to reinforced concrete manufac-
ture) shall be documented.
I700 Components for the prestressing system
701 Components for the prestressing system shall be deliv- I 900 Testing Of repair
ered with Works Certificate. See G204. 901 The repair materials shall be documented in accordance
with relevant recognised International standard, i.e. ASTM,
I 800 Welding procedures ACI, EN and ISO.
801 Welding procedures together with the extent of testing
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKENot
VERITAS
for Resale
Sec.5 - Page25
SECTION 5
LOADS AND ANALYSES REQUIREMENTS
A. Requirements to Design ments, settlements and vibrations. The structure and its layout
shall be such that it serves as a safe and functional base for all
A 100 General mechanical installations that are needed for the facility to op-
101 The engineering of a fixedfloating offshore concrete erate. Adequate performance shall be demonstrated in design
platform shall be performed in such a way that all functional documentation.
and operational requirements relating to the safety of the in- Structural Concept Requirements
stallation and its operation are met, as well as those require-
ments relating to its functions as an offshore facility. 202 The structural concept, details and components shall be
such that the structure:
102 The functional requirements will affect the layout of the
structure including the loading scenarios that will have to be a) has adequate robustness with small sensitivity to local
considered in the design of the structure. The functional re- damage
quirements will be related to both the site-specific conditions
as well as the requirements to the platform as a production fa- b) can be constructed in a controlled manner
cility for the production of hydrocarbons, or other activities in c) provides simple stress paths that limit stress concentra-
the operations of a field. tions
Site related Functional Requirements d) is resistant to corrosion and other degradation
103 The platform shall be positioned and oriented on site e) is suitable for condition monitoring, maintenance and re-
such that it takes account of the reservoir, other platforms, gov- p air
erning wind and wave direction, accessibility of ships and hel-
icopters and safety in case of fire or leakages of hydrocarbons. f) remain stable in a damaged condition
Environmental Considerations g) fulfils requirements for removal if required.
104 There shall be a site-specific evaluation of all types of Materials Requirements
environmental conditions that can affect the layout and design
of the structure, including rare events with a low probability of 203 The materials selected for the load-bearing structures
occurrence. shall be suitable for the purpose. The material properties and
105 The deck elevation shall be determined in order to give verification that these materials fulfil the requirements shall be
an adequate air gap, based on site-specific data, allowing the documented. Requirements to concrete and reinforcement ma-
passage of extreme wave crests higher than the design wave terials are given in Sec.4.
crest and taking due account of possible interacting ice or ice- 204 The materials, all structural components and the struc-
bergs (if relevant). Interaction with deck supports and under- ture itself shall be ensured to maintain the specified quality
water caisson effects. during all stages of construction. The requirement to quality
106 The water depth used in establishing layout and in the assurance is given in Sec.2.
design shall be based on site-specific data taking due account Execution Requirements
of potential settlements, subsidence, etc.
205 Requirements to execution, testing and inspection of the
Facility Operational Requirements various parts of the structure shall be specified on the basis of
107 The functional requirements to be considered related to the significance (risk level) of the various parts with regard to
the nroductiodonerational svstem are such as: the overall safety of the completed and installed structure as
well as the structure in temporary conditions. See Sec.4,7 and
layout of production wells, risers and pipelines, etc. 8.
storage volume, compartmentation, densities, tempera- Temporary Phases Requirements
tures, etc. in case of stored products
206 The structure shall be designed for all stages with the
safeguards against spillage and contamination same intended reliability as for the final condition unless oth-
access requirements both internal and external, both for erwise agreed. This applies also for moorings or anchorage
operation, inspection and condition monitoring, etc. systems applied for stages of construction afloat. Reference is
made to DNV Rules for the Planning and Execution of Marine
interface to topsides/plant Operations.
installations for supply boats and other vessels servicing
the platfordinstallation. 207 For floating structures and all floating stages of the ma-
rine operations and construction afloat of fixed installations,
108 All hazard scenarios that can be associated with the op- sufficient positive stability and reserve buoyancy shall be en-
erations/maloperations and the functions of the platform shall sured. Both intact and damaged stability should be evaluated
be established and evaluated, such as fire, explosions, loss of on the basis of an accurate geometric model. Adequate free-
intended pressure differentials, flooding, leakages, rupture of board shall be provided. One compartment damage stability
pipe systems, dropped objects, ship impacts, etc. The platford should normally be provided except for short transient phases.
installation shall be designed to give adequate safety to person- The stability and freeboard shall be in accordance with DNV-
nel and an adequate safety against damage to the structure or OSS- 102 “Rules for Classification of Production and Storage
pollution to the environment. Units” .
208 Weight control required for floating structures and tem-
A 200 Structural requirements porary phases of fixed installations should be performed by
201 Structures and structural members shall perform satis- means of well-defined, documented, robust and proven weight
factorily during all design conditions, with respect to structural control. The system output should be up to-date weight reports
strength, mooring, stability, ductility, durability, displace- providing all necessary data for all operations.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page26 - S e c 5
A 300 Design principles 103 The load effects shall be determined by means of recog-
General nized methods that take into account the variation of the load
in time and space, the configuration and stifhess of the struc-
301 The design shall be performed according to the limit ture, relevant environmental and soil conditions, and the limit
state design as detailed in DNV-OS-C101 Sec.2. The design state that is to be verified.
shall provide adequate strength and tightness in all design sit-
uations such that the assumptions made are complied with: 104 Simplified methods to compute load effects may be ap-
plied if it can be verified that they produce results on the safe
the design of concrete structures shall be in accordance to side.
this Standard 105 If dynamic or non-linear effects are of significance as a
the foundation design shall be in accordance DNV-OS- consequence of a load or a load effect, such dynamic or non-
C101 Sec.11 linear effects shall be considered.
the design of steel structures shall be in accordance to
DNV-OS-C101 Sec.4,5,6 and 9 106 Load effects from hydrodynamic and aerodynamic loads
the possible interface between steel structure and concrete shall be determined by methods which accounts for the kine-
structure shall be included in the design matics of the liquid or air, the hydrodynamic load, and the in-
the design for load and load effects shall be in accordance teraction between liquid, structure and soil. For calculation of
with DNV-OS-C101 Sec.3. See also special requirements global load effects from wind, simplified models may normal-
to concrete structures in this Section ly suffice.
the design for accidental limit states shall be in accordance 107 Seismic load effect analyses shall be based on character-
with DNV-OS-C101 Sec.7. See also identifications of istic values described by an applicable seismic response spec-
hazards in this Standard and Sec.5 for reinforced concrete trum or a set of carefully selected real or artificially simulated
design earthquake time histories. A combination of these methods
the cathodic protection shall be designed in accordance may be used if such combination will produce a more correct
with DNV-OS-C101 Sec.10 result. The analysis shall account for the effects of seismic
stability of the structure afloat shall be calculated in ac- waves propagation through the soil, and the interaction be-
cordance with DNV-OSS-102 “Rules for Classification of tween soil and structure.
Production and Storage Units”. Gravity Based Structures located in seismically active area
302 Design Loads shall be designed to possess adequate strength and stiffness to
withstand the effect of strength level earthquake (SLE) as well
The representative values of loads shall be selected according as sufficient ductility to remain stable during the rare motions
to DNV-OS-C101 Sec.3 and this standard. of greater severity associated with ductility level earthquake
The partial safety factors for loads shall be chosen with respect (DLE). The sufficiency of the structural strength and ductility
to the limit states and the combination of loads. Values are gen- is to be demonstrated by strength and, as required, ductility
erally given in DNV-OS-C101 Sec.2 Design by LRFD Method analyses.
and specifically for Reinforced Concrete in Sec.5 C100. The strength level earthquake (SLE) is defined as a earthquake
303 Design Resistance with a recurrence period of 100 years.
The characteristic resistance of a cross-section or a member The ductility level earthquake (DLE) is defined as an earth-
shall be derived from characteristic values of material proper- quake with an individual frequency of occurrence of per
ties and nominal geometrical dimensions. year.
The design resistance is obtained by amending the characteris- 108 The soil-structure interaction shall be assessed in the de-
tic values by the use of appropriate partial safety factors for termination of the soil reactions used in the calculation of load
materials. effects in the structure. Parameters shall be varied with upper
The design resistance shall be determined using this standard. and lower bound values to ensure that all realistic patterns of
distribution are enveloped, considering long and short term ef-
fects, unevenness of the seabed, degrees of elasticity and plas-
ticity in the soil and, if relevant, in the structure. See DNV-OS-
B. Load and Load Effects C101 Sec.11.
B 100 General B 200 Environmental loads

101 The load and load effects shall be in accordance with 201 Wind, wave, tide and current are important sources of
DNV-OS-C101 Sec.3. The loads are generally classified as: environmental loads (E) on many structures located offshore.
See Appendix A for more details. In addition, depending on lo-
a) Environmental, E cation, seismic or ice loads or both can be significant environ-
mental loads.
b) Functional
202 Procedures for the estimation of seismic actions are pro-
~ permanent, G vided in DNV-OS-C101 Sec.3.
~ variable, Q 203 The computation of ice loads is highly specialized and
~ imposed deformation, D location dependent and is not covered in detailed by this Stand-
~ accidental, A. ard. Ice loads shall be computed by skilled personnel with ap-
102 The loads shall include the corresponding external reac- propriate knowledge in the physical ice environment in the
tion. The level of the characteristic loads shall be chosen ac- location under consideration and with appropriate experience
cording to the condition under investigation: in developing loads based on this environment and the load re-
turn periods in accordance with DNV-OS-C101 Sec.3.
~ under temporary conditions (construction, towing and in-
stallation) B 300 Extreme wave loads
~ during operation 301 Wave loads from extreme conditions shall be deter-
~ when subject to accidental effects mined by means of an appropriate analysis procedure supple-
~ in a damaged condition mented, if required, by a model test program. Global loads on
~ during removal. the structure shall be determined. In addition, local loads on
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
S e c 5 - Page27
various appurtenances, attachments and components shall be ~ self weight of the structure
determined. For more details see Appendix A. ~ weight of permanent ballast
~ weight of permanently installed parts of mechanical outfit-
B 400 Diffraction analysis ting, including risers, etc.
401 Global loads on large volume bodies shall generally be ~ external hydrostatic pressure up to the mean water level
estimated by applying a validated diffraction analysis proce- ~ prestressing force (may also be considered as deformation
dure. In addition, local kinematics, required in the design of loads).
various appurtenances, shall be evaluated including incident,
diffraction and (if appropriate) radiation effects. For more de- 903 Variable Functional Loads (Q) originate from normal
tails, see Appendix A. operations of the structure and vary in position, magnitude, and
direction during the period considered. They include loads
B 500 Additional requirements for dynamic analysis from:
under wave load
personnel
501 In cases where the structure can respond dynamically, modules, parts of mechanical outfitting and structural
such as in the permanent configuration (fixed or floating), dur- parts planned to be removed during the operation phase
ing wave load or earthquakes or in temporary floating condi- weight of gas and liquid in pipes and process plants
tions, additional parameters associated with the motions of the stored goods, tanks, etc.
structure shall be determined. Typically, these additional ef- weight and pressure in storage compartments and ballast-
fects shall be captured in terms of inertia and damping terms in ing systems
the dynamic analysis. temperatures in storages, etc. (may also be considered as
502 Ringing can control the extreme dynamic response of deformation loads)
particular types of concrete gravity structure. A ringing re- loads occurring during installation and drilling operations,
sponse resembles that generated by an impulse excitation of a etc.
linear oscillator: it features a rapid build up and slow decay of ordinary boat impact, rendering and mooring.
energy at the resonant period of the structure. If it is important, 904 The assumptions that are made concerning variable
ringing is excited by non-linear (second, third and higher or- loads shall be reflected in a Summary Report and shall be com-
der) processes in the wave loading that are only a small part of plied with in the operations. Possible deviations shall be eval-
the total applied environmental load on a structure. uated and, if appropriate, shall be considered in the assessment
503 The effects of motions in the permanent configuration of accidental loads.
such as those occurring in an earthquake, floating structures or 905 Certain loads, which can be classified as either perma-
in temporary phases of fixed installations during construction, nent or variable, may be treated as imposed deformations (D).
tow or installation, on internal fluids such as ballast water in Load effects caused by imposed deformations shall be treated
tanks, shall be evaluated. Such sloshing in tanks generally af- in the same way as load effects from other normal loads or by
fects the pressures, particularly near the free surface of the flu- demonstration of strain compatibility and equilibrium between
id. applied loads, deformations, and internal forces.
B 600 Model testing 906 Potential imposed deformations are derived from sourc-
601 The necessity of model tests to determine extreme wave es that include:
loads shall be determined on a case-by-case basis. See Appen-
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
thermal effects
dix A for more details.
~
~ prestressing effects
B 700 Current load ~ creep and shrinkage effects
~ differential settlement of foundation components.
701 Currents through the depth, including directionality,
shall be combined with the design wave conditions. The Char- See also D40 1.
acteristic current load shall be determined in accordance with
DNV-OS-C101 Sec.3. For more details, see Appendix A. B 1000 Accidental loads
702 If found necessary scour protection should be provided 1001 The Accidental Loads (A) are generally defiied in
around the base ofthe structure. See DNV-OS-C101 Sec.11. DNV-OS-C101 Sec.3 G Accidental Loads. For LNG contain-
ment structures see also Sec.7.
B 800 Wind Loads 1002 Accidental loads can occur from extreme environmen-
801 Wind loads may be determined in accordance with tal conditions, malfunction, mal operation or accident. The ac-
DNV-OS-C101 Sec.3 E700. cidental loads to be considered in the design shall be based on
an evaluation of the operational conditions for the structure,
802 Wind forces on a Offshore Concrete Structure (OSC) due account taken to factors such as personnel qualifications,
will consist of two parts: operational procedures, installations and equipment, safety
systems and control procedures.
a) Wind forces on topside structure.
1003 Primary sources of accidental loads include:
b) Wind forces on concrete structure above sea level.
~ rare occurrences of extreme environmental loads
For more details, see Appendix A. ~ fiies
B 900 Functional loads ~ flooding
~ explosions
901 Functional loads are considered to be all loads except ~ dropped objects
environmental loads, and include both permanent and variable ~ collisions
loads. The functional loads are defined in DNV-OS-C101 ~ unintended pressure difference changes.
Sec.3 C “Permanent Loads” and D “Variable Functional
Loads”. 1004 Rare occurrences of extreme environmental loads
902 Permanent loads (G) are loads that do not vary in mag- This will include extreme environmental loads such as the ex-
nitude, position or direction during the time period considered. treme seismic action and all other extreme environmental
These include: loads when relevant.

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page28 - S e c 5
1005 Fires The collision energy can be determined on the basis of relevant
The principal fire and explosion events are associated with hy- masses, velocities and directions of ships or aircraft that may
drocarbon leakage from flanges, valves, equipment seals, noz- collide with installation. When considering the installation, all
zles, ground, etc. traffic in the relevant area should be mapped and possible fu-
ture changes in vessel operational pattern should be accounted
The following types of fire scenarios (relevant for offshore oil/ for. Design values for collisions are determined based on an
gas production structures) should among others be considered: overall evaluation of possible events. The velocity can be de-
termined based on the assumption of a drifting ship, or on the
a) Burning blowouts in wellhead area. assumption of uncontrolled operation of the ship.
b) Fire related to releases from leaks in risers; manifolds, In the early phases of platform design, the mass of supply ships
loading/unloading or process equipment, or storage tanks, should normally not be selected less than 5000 tons and the
including jet fiie and fiie ball scenarios. speed not less than 0.5 m / s and 2 m / s for ULS and ALS design
c) Burning oil/gas on sea. checks, respectively. A hydrodynamic (added) mass of 40%
for sideways and 10% for bow and stern impact can be as-
d) Fire in equipment or electrical installations. sumed.
e) Pool fiies on deck or sea. The most probable impact locations and impact geometry
f) Fire jets. should be established based on the dimensions and geometry
of the structure and vessel and should account for tidal chang-
The fiie load intensity may be described in terms of thermal es, operational sea-state and motions of the vessel and struc-
flux as a function of time and space or, simply, a standardized ture which has free modes of behaviour. Unless more detailed
temperature-time curve for different locations. investigations are done for the relevant vessel and platform,
The fiie thermal flux may be calculated on the basis of the type the impact zone for supply vessel on a fixed Offshore Struc-
of hydrocarbons, release rate, combustion, time and location of tures should be considered to be between 10 m below LAT and
ignition, ventilation and structural geometry, using simplified 13 m above HAT.
conservative semi-empirical formulae or analytical/numerical 1008 Dropped objects
models of the combustion process. Loads due to dropped objects should for instance include the
1006 Explosions following types of incidents:
The following types of explosions should be considered: ~ dropped cargo from lifting gear
ignited gas clouds ~ failing lifting gear
unintentionally swinging objects
~
explosions in enclosed spaces, including machinery spac- ~
loss of valves designed to prevent blow-out or loss of other

~
es and other equipment rooms as well as oil/gas storage

~
tanks. drilling equipment.
The overpressure load due to expanding combustion products The impact energy from the lifting gear can be determined
may be described by the pressure variation in time and space. based on lifting capacity and lifting height, and on the expected
It is important to ensure that the rate of rise, peak overpressure weight distribution in the objects being lifted.
and area under the curve are adequately represented. The spa- Unless more accurate calculations are carried out, the load
tial correlation over the relevant area that affects the load ef- from dropped objects may be based on the safe working load
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
fect, should also be accounted for. Equivalent constant for the lifting equipment. This load should be assumed to be
pressure distributions over panels could be established based failing from lifting gear from highest specified height and at
on more accurate methods. the most unfavourable place. Sideways movements of the
The damage due to explosion should be determined with due dropped object due to possible motion of the structure and the
account of the dynamic character of the load effects. Simple, crane hook should be considered.
conservative single degree of freedom models may be applied. The trajectory and velocity of a falling object will be affected
When necessary non-linear time domain analyses based on nu- by entering into water. The trajectories and velocity of objects
merical methods like the fiiite element method should be ap- dropped in water should be determined on the basis of the ini-
plied. tial velocity, impact angle with water, effect of water impact,
Fire and explosion events that result from the same scenario of possible current velocity and the hydrodynamic resistance. It is
released combustibles and ignition should be assumed to occur considered non-conservative for impacts in shallow water
at the same time, i.e. to be fully dependent. The fire and blast depths to neglect the above effects.
analyses should be performed by taking into account the ef- The impact effect of long objects such as pipes should be sub-
fects of one on the other. ject to special consideration.
The damage done to the fire protection by an explosion preced- 1009 Unintended pressure difference changes
ing the fire should be considered. Changes in intended pressure differences or buoyancy caused
1007 Collisions for instance by defects in or wrong use of separation walls,
valves, pumps or pipes connecting separate compartments as
The impact loads are characterised by kinetic energy, impact well as safety equipment to control or monitor pressure, shall
geometry and the relationship between load and indentation. be considered.
Impact loads may be caused by:
Unintended distribution of ballast due to operational or techni-
~ vessels in service to and from the installation, including cal faults should also be considered.
supply vessels 1010 Floating structure in damaged condition
~ tankers loading at the field
~ ships and fishing vessels passing the installation Floating structures, which experience buoyancy loss, will have
~ floating installations, such as flotels an abnormal floating position. The corresponding abnormal-
~ aircraft on service to and from the field variable and environmental loads should be considered.
~ dropped or sliding objects Adequate global structural strength should be documented for
~ fishinggear abnormal floating conditions considered in the damage stabil-
~ icebergs or ice. ity check, as well as tightness or ability to handle potential

E VERITAS
DETNORSK Not for Resale
Sec.5 - Page29
leakages in the tilted condition. nation a) shall be used where this gives a more unfavourable
1011 Combination of accidental loads load effect. For external hydrostatic pressure, and internal
pressures from a free surface, an load factor of 1.2 may nor-
When accidental loads occur simultaneously, the probability mally be used provided that the load effect can be determined
level applies to the combination of these loads. Unless with normal accuracy. Where second order effects are impor-
the accidental loads are caused by the same phenomenon (like tant, a load factor of 1.3 shall be used.
hydrocarbon gas fires and explosions), the occurrence of dif-
ferent accidental loads can be assumed to be statistical inde- 108 A load factor of 1.O shall be applied to the weight of soil
pendent. However, due attention shall be taken to the result of included in the geotechnical calculations.
any quantitative risk assessment. 109 Prestressing loads may be considered as imposed defor-
Guidance note: mations. Due account shall be taken of the time dependent ef-
fects in calculation of effective characteristic forces. The more
While in principle, the combination of two different accidental conservative value of 0.9 and 1.1 shall be used as a load factor
loads with exceedance probability of or one at and the
other at a 10-1level, correspond to a event, individual acci- in the design.
dental loads at a probability level of commonly will be most 110 The definition of limit state categories is valid for the
critical. foundation design with the exception that failure due to cyclic
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- loading is treated as an ULS, alternatively as an ALS, using
load and material coefficients as defined for these limit state
categories.
111 Where a load is a result of high counteracting and inde-
C. Load Combinations and Partial Safety pendent hydrostatic pressures, the pressure difference shall be
Factors multiplied by the load factor. The pressure difference shall be
taken as no less than the smaller of either one tenth of the high-
C 100 Partial load factors, est pressure or 100 kPa. This does not apply when the pressure
is balanced by direct flow communication. The possibility of
101 The Load Factors are specified in DNV-OS-C101 Sec.2 communication channel being blocked shall then be part of the
D “Design by LRFD Method” and in Table C1. risk assessment.
102 The Load factors shall be calibrated, if an alternative na- 112 For LNG containment tanks (see DNV-OS-C503), the
tional standard is used as a reference standard for the detailed Load factor for LNG loads (pressure from LNG containment
design of the concrete structure, this to provide an equivalent on primary barrier and secondary barrier) shall be taken as 1.6.
level of safety. The equivalent safety shall be documented. Re- 113 In the ALS, the Load factor shall be 1.0 for all loads.
quirements to special evaluations are given in Appendix E.
103 When checking the serviceability limit state, SLS, the C 200 Combinations of loads
partial load factor %shall be 1.0 for all loads. 201 Table B2 of DNV-OS-C101 Sec.3 B gives a more de-
104 When checking the fatigue failure limit state, FLS, the tailed description of how loads shall be combined. When envi-
partial load factor %shall be 1.0 for all loads. ronmental and accidental loads are acting together, the given
probabilities apply to the combination of these loads.
105 The ultimate limit state, ULS, shall be checked for two
load combinations, (a) and (b), with load factors according to 202 For temporary phases, where a progressive collapse in
Table C1 (Table D1 of DNV-OS-C101 Sec.2). the installation does not entail the risk of loss of human life, in-
jury, or damage to people or the environment, or of significant
Table C1 Recommended partial factors for loads for the financial losses, a shorter return period than that given in Table
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ultimate limit state (ULS) Load combinations (from DNV-OS- B2 of DNV-OS-C101 for environmental loads may be consid-
C101) ered.
Combination of I Load categories 203 The return conditions to be considered should be related
to the duration of the operation. As a general guidance, the cri-
a) 1.3 I I 1.3 I 0.7a I 1.o teria given in Table C2 may be applied:
b) 1.0 I I 1.0 I 1.3a I 1.o I Table C2 Environmental criteria
Load categories are: I Duration o f use I Environmental criteria I
G = permanent load Up to 3 days Specific weather window
Q = variable functional load 3 days to 1 week More than 1 year, seasonal
E = environmental load
D = deformation load 1 week to 1 month 1O years return, seasonal
a Factor may have to be amended for areas with other long term dis-
I 1 month to 1 vear I 100 vears return. seasonal I
tribution functions than North Sea conditions. I More than 1 year I 1000 years return, all year
For description of load categories, see DNV-OS-C101 Sec.2 and
C106 through C113 below. C 300 Consequence of failure
301 Structures can be categorised by various levels of expo-
106 The loads shall be combined in the most unfavourable sure to determine criteria that are appropriate for the intended
way, provided that the combination is physically possible and service of the structure. The levels are determined by consid-
permitted according to the load specifications. Loading condi- eration of life safety and consequences of failure.
tions that are physically possible but not intended or permitted
to occur in expected operations shall be included by assessing 302 Life safety considers the manning situation in respect of
probability of occurrence and accounted for as either acciden- personnel on the terminal when the design environmental
tal conditions in the accidental damage limit state (ALS) or as event would occur.
part of the ordinary design conditions included in the ULS. 303 Consequences of failure consider the potential risk to
Such conditions may be omitted in cases where the annual life of personnel brought in to react to any incident, the poten-
probability of occurrence can be assumed to be less than tial risk of environmental damage and the potential risk of eco-
107 For permanent loads, a load factor of 1.O in load combi- nomic losses.

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page30 - S e c 5
D. Structural Analysis boundary condition, load and other data.

111 The structure shall be analysed for significant loads dur-
D 100 General ing each stage of its life. Where simultaneous loading is possi-
101 Structural analysis is the process of determining the load ble, these loads shall be applied in combination in such a way
effects within a structure, or part thereof, in response to each as to maximize load effects at each type of location to be
significant set of loads. This clause specifies requirements for checked. The loads that contribute to these combinations shall
the various forms of structural analysis necessary to define the include appropriate load factors for each limit state being
response of the structure during each stage of its life. Load ef- checked.
fects calculated by structural analysis shall be used as part of 112 Where assumptions are made to simplify the analysis
the design. and enable a particular calculation method, these shall be
102 Complex or unusual structural types can require forms clearly recorded in the documentation or calculations. The ef-
of analysis, which are not described within this Standard. fects of such assumptions on load effects shall be quantified
These shall be performed in accordance with the principle of and incorporated as necessary.
providing sufficient analyses to accurately assess all signifi- 113 Analysis of the global structure or local components is
cant load effects within the structure. normally performed by the fiiite element method. Computer
103 In order to ascertain successful analysis of an offshore software used to perform fiiite element analysis shall comply
concrete structure it is required that: with a recognized international quality standard, such as IS0
9000-3 or shall be verified for its intended use prior to the start
~ all necessary analyses are performed on the basis of an ac- of the analysis. Element types, load applications, meshing lim-
curate and consistent definition of the structure and assess- its and analysis types to be used in the structural analysis shall
ment of loads thereon all be included in the verification.
~ these analyses are performed using appropriate methods, 114 Where finite element analysis is performed, considera-
have accurate boundary conditions and are of suitable type tion shall be given to the inaccuracy inherent in the element
~ suitable verified results are available in due time for use in formulation, particularly where lower order elements or coarse
design or reassessment. element meshes are used. Verification and "benchmark" test-
ing of the software shall be used to identify element limitations
104 Interfaces with structural designers, topsides designers, and the computer modelling shall be arranged to provide relia-
hydrodynamics, geotechnical engineers and other relevant par- ble results.
ties shall be set up. The schedule of supply of data regarding
loads (including reactive actions) shall be determined and 115 Hand calculations are generally limited to simple com-
monitored. Such an interface shall ensure that this data is in the ponents of the structure (beams, regular panels, secondary
correct format, covers all necessary locations and is provided structures, etc.) under simplified loads (i.e. uniform pressure,
for all required limit states and for all significant stages in the point or distributed loads). The methodology used shall reflect
lifetime of the structure. standard engineering practice with due consideration for the
conditions of equilibrium and compatibility. Elastic or plastic
105 The number and extent of analyses to be performed shall design principles may be adopted dependent on the limit state
cover all components of the structure through all stages of its being checked and the requirements for the analysis being per-
life, i.e. construction, installation, in-service conditions and re- formed.
moval/retrieval/relocation. However, if it can be clearly dem-
onstrated and documented that particular stages in the life of a 116 Computer spreadsheets are electronic methods of per-
component will not govern its design, such stages need not be forming hand calculations and shall be subject to the same re-
analysed explicitly for this component. quirements. Where such spreadsheets do not produce output
showing the methodology and equations used, adequate sup-
106 Sufficient structural analyses shall be performed to pro- porting calculations shall be provided to verify the results of
vide load effects suitable for use when checking all compo- comprehensive test problems. Sufficient checks shall be pro-
nents of the primary structure for the required design vided to verify all facilities in the spreadsheet that will be used
conditions and limit states. At least one such analysis should for the component being assessed.
normally represent global behaviour of the structure for each
significant stage of its life. 117 Special forms of analysis for concrete structures, such as
the strut and tie approach, may also be used, but must conform
107 Secondary components of the structure shall be as- to contemporary, accepted theories and shall adhere to the gen-
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
sessed, by analysis if necessary, to determine their integrity eral principles of civillstructural engineering. Unless the meth-
and durability, and to quantify the distribution of load effects od is well known and understood throughout the industry,
on the primary structure. Such analyses may be performed in references to source material for the method being used shall
isolation of the primary structure analysis, but shall include de- be provided in the documentation or calculations.
formations of the supporting primary structure, where signifi-
cant. 118 Non-linear finite element analysis may be used to dem-
onstrate ultimate capacity of the structure or the capacity of
108 When present, the stiffness of the topsides and other pri- complicated 2-D and 3-D (discontinuity) regions. Software
mary structures shall be simulated in global analyses in suffi- used for this purpose shall be subject to the same verification
cient detail to adequately represent the interface with the requirements as above. Verification of non-linear analysis
concrete substructure, such that all loads from the topsides are software used in this way shall include at least one comparison
appropriately distributed to the concrete substructure. The rel- against experimental results or a reliable worked example of a
ative stiffness of topsides and concrete substructure shall be similar detail.
accurately simulated where this has a significant effect on glo-
bal load paths and load effects. Particular attention shall be 119 Structural analyses shall be thoroughly verified to pro-
paid to relative stiffness when assessing dynamic response. vide confidence in the results obtained. Verification is required
to check that input to the calculations is correct and to ensure
109 Where appropriate, the analysis shall include a represen- that sensible results have been obtained
tation of its foundation, simulated by stiffness elements or by
reactive loads. 120 Input data for a particular structural analysis shall be
subject to at least the following checks:
110 All structural analyses required for design of the struc-
ture shall be carried out in accordance with the planned analy- that the model adequately represents the geometry of the
sis schedule using the most recent geometric, material, intended structure or component

S e c 5 - Page31
~ that the specified material properties have been used concrete.

~ that sufficient and correct loads have been applied 203 For concrete Grades C30 to C85 (see Sec.6 Table Ci),
~ that suitable and justifiable boundary conditions have been the factor kE, may be taken as 9 500 (N/mm2) if the factor
simulated is not determined by testing.
~ that an appropriate analysis type and methodology have
been used for the analysis. 204 Calculations in the serviceability limit state shall be per-
formed using the characteristic value E,, computed using the
121 Verification of the results of an analysis will in general actual characteristic cylinder strength (fcck) in the formula. In
vary depending on the nature of that analysis. Typical output order to calculate the most probable displacement the mean
quantities that shall be checked, as appropriate, include the fol- cylinder strength may be used.
lowing: 205 To consider loading of early age concrete the character-
individual and summed reactions, to ensure that these bal- istic cylinder strength at the actual time of loading, fcCkj,may
be used.
~
ance the applied loads

~ deformations of the structure, to ver@ that these are sen- 206 The characteristic modulus of elasticity of concrete Eck
sible and that they demonstrate compatibility between can be used for calculations of forces and moments in the ulti-
components mate limit state, except in cases where structural displacements
~ natural periods and mode shapes, if appropriate cause increased forces and moments, see D1200.
~ load paths, bending moment diagrams, stress levels, etc., 207 If the modulus of elasticity of lightweight aggregate
to check that these satissl equilibrium requirements. concrete is not determined by testing, the modulus of elasticity
shall be reduced by multiplying by a factor @lpi)1.5 where
122 Successful execution of an analysis shall be recorded pi = 2 400 kg/m3.
and pertinent parties informed of results and conclusions so
that implications for the design process are formally recog- 208 For impact type of loading or rapid oscillations the mod-
nized. uli of elasticity calculated according to D201 or D202 can be
increased by up to 15%, dependent on strain rate.
123 Each structural analysis shall be thoroughly documented
to record its extent, applicability, input data, verification and 209 The modulus of elasticity predicted in D201 may be
results obtained. The following information shall be produced used for a temperature range from -50°C to 100°C. For short-
as a minimum to document each analvsis: term temperatures (fire) that range from 100°C to 200"C, the
modulus of elasticity can be taken as 90 per cent of Eck given
the purpose and scope of the analysis and the limits of its in D201. For temperatures above 200°C the concrete strain
applicability properties, including creep and thermal strain, shall be deter-
references to methods used and the justification of any as- mined specially.
sumptions made 210 The characteristic modulus of elasticity of non-pre-
the assumed geometry, showing and justisling any devia- stressed reinforcement may be taken as
tions from the current structural geometry
material properties used in the analysis E,, = 200 000 MPa
boundary conditions applied to the structure or component 211 At high temperatures of short duration (fie) the modu-
the summed magnitude and direction of all loads lus of elasticity of steel may be taken according to D210 for
pertinent results from the analysis and crosschecks to ver- temperatures up to 200°C as long as more precise values are
isl the accuracy of the simulation not known. For temperatures above 200°C the strain properties
a clear presentation of those results of the analysis that are of steel shall be determined separately.
required for further analysis, structural design or reassess- 212 For prestressed reinforcement the force-strain relation-
ment. ship shall be known for the steel type and make in question.
124 Results of the analysis will normally take the form of D 300 Effects of temperature, shrinkage, creep and
load effects, for which the structure shall be designed to with- relaxation
stand. Typical load effects required for the design of fixed off-
shore concrete structures include the following: 301 The linear coefficient of thermal expansion (a)for both
NW concrete and reinforcement shall be taken as per "C
~ displacements and vibrations, which shall be within ac- when calculating the effects of thermal loads, unless there is
ceptable limits for operation of the platform adequate basis for selecting other values.
~ section forces, from which the capacity of concrete sec- The linear coefficient of thermal expansion for LWA concrete
tions and necessary reinforcement requirements can be de- shall be determined for the actual concrete mix design.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
termined
~ section strains, used to determine crack widths and water Where the temperature induced loads are significant testing is
tightness; stress occurrences, used to check the fatigue life normally to be carried out to determine (a).
of the structure. 302 Values of concrete creep and shrinkage shall be chosen
on the basis of the climatic surroundings of the structure, sec-
D 200 Modulus of elasticity to be used in load effect tional dimensions, concrete mixture and age.
analyses
303 The creep strain is assumed to be proportional to the
201 In the calculation of strains and section forces under concrete stress when load effects are calculated. At constant
short-term loading in the serviceability limit state the relation concrete stress, the creep strain is
between modulus of elasticity of concrete E, and compressive
cylinder strength f,, is given by the equation &cc = 9% = 9°c/Eck
E, = kE (f,,)0'3 where
202 The factor kE may be determined by testing E-modulus 9 is the creep coefficient
at unloading in accordance with appropriate International o, is the concrete stress due to long-term loading
standard. The strength f,, is determined with the same cylinder
samples. The factor shall be determined as the mean value of 304 For all loads the creep strain shall be calculated in pro-
the test results from at least 5 concrete test mixes with the same portion to the duration of the load.
aggregates and strength which will be used in the prospective 305 If creep is considered in the calculation of forces due to

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page32 - S e c 5
shrinkage, it can be assumed that both creep and shrinkage A typical example of a ductile mode of failure is a flexural fail-
have the same time dependent development. ure provided sufficient rotational capacity exists. Verification
306 For lightweight aggregate concrete the creep coefficient of sufficient rotational capacity may in most cases be based on
9 can be assumed equal to the value of normal concrete multi- simplified considerations.
plied by a factor for p > 1 800 kg/m3. For lightweight 402 Imposed deformations normally have a significant influ-
concrete, p < 1 500 kg/m3, a factor 1.2 can be used. ence on the shear resistance of a section, and shall be duly con-
For intermediate values of p, linear interpolation may be ap- sidered in the design.
plied.
The characteristic value of deformation imposed loads is nor-
pi= 2 400 kg/m3 mally evaluated on the basis of defined maximum and mini-
307 The effect of relaxation in prestressed reinforcement mum values for the parameters governing its magnitude.
shall be calculated in proportion to the time period over which An accurate calculation of deformation loads caused by tem-
the relaxation occurs. If there are no exhaustive test results perature effects can only be obtained from a non-linear analy-
available for the steel type and make in question, the values sis, reflecting realistic material properties of reinforced
given in Figure 1 can be used. Normally, testing is expected to concrete.
be based on at least 10 O00 hours loading.
In practice, effects due to imposed deformations may be calcu-
308 If the steel experiences a temperature, T, higher than T lated using a linear elastic model, and a constant modulus of
= 20°C for a long period of time, a quantity kl(T-Ti) shall be elasticity throughout the structure. Possible reductions due to
added to the relaxation in percent of relaxation stress found in cracking may be estimated separately by reducing the flexural
the figure, where the factor kl for and axial stifhess to account for cracking of the concrete. Spe-
cial considerations and documentation of the stiffness shall be
~ cold drawn, untempered steel is 0.15% per "C required.
~ cold drawn, tempered steel is O. 10% per "C.
403 Creep effects shall be considered where relevant. An ac-
These values shall not be used, if the steel temperatures exceed curate calculated assessment of creep in shell structures can
8O"C, for long periods of time. only be obtained by computer calculations using non-linear fi-
nite-element programs. However, rough estimates of creep ef-
fects may be obtained by methods originally developed for
Patented, cold d r a w n , tempered steel simple columns. In the following two methods are referred to,
As-rolled steel
the so-called "creep factor method" and the "creep eccentricity
Patented, cold d r a w n , untempered steel
\ method". Reference is made to Sec.6 C705.
\ \
Effect of Water Pressure
1
404 The effect of water pressure in the concrete is to be fully
d
.-
1
considered when relevant.
m
-m 405 The effect of hydrostatic pressure on the concrete
strength is to be evaluated where relevant. (For lightweight ag-
Oi
<
1 gregate concrete, this effect may be significant.)
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
406 The effect of hydrostatic forces acting on the faces of
a cracks is to be taken into account in the analytical models used
.-d
d for prediction of concrete cross-sectional strength. This effect
.-
1
is also to be taken into account when actual load effects are
-x
evaluated.
Loss of Intended Underpressure
407 For structures designed with an intended underpressure,
relative to external pressure, a design condition where the in-
Relaxation stress in p e r cent o f tensile strength
tended underpressure is lost is to be evaluated.
Figure 1
This load effect may be categorized as an accidental load ef-
Long-term relaxation in prestressing steel fect. Load combinations, and load and material factors are then
to be taken according to ALS criteria.
More stringent criteria may be specified by the Client for this
D 400 Special load effects situation (e.g. increased material factor, load factors etc.) due
Deformation Loads to e.g. costly and excessive repair or if the structure is storing
oil (risk of oil spillage).
401 Deformation induced loads created by imposed defor-
mations in the structure, are loads to be treated as either defor- Weight of Concrete
mation loads (D) or as Functional Loads. See B900. 408 The long-term effect of water absorption is to be consid-
Examples of such loads may be: ered in the estimation of concrete weights in particular for
floating structures.
differential settlement
temperature effects D 500 Physical representation
shrinkage 501 Dimensions used in structural analysis calculations shall
loads in flexible members connected to stiff members may represent the structure as accurately as necessary to produce
in some cases be seen as deformation induced loads reliable estimates of load effects. Changes in significant di-
changes in strain due to absorption. mensions as a result of design changes shall be monitored both
during and after the completion of an analysis. Where this im-
In case of a ductile mode of failure, and where second order ef- pacts on the accuracy of the analysis, the changes shall be in-
fects are negligible, the effect of deformation loads may nor- corporated by reanalysis of the structure under investigation.
mally be neglected. For more details see Appendix B.

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.5 - Page33
D600 Loads abilistic methods are shown to be more appropriate for a

601 Loads shall be determined by recognized methods, tak- particular limit state (i.e. fatigue), these shall be substituted as
ing into account the variation of loads in time and space. Such needed. Spectral fatigue analysis is normally required where
loads shall be included in the structural analysis in a realistic structural dynamics are significant.
manner representing the magnitude, direction and time vari- 1302 Such methods typically linearize load effects. This can
ance of such loads. For more details see Appendix B. restrict their use where non-linear response of the structure or
component is significant. If non-deterministic analysis meth-
D 700 Mass simulation ods are still to be used, time domain response to transient load-
701 A suitable representation of the mass of the structure ing might be necessary.
shall be required for the purposes of dynamic analysis, motion 1303 Where spectral analysis methods are used for calculat-
prediction and mass-acceleration loads while floating. For ing response to random wave load, sufficient wave conditions
more details see Appendix B. shall be analysed to ensure that dynamic response close to
structural natural periods and peak wave energy is accurately
D 800 Damping assessed.
801 Damping arises from a number of sources including
structural damping, material damping, radiation damping, hy- D 1400 Reliability analysis
drodynamic damping and frictional damping between moving 1401 Reliability assessment of structures is permitted under
parts. Its magnitude is dependent on the type of analysis being these rules to assess the risk of failure of a structure and ensure
performed. In the absence of substantiating values obtained that this fails below acceptable levels. Such analysis shall be
from existing platform measurements or other reliable sources, performed in accordance with acceptable current practice.
a value not greater than 3% of critical damping may be used.
D 1500 Analyses requirements
D 900 Linear elastic static analysis
1501 All structural analyses performed shall simulate, with
901 It is generally acceptable for the behaviour of a structure sufficient accuracy, the response of the structure or component
or component to be based on linear elastic static analysis unless for the limit state being considered. This may be achieved by
there is a likelihood of significant dynamic or non-linear re- appropriate selection of the analysis type with due regard to the
sponse to a given type of loading. In such cases, dynamic or nature of loads applied and the expected response of the struc-
non-linear analysis approaches shall be required. For further ture.
details with respect to structural analyses, see Appendix C.
1502 The following table gives general guidance as to the
D 1000 Dynamic analysis type of analysis that shall be adopted for each design condition
for the structure. Further details are provided in D1600 to
1001 Fixed structures with natural periods of the global D2300.
structure greater than 2.5s can be susceptible to dynamic re-
sponse due to wave load during in-service conditions, at least Table D2 - Appropriate Types of Analysis
for fatigue assessment. Structures in shallow water or subject
to extreme wave conditions may exhibit significant dynamic Condition I Amromiate niDes of analvsis
response at lower periods due to the higher frequency content Construction I Linear static analvsis is nenerallv auurouriate.
of shallow water or particularly steep waves. For further de- Towing to Linear static analysis is generally appropriate. Dy-
tails with respect to dynamic analyses, see Appendix C. location namic effects may be significant in response to hy-
drodynamic motions. These can normally be
D 1100 Pseudo-static analysis simulated by pseudo-static analysis.
1101 In this context, pseudo-static analysis refers to any Installation Linear static analysis is generally appropriate.
analysis where dynamic loads are represented approximately In-service Linear, static or pseudo-static analysis is generally
by a factor on static loads or by equivalent quasi-static loads. strength and appropriate for global load path analysis.
The former approach is appropriate where static and dynamic Serviceahilitv
load effects give an essentially similar response pattern within Fatigue Linear analysis is generally appropriate,Dynamic
the structure, but differs in magnitude. For further details, see effects may be significant for short period waves. A
Appendix C. pseudo-static deterministic approach is normally
acceptable.
D 1200 Non-linear analysis Seismic Dynamic analysis is normally required, where seis-
1201 Non-linear behaviour shall be considered in structural mic groundmotion is significant.Non-linear effects
might need to be considered for ductility level
analysis when determining load effects in the following cases: earthquakes.
where significant regions of cracking occur in a structure such Accidental Non-linear analysis is normally required for signif-
that global load paths are affected: icant imuacts. Dvnamic resuonse can be simificant.
where such regions of cracking affect the magnitude of Removal/ As per transportation and installation.
reuse
~
loads (temperature loads, uneven seabed effects, dynamic

response, etc.) D 1600 Analysis of construction stages
~ where the component depends upon significant non-linear
material behaviour to resist a given set of loads, such as in 1601 Sufficient analyses shall be performed on components
response to accidents or ductility level seismic events of the structure during construction to ensure their integrity at
all significant stages of the construction and assembly process
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
~ for slender members in compression, where deflection ef-

fects are significant. and to assess built-in stresses from restrained deformations.
Construction stages shall include onshore and inshore opera-
For further details, see Appendix C. tions.
1602 Consideration shall be given to the sequence of con-
D 1300 Probabilistic analysis struction in determining load effects and to the age of the con-
1301 It is generally acceptable to base in-service structural crete in determining resistance. Specific consideration shall be
analysis of an offshore concrete structure subjected to wave given to the stability of components under construction. Ade-
load on the principles of deterministic analysis, predicting re- quate support for temporary loads, such as crane footings, shall
sponse to specific events. However, where stochastic or prob- be provided in the analysis.

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page34 - S e c 5
1603 Assessment of the structure during construction stages analyses may be based on non-linear methods if these are more
may normally be performed using static analysis. However, appropriate to the component behaviour.
dynamic response to wind turbulence might need to be calcu- 1903 It is generally acceptable to base all strength analysis of
lated for tall, slender structures and consideration shall be giv- an in-service concrete platform on deterministic analysis, pre-
en to other possible dynamic load effects, such as earthquakes, dicting response to specific extreme waves. Sufficient wave
occurring during the construction phase. periods, directions and wave phases shall be considered to ob-
Long term stress redistribution shall be considered for the tain maximum response in each type of component checked.
complete structure considering creep effects on the built stress- Consideration shall be given to waves of lower than the maxi-
es accumulated during construction. mum height if greater response can be obtained due to larger
dynamic effects at smaller wave periods.
D 1700 Transportation analysis
D 2000 Fatigue analysis
1701 Analysis of a fixed concrete structure shall include the
assessment of structural integrity during significant stages of 2001 When required, detailed fatigue analysis shall be based
the sea tow of the structure, whether it is self-floating, barge on a cumulative damage assessment performed over the pro-
supported or barge assisted. The representation of the structure posed lifetime of the structure. The analysis shall include
during such operations shall be consistent with the stage being transportation stages, if significant, and should consider the ef-
represented, incorporating the correct amount of ballast and fects of the range of sea states and directions to which the
simulating only those components of the topsides actually in- structure will be subjected.
stalled. 2002 A linear representation of the overall structure is gen-
1702 Analysis during sea tow should normally be based on erally acceptable for the evaluation of global load paths for fa-
linear static analysis, representing the motion of the concrete tigue analysis. The structural analysis shall include the effects
structure by peak heave, sway, surge, pitch and roll accelera- of permanent, live, hydrostatic and deformational loads. It
tions as predicted by hydrodynamic analysis. For such analysis shall be justifiable to use reduced topside and other loads in the
to be valid, it shall be demonstrated that motions in the natural fatigue analysis, on the basis that typical rather than extreme
periods of major components of the structure, such as the loads through its life are required. Significant changes in static
shafts, will not be significantly excitated by this global motion. load through the lifetime of the structure shall be analysed sep-
If dynamic effects are deemed important, they shall be incor- arately and fatigue damage shall be accumulated over each
porated in accordance with D1000. The analysis of the tow phase.
shall be in accordance with the DNV Rules for Planning and 2003 Dynamic amplification is likely to be more significant
Execution of Marine Operations. for the relatively short wave periods causing the majority of fa-
1703 Fatigue damage can result from extreme tow duration tigue damage. Fatigue analysis shall therefore consider the ef-
in heavy seas. If this is significant, fatigue damage accrued fects of dynamic excitation in appropriate detail, either by
shall be accumulated together with that calculated for in-serv- pseudo-static or by dynamic response analysis. Deterministic
ice conditions in accordance with D2000. or stochastic types of analysis are both permissible, subject to
the following provisions.
1704 Consideration shall be given to possible damage sce-
narios during sea tow. Sufficient structural analyses should be 2004 For deterministic analysis, the selected individual
performed to ensure adequate integrity of the structure, pre- waves to which the structure is subjected shall be based on a
venting complete loss in the event of collision with tugs or oth- representative spread of wave heights and periods. For struc-
er vessels present during the transportation stage. In particular, tures that are dynamically sensitive, these shall include several
progressive collapse due to successive flooding of compart- wave periods at or near each natural period of the structure, to
ments shall be prevented. ensure that dynamic effects are accurately assessed. Consider-
ation shall also be given to the higher frequency content in
D 1800 Installation and deck mating analysis larger waves that may cause dynamic excitation.
1801 Structural analysis shall be performed at critical stages 2005 Sufficient wave cases shall be analysed for probabilis-
of the deck mating and installation stages. Such analyses shall, tic analysis to adequately represent the stress transfer functions
as a minimum, cover times of maximum pressure differential of the structure. Non-linear response of the structure shall be
across various components of concrete structure. Once again, incorporated into the analysis using appropriate methods, if
the configuration of the structure at each stage of the setting significant.
down operation should reflect the planned condition and incli- D 2100 Seismic analysis
nation of the structure and the associated distribution of bal-
last. 2101 Two levels of seismic loading on an offshore concrete
structure shall be considered:
1802 Deck mating, ballasting down and planned setting
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
down on the sea floor shall normally be analysed by a linear ~ strength level earthquake (SLE), which shall be assessed
static approach. As these phases normally represent the largest as a ULS condition
external water heads, implosion or buckling should be ana- ~ ductility level earthquake (DLE), for which ductile behav-
lysed. The effect of unevenness in the seabed shall be consid- iour of the structure assuming extensive plasticity is per-
ered in assessing seabed reactions in an ungrouted state. missible provided the structure survive.
D 1900 In-service strength and serviceability analyses For further details, see Appendix D.
1901 At least one global analysis of the structure shall be D 2200 Accidental and overload analyses
performed in its in-service configuration suitable for subse-
quent strength and serviceability assessment. The structure 2201 Analysis of the structure under accidental conditions,
shall also be analysed for extreme wave effects using ALS load such as ship collision, helicopter impact or iceberg collision,
factors, unless it can be conclusively demonstrated that this shall consider the following:
limit state is always less onerous than the corresponding ULS
condition. ~ local behaviour of the impacted area
~ global strength of the structure against overall collapse
1902 Local analysis shall be performed to assess secondary ~ post-damage integrity of the structure.
structure and details that appear from the global analysis to be
heavily loaded or that are complex in form or loading. Such 2202 The resistance of the impact area may be studied using

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.5 - Page35
local models. The contact area and perimeter shall be evaluat- process, all necessary design information must be defined.
ed based on predicted non-linear behaviour of the structure and Plans must be prepared in order to secure timely supply of data.
of the impacting object. Non-linear analyses may be required The interface shall define format of data, ensure consistency
since the structure will generally deform substantially under with respect to locations and elevations, and that data is pro-
the accidental loads. Appropriate boundary conditions shall be vided for all required limit states and significant stages in the
provided far enough away from the damaged region for inac- lifetime of the structure such as:
curacies to be minimized.
installatiodmating of topside
2203 Global analysis of the structure under accidental loads
~
~ the platform transportation and installation

may be required to ensure that a progressive collapse is not in- the platform operating phase
itiated. The analysis should include the weakening effect of ~
damage to the structure in the impacted area. When large de- ~ decommissioning.
formations of the structure is likely for the impact loads, a glo- 202 Important aspects related to these phases are time-de-
bal non-linear analysis may be required to simulate the pendent deformations such as creep, effect of varying water
redistribution of load effects caused by the large deformations. pressure at different drafts, varying ground-pressure distribu-
The global analysis may be based on a simple representation of tion under the base, accelerations and possible inclination dur-
the structure sufficient to simulate progressive collapse. De- ing tow as well as resulting from accidental flooding. Varying
flection effects shall be included, if significant. shaft inclination in temporary phases prior to installatiodmat-
2204 Energy absorption of the structure will arise from the ing of the topside might cause built-in stresses to be dealt with
combined effect of local and global deformation. Sufficient de- in the design of topside, substructure and the deck-shaft con-
formation of the structure to absorb the impact energy from the nection. It is of vital importance that the design assumptions
collision not absorbed by the impacting object shall be docu- are consistent.
mented. 203 The structural analysis of the concrete substructure may
2205 Analysis of the structure in its damaged condition may consider the topside in varying detail and sophistication de-
normally be performed using linear static analysis. Damaged pending on its effect on the design of different structural parts.
components of the structure shall be removed from this analy- Typically the design of upper parts of the substructure (shaft)
sis, or appropriately weakened to simulate their reduced is based on FE-analysis comprising also the topside stiffness
strength and stiffness. matrix. It is required that the stiffness of the topside and the
load effects imposed by the topside is represented in sufficient
D 2300 Platform removal/reuse detail to ensure adequate distribution between topside and sub-
2301 Analysis of the structure for removal shall accurately structure, as well as within the substructure.
represent the structure during this phase. The analysis shall 204 The documentation to be provided as basis for proper in-
have sufficient accuracy to simulate pressure differential ef- terface design must also cover:
fects that are significant during this stage. The analysis shall
include suction forces that shall be overcome prior to separa- shaft configuration
tion from the sea floor, if appropriate. Suitable sensitivity to top of shaft layout
the suction coefficient shall be incorporated. The possibility of deck elevation
uneven separation from the seabed and drop-off of soil or un- loads to be applied on top of concrete structure from top-
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
derbase grout shortly after separation shall be considered and side (i.e. topside weights for design purposes incl. COG,
structural response to subsequent motions shall be evaluated. etc)
2302 Weights of accumulated debris and marine growth tolerances (i.e. for concrete geometry, tie bolts, tendons,
shall also be considered if these are not to be removed. Items bearing tubes, embedment plates, etc.)
to be removed from the structure, such as the topsides, conduc- deck mating tolerances to allow for deformations during
tors, and risers, shall be omitted from the analysis. load transfer.
2303 The condition of the concrete and reinforcement should E 300 Declúshaft structural connection
account for degradation of the materials during the life of the
platform. If the analysis is carried out immediately prior to re- 301 Several alternatives are viable for the structural connec-
moval, then material degradation shall take account of the re- tion between the topside and the substructure. The detailing
sults from recent underwater surveys and inspections. must consider initial contact and ensure load distribution as
presumed in structural analysis and design.
302 The physical interface is very often present between a
steel Module Support Frame (MSF) and the Offshore Concrete
E. Topside Interface Design Structure. Typically temporary tubular bearings (steel pipes)
resting on embedded steel plates are used for transferring the
E 100 Introduction deck weight on top of OCS shafts. The area between the tubu-
101 The design of the interface between a steel topsides lar bearings is typically grouted before activation of pre-
structure and a concrete substructure requires careful consider- stressed anchor bolts.
ation by both the topsides and substructure designers. 303 The design of intersection between MSF, grout and top
102 Particular attention shall be paid to ensure that all rele- of shaft(s) must take due account of shear forces (friction
vant information is exchanged between the topsides and sub- check) arising from tilt in temporary phases or platform accel-
structure design teams. erations in the operational phase. Compression check is re-
quired for the grout. Eventual uplift must also be accounted
103 If topside and substructure construction are separate for.
contracts, special care shall be taken to handle the interface re-
sponsibility. It shall be clear who is responsible for input to and 304 If a non-rigid topside to substructure connection is se-
from the topside engineering contractor as part of a technical lected, such as an array of elastomeric bearings, consideration
coordination procedure. should be given to the expansion and contraction of oil risers
heated by hot products and the interaction between rigid pipes
E 200 Basis for design and a flexible structural connection.
201 As part of establishing and maintaining adequate han- 305 Depending on the connection selected, the detailing and
dling of topsidelsubstructure interface throughout the design layout must allow for necessary inspection and maintenance.

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page36 - S e c 5
Special consideration should be given to gaining access to fa- F. Barge Type Structures
tigue prone details and, if access is not possible, a suitably
large design fatigue life should be selected. Any materials used F 100 General
should be assessed for chemical stability under the effects of 101 Response values for barge type structures are given in
high heat, moisture and hydrocarbon contamination. The ?DNV Rules for Ships? January 2001 Pt.3 Ch. 1 Sec.4 (Design
means of corrosion control selected for the concrete substruc- Loads), Sec.5 (Longitudinal Strength) and Sec.6 (Bottom
ture (such as cathodic protection) should be clearly communi- Structures). The design values for motions and accelerations
cated. are extreme values (Probability level =
E 400 Topsides - substructures mating 102 The Design pressures caused by sea, liquid cargos, dry
401 While the selection of an installation method affects cargoes, ballast and bunkers are based on extreme conditions,
both substructure and topside design, one must ensure that but are modified to equivalent values corresponding to the
such consequences are addressed at an early stage. stress levels stipulated in the Ship Rules. Normally, this in-
volves a reduction of the extreme values given for motions and
402 Typical items and effects to be considered are: accelerations to a probability level.
~ dynamic response to waves and currents of the submerged 103 The Offshore Concrete Structure will normally be ex-
structure if a float-in installation is required posed to environmental loads different from the basis for the
~ dynamic response to wave, winds and currents of a partial- ship rules which covers general environmental loads in open
ly submerged substructure for a lift installation of topsides sea. The design response given in ?DNV Rules for Ships?
~ design of installation aids for both lift and float-in installa- should be used for guidance only. The design load response us-
tions. ing ?DNV Rules for Ships? are generally considered to be con-
servative compared with a direct calculation of load response
Sufficient tolerances shall be incorporated in the design for the in accordance with the principle outlined in this Section.
mating operation. 104 For final documentation of the barge type structure, it is
E 500 Transportation recommended to use the analyses approaches outlined in Sec.5
and Detailed Design in accordance with Sec.6.
501 The dynamic motions during the towage of fixed con-
crete installations are usually small. Accelerations, tilting an-
gles in intact and damaged conditions, must be accurately
defined and the consequences for design of topside, substruc-
ture and their connections, must be dealt with.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.6 - Page37
SECTION 6
DETAILED DESIGN OF OFFSHORE CONCRETE STRUCTURES
A. General slabs can be calculated assuming a load spread of 45” from the
loaded surface to the reinforcement on the opposite side of the
A 100 Introduction slab.
101 This detailed Standard for design of Offshore Concrete 306 Calculation of load effects in shear walls and shells may
Structures is prepared based on more than 30 years experience be based on assumptions other than the theory of elasticity if
with design of Offshore Concrete Structures. These structures sufficient knowledge is available, on the stress conditions of
can be any type of structure (gravity based and floating) in- the actual structure, based on tests or nonlinear calculations.
cluding shell type structures exposed to extreme environmen- Force models as indicated in Sec.6, I “Regions with Disconti-
tal wave loading. nuity in Geometry and Loads” may be used if relevant models
102 The first DNV Standard for Design of Concrete Off- can be established for the structure in question.
shore Structures for Oil Production Platforms was issued in 307 Unless otherwise documented, pressure from liquids and
1974. This Standard was later updated in 1977 and 1992. The gases is, in addition to acting on the surface, also be assumed
latest issue of Norwegian Standard NS3473 rev. 5 “Concrete to act internally on the entire cross section or in the cracks,
Structures Design Rules” was issued in November 1998.
~ whatever is the most unfavourable
The DNV Fixed Offshore Rule and NS3473 have with time de- A 400 Effective flange width
veloped in similar trends. This revision of the DNV Standard
is based on both these standards. 401 A cross section subjected to bending with a flange in the
compression zone may be assumed to have an effective flange
103 The experience using the above set of Standards for de- width on each side outside the web equal to the smallest of the
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
tailed design of Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete in North following values:
Sea Structures has been very good related to strength and du-
rability. ~ actual width of flange
104 Other design standards may as an alternative be used for ~ 10% of the distance between the beam’s points of zero mo-
detailed design of Offshore Concrete Structures due to local ment
preferences. An opening is made for this within this standard ~ 8 times the flange thickness.
provided the requirements to the detailed standard given in Ap-
pendix E “Use of Alternative Detailed Design Standard” are 402 If the flange has a haunch of width exceeding the height
sufficiently covered. The level of safety shall be as required by of the flange, the effective flange width may be increased by
this standard. The compliance with this requirement shall be the height of the haunch, but shall not exceed the actual width
documented. of the flange.
403 In a cross section with flange on only one side of the web
A 200 Material and not braced laterally, skew bending and torsion shall be
201 The requirements to materials given in Sec.4 shall apply considered. Furthermore, effective flange width shall not ex-
for structures designed in accordance with this Section. ceed 7.5% of the distance between the beam points of zero mo-
ment.
202 For definition of Normal Strength Concrete, High
Strength Concrete and Lightweight concrete see Sec.4 D200. 404 If the flange is located in the tension zone the reinforce-
ment located inside a width as given for a compression zone
203 Prestressed reinforced concrete structures shall not be may be considered fully effective.
designed with concrete of Grade less than C35 (see Table Ci).
405 Values documented by more accurate calculations may
204 For concrete exposed to sea water, the minimum con- be used instead of those given above.
crete Grade is C45 (see Table Ci).
A 500 Composite structures
A 300 Load effects
501 Structures where members of concrete act together with
301 Load effects shall be calculated in accordance with the members of structural steel shall be designed in accordance
methods outlined in Sec.5. Cracking of the concrete, where with DNV-OS-C101 or an International standard. The same
that has a significant influence on the load effects, shall be tak- safety level shall be achieved as in this standard. Concrete
en into account. members shall be designed in accordance with the regulations
302 In slender structures the effect of the structural displace- of this standard. The general requirements of this standard still
ments shall be accounted for in the calculation of forces and apply.
moments. 502 In the ultimate limit state, a composite structure of con-
303 Load effects from imposed deformations shall be concrete members can be assumed to perform as a monolithic unit
sidered when relevant. Restraint forces caused by imposed defor the entire load if the forces can be transferred between the
formations such as support settlements, imposed or restrained members by reinforcement, shear keys, or by other devices.
axial deformations, rotation etc. shall be considered. When cal- These forces shall be calculated assuming the structure to be-
culating the action effects due to restraint forces, potential have as a monolithic unit for the entire load, unless more pre-
cracking may be considered in accordance with 0700. In the cise calculations are performed. The force in the shear
ultimate limit state the non-linear behaviour of the structure connectors shall be calculated in accordance with an Interna-
may be considered in the calculation of the effects of imposed tional recognized standard for composite structures.
strains and deformations. 503 The capacity of the individual structural members shall
304 The capacity of a structure may be checked by assuming be checked also for the loads applied on the members before
plastic regions in the calculation of forces and moments. It they are acting as a unit.
shall be demonstrated that the necessary displacements are 504 In the serviceability limit state, it shall be considered
possible in these regions. whether the respective loads are applied before or after the
305 Moments and shear forces from concentrated loads on members are acting together.

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page38 - S e c 6
505 The design of the composite strength may be designed in B 300 Characteristic values for material strength
accordance with an International standard, i.e. EN standard. 301 The characteristic strength of materials shall be deter-
A 600 Prestressed structures with unbonded tendons mined according to design standards and recognized standards
for material testing (ASTM, ACI, EN, ISO).
601 Structural members exposed to environment class (see
Clause 0200) SA, MA and NA shall not be prestressed using 302 For concrete, the 28 days characteristic compressive
unbonded tendons. strength fcck is defiied as a 5 % fractile value (Sthpercentile)
found from statistical analysis of tests on cylindrical speci-
A 700 Yield line theory mens with diameter 150 mm and Height 300 mm.
701 Yield line theory may be used as the basis for design in 303 In Table C1, a normalized compressive strength, fcn, is
the ULS and ALS conditions provided the following condi- tabulated based on this characteristic concrete cylinder
tions are satisfied: strength. The normalized compressive strength of concrete, f,,
, is less than the characteristic cylinder strength, fc&, and con-
~ The load carrying capacity will be governed by a ductile siders transition of test strength into in situ strength, ageing ef-
mode of failure (structural detail has sufficient capacity in fects due to high-sustained stresses etc.
shear and moment to accommodate the required rotation). 304 For reinforcement steel, the minimum yield stress shall
~ Second order effects will be negligible (No buckling mode be taken as characteristic strength fck, determined as the 5%
of failure). defective fractile. The reinforcement shall be of quality in ac-
~ The plastic hinges along the yield lines will allow suffi- cordance with Sec.4 F Reinforcement.
cient rotation prior to structural failure of the hinge. 305 For prestressed reinforcement the in situ strength is tak-
Compliance with the above requirements is to be documented. en equal to the yield strength fsy or the 0.2-proof stress. The
quality of prestressing steel and anchorage shall be in accord-
ance with Sec.4 G Prestressing Steel and Anchorage.
306 For geotechnical analyses, the characteristic material re-
B. Design Principles sistance shall be determined so that the probability of more un-
favourable materials occurring in any significant extent is low.
B 100 General Any deteriorating effects during the operation phase shall be
101 Design in compliance with this standard can be based ei- taken into consideration. See DNV-OS-C101.
ther on calculations or on testing, or a combination of these. 307 For the fatigue limit state FLS, the characteristic materi-
al strength shall be determined statistically as a 2.5% fractile
B 200 Limit states for reinforcement, prestressing assemblies, couplers, welded
201 Structures shall satisSl the requirements in the following connections, etc. unless other values are specified in the refer-
limit states: ence standard for that design. For concrete, design material
strength shall be used. For soil, the characteristic strength shall
~ ultimate limit state (ULS) be used. For other materials, acceptance criteria shall be spec-
~ accidental limit state (ALS) ified which offer a safety level equivalent to that of the present
~ fatigue limit state (FLS) provision.
~ serviceability limit state (SLS). 308 Where high resistance of a member is unfavourable (e.g.
in weak link considerations), an upper value of the character-
202 In ULS and ALS, the capacity is demonstrated by testing istic resistance shall be used in order to give a low probability
or by calculation based on the strain properties and design ma- of failure of the adjoining structure. The upper value shall be
terial strengths. chosen with the same level of probability of exceedance as the
203 In FLS, it shall be demonstrated that the structure can probability of lower values being underscored. In such cases,
sustain the expected load cycles at the applied load levels for the material factor shall be 1.0 in calculating the resistance that
the intended service life. is applied as a load on adjoining members.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
The documentation shall include: B 400 Partial safety factors for materials
bending moment 401 The partial factors for the materials, yw, in reinforced
concrete shall be chosen in accordance with this standard and
~
~ axial force for the limit state considered.

~ shearforce
~ torsional moment 402 For structural steel members, the material factor shall be
~ anchorage of reinforcement in accordance with DNV-OS-C101.
~ partial loading. 403 Foundation design shall be performed in accordance
with DNV-OS-C101 Sec.11. The soil material factors shall
and combinations of these. also be in accordance with Sec. 11.
204 The design in SLS shall demonstrate that the structure, B 500 Design by testing
during its service life, will satisSl the functional requirements
related to its use and purpose. Serviceability limit state require- 501 If the loads acting on a structure, or the resistance of ma-
ments shall also ensure the durability and strength of the struc- terials or structural members cannot be determined with rea-
ture. sonable accuracy, model tests can be carried out. Reference is
made to Sec.5 P.
The documentation shall include:
502 Characteristic resistance of structural details or structur-
~ cracks al members or parts may be verified by a combination of tests
~ tightnesdleakage and calculations.
~ strains 503 A test structure, a test structural detail or a test model
~ displacements shall be sufficiently similar to the installation to be considered.
~ dynamic effects The results of the test shall provide a basis for a reliable inter-
~ compression zone. pretation, in accordance with a recognized standard.

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.6 - Page39
B 600 Design material strength where

601 The design material strength shall be taken as a normal- E,, = Design value of Young’s Modulus of concrete used in
ized in-situ strength in accordance with Table C1 divided by a the stress-strain curve
material coefficient ym. E,, = Normalized value of Young’s Modulus used in the
The design strength in compression, fed, is found by dividing stress-strain curve
the normalized compressive strength fcn by the material coef- fCd = Design compressive strength of concrete
ficient, in Table B 1. x, fcn = Normalized compressive strength of concrete
ftd = Design strength of concrete in uni-axial tension
The characteristic tensile strength, ftk, and the normalized ten- fm = Normalized tensile strength of concrete
sile strength, fm, in the structure are defiied in Table C1 and = Material strength factor concrete
are both derived from the characteristic strength of concrete in
compression. In the ultimate limit state and the accidental limit state, the
602 In design by testing the requirements given in P500 shall Young’s Modulus for Concrete, E,,, is taken equal to the nor-
be applied. malized value, E,, in the serviceability limit state.
In the fatigue limit state, the Young’s Modulus for Concrete,
603 If a high design strength is unfavourable, a special ap-
praisal of the material coefficients and the nominal value of the E,, is taken equal to the characteristic value, Eck.
in-situ strength, shall be performed. An example is the design 606 Design values for the reinforcement are:
of a potential plastic hinge as part of the ductility design of a
structure in a seismic active area. = Esk/%
fsd = fsk/ %
604 The material coefficients,ym,take into account the un-
certainties in material strength, execution, cross-sectional di- where
mensions and the theory used for calculation of the capacity.
The material coefficients are determined without accounting E,, = Design value of Young’s Modulus of reinforcement
for reduction of capacity caused by corrosion or mechanical Esk = Characteristic value of Young’s Modulus of reinforce-
detoriation. ment
fsd = Design strength of reinforcement
605 Design values for the concrete are: fsk = Characteristic strength of reinforcement
% = Material coefficient Reinforcement
= Ecn/x
= fcn/x 607 The material coefficients, ym, for concrete and reinforce-
ftd = finlx ment are given in Table B 1.
Table B1 Material coefficients for concrete and reinforcement
Limit State I Ultimate limit state I Accidental and I Sewiceabilitv limit state
Fatigue limit state
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Concrete, 1.25l (1.40)2 1.101 (1.20)2 1.o

Reinforced concrete
Reinforcement. K 1.15l í1.25)2 1.001 (1.10P 1.o
Plain Concrete IX 1 501 (1 75)2 1 25l (1 50)2 10
C. Basis for Design by Calculation are given. The given tensile strength is valid for concrete in
uni-axial tension.
C 100 Concrete grades and in situ strength of concrete
Normal weight concrete has grades identified by C and light-
101 The characteristic strength of concrete cylinders is de- weight aggregate concrete Grades are identified by the symbol
fined in B300. LC. The grades are defiied in Table C1 as a function of the
In Table C1, normalized values for in situ strength of concrete Characteristic Compression cylinder strength of concrete, fcck.
Concrete grade (MPa) I )

Strength C25 c35 c45 c55 C65 c75 C85 C95 C105
LC15 LC25 LC35 LC45 LC55 LC65 LC75 LC85
Characteristic Comp, cube 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85
strength, fck
Characteristic Comp. cylinder 12 20 28 36 44 54 64 74 84 94
strength, fcck

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page40 - Sec.6
Norm. structural 11.2 16.8 22.4 28 33.6 39.2 44.8 50.4 56 61.6
comp. strength, f,,
Characteristic Tensile 1.55 2.10 2.55 2.95 3.30 3.65 4.00 4.30 4.60 4.90
strength, ftk2,
Norm. structural 1.o0 1.40 1.70 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.60 2.70 2.70 2.70
tensile strength, ft,
102 The strength values given in Table C1 apply to light- Provided the smallest dimension is not less than 40 mm the fol-
weight aggregate concrete with the following limitations and lowing specimen size factor can be used in predicting the cyl-
modifications: inder strength.
fcck fcck2
where fcck2= 94 MPa and p l = 2200 kg/m3 Heightídiameter 2.00 1.75 1.50 1.25 1.10 1.00 0.75
ratio
Tensile strength, ftk, and in situ strength, ftn, shall be multiplied
by the factor (0.15 + 0.85 p/pl) Scaling factor on 1.00 0.97 0.95 0.93 0.89 0.87 0.75
strength values
Where:
pl = 2200 kg/m3 if the tensile strength is not determined by

testing
p = Density of the lightweight concrete.
For lightweight aggregate concrete with intended concrete
strength fc5k ,> fccH where fccH = 64 MPa and p l =
2200 kg/m , it shall be shown by test samples that a character-
istic strength, 15% higher than the intended, can be achieved.
The test shall be carried out on concrete samples with the same
material composition as intended used.
103 For normal density concrete of grade higher than C85
and lightweight aggregate concrete of all grades, it shall be
documented by testing that the concrete satisfies the require-
ments on the characteristic compressive cylinder strength. This
also applies if the regular compliance control of the concrete
production is performed by testing the compressive cube
strength.
104 For concrete at high temperatures for a short period
(fire), it may be assumed, provided more accurate values are
not known, that the compressive strength reduces linearly from is the characteristic strength of the taken specimens
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
full value at 350°C to zero at 800°C. The tensile strength may fC&j
converted into cylinder strength for cylinders with
be assumed to decrease from full value at 100°C to zero at
height/diameter ratio 2: 1.
800°C. If the concrete is exposed to temperatures above 200°C
for a longer period of time, the strength properties of the con- fcckt is the characteristic compressive cylinder strength at
crete shall be based on test results. 28 days based on in-situ tests.
105 For concrete exposed to temperatures below -6O"C, the For design, fcckt, replaces, fcck, the characteristic concrete
possible strength increase in compressive and tensile strength compressive strength in Table C1
may be utilized in design for this conditions provided the
strength are determined from relevant tests under same condi- C 200 Reinforcement steel
tions (temperature, humidity) as the concrete in the structure.
201 The reinforcement shall be in accordance with Sec.4 F
An increase in tensile strength of concrete caused by low tem- Reinforcement.
peratures will generally tend to increase the distance between
the cracks, hence increase the crackswidth. 202 The in situ structural strength of non-prestressed rein-
forcement is taken equal to the characteristic yield strength,
106 The characteristic tensile strength of the concrete, ftk, fsk, determined as the 5% defective fractile.
may be determined by testing of the splitting tensile strength
for cylindrical specimens at 28 days in accordance with IS0 203 For prestressed reinforcement the in situ strength is tak-
4108. The characteristic tensile strength, ftk, shall be taken as en equal to the yield strength fsy or the 0.2% proof stress.
2/3 of the splitting strength determined by testing.
C 300 Concrete stress - strain curves for strength design
107 By rehabilitation or by veri@ing the capacity in struc-
tures where the concrete strength is unknown, the strength 301 The shape of the stress/strain relationship for concrete in
shall be determined on the basis of drilled core specimens tak- compression of a specified grade is to be chosen such that it re-
en from the structure. sults in prediction of behavioural characteristics in the relevant
The extent of testing shall be chosen so that it gives a satisfac- limit states that are in agreement with results of comprehensive
tory knowledge of the strengths in the structural members to be tests. In lieu of such data, the general relationship given in Fig-
examined. ure 1 may be used.

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.6 - Page41
- f,
t
- f,,
-0.6f,
Figure 2
Simplified stress-strain diagram for normal density concrete of
Figure 1 grades between C25 and C55 subject to compression.
General stress-strain diagram for calculation of resistance of nor-
mal dense aggregate concrete in compression.
Note: Compression is defined as negative and hence the values

of E and oare negative for concrete subject to compression
oc = -
E,
f,, - (2
Eco
- 5)
For 2 %O is strain at the point of maximum stress.
E,, = -
ECU < E, Eco

303 For lightweight aggregate concrete of grades between
LC15 and LC45, a simplified bilinear stress strain diagram
-
then may be applied for calculation of capacities.

o,= - f,, The maximum strain limit for LWA concrete in compression is
For
fc n
= q(0.3 + '2)
E,, < E, < - 0.6 -
Ecn where E, =- 3.5 %O. pi = 2400 kglm3 a n d p = density of LWA.
then
m-0.6
~~~ ~
oc = E,, E, + ( m - 1) f,,
(0.6 - m ) f,,
For
-0.6 f,,
<€,<O
Ecn
then
E,, = (2.5 m - 1.5) E,,
Ecn = - fcn 1 Ecn E, (%o)
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
where
O -2,o
m = E,, I E,,
Figure 3
For normal dense aggregate concrete where fck < 85 MPa, it Simplified stress-strain diagram for lightweight aggregate con-
may be assumed that crete of grades LC15 to LC45
E,, = k~.(f,J'.~
where kE is assumed to be equal to 10 O00 (MPa)o,7. 304 For calculation of capacities for axial forces and bending
o €1
~ c= - k'fcn
moments, different stress distributions from those given herein
(C301, C302, C303) may be applied as long as they do not re-
where = - 1.9 %O and k, = 0.004 %o/MPa. sult in a higher sectional capacity.
For concrete grades larger than C65 and for all lightweight ag- 305 For reinforcement, a relationship between force and
gregate concretes, the values of E,, and E,, shall be determined strain which is representative for the type and make in question
by testing of the type of concrete in question. Concrete subject shall be used.
to tensile strains is to be assumed stressless if not otherwise
stated. The stress-strain diagram for design is found by dividing the
steel stress o,by the material coefficient z.
302 For normal dense concrete of grades between C25 and
C55, the following simplified stresslstrain diagram may be Any deviating properties in compression shall be considered.
used. 306 Where the assumed composite action with the concrete

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page42 - S e c 6
the prestressing strain is added to this limit.

307 For reinforcement in accordance with Sec.4, the steel -- _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
stress may be assumed to increase linearly from O to fsd when fsk
20°C
,300
i
~
-150
-200
-400
500
fsyand de de notes
characteristic yield
stress and yield 600
strain at 20°C
700
Figure 5
The relation between stress and short-term strain for ribbed bars at temperatures above 15OOC
The diagram in Figure 5 does not include thermal strain or Table C3 Acceptable Deviations --`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
creep strain caused by high temperature. Type of Dimensional Deviation I Maximum Tolerance
309 For reinforcement exposed to low temperature shall re- Overall dimension If25mm
main ductile under the applicable temperature range. I Cross-sectional Ifs% I
310 For spiral reinforcement in columns, shear reinforce- perpendicularity 8 %o
ment, torsional reinforcement, and reinforcement in construc- Inclination 3 %o
tion joints, calculated in accordance with the methods in
Local variations
Subsections D, F, G and J. The utilized stress shall not exceed (1 m measuring length)
the stress corresponding to 2.5 %O strain. For prestressed rein-
forcement, the prestressed strain is added. Local variations
(2 m measuring length)
C 400 Geometrical dimensions in the calculation of sec-
tional capacities For structures of special shapes and geometry alternative toler-
ances may be specified from a strength point of view provided
401 When allowing larger deviations in dimensions than the capacity calculated based on the specified tolerances does
those specified in Table C3, the deviations in sectional dimen- not reduce the capacity with more than 10%.
sions and reinforcement position shall be considered in the de-
sign. Smaller deviations than the specified tolerances may be 402 If the most unfavourable combinations of specified tol-
considered. erances for sectional dimensions and reinforcement positions
are considered and conformity control verifies that the actual
deviations do exceed those specified, then the increased mate-
rial coefficients in accordance with Table C1 shall be used.
Should the As-Built documentation show that the intended de-

Sec.6 - Page43
viation in tolerances are not met, then the section shall be re- simple columns. In the following two methods are referred to,
evaluated in all relevant limit states. the so-called “creep factor method” and the “creep eccentricity
403 For structures cast under water, the outer 100 mm of method”.
concrete at horizontal construction joints and in the contact
area between the ground and the concrete shall not be taken
into account as effective cross section for transfer of forces. If
the structure is set at least 100 mm into rock, the entire con-
crete section can be calculated as effective for transfer of forc- -f,
es to the ground.
C 500 Tension in structural members
501 Tensile forces shall be provided for by reinforcement
with the following exceptions:
tension caused by shear force, anchorage or splicing of re-
inforcement, and by partially loaded areas, which may be
assumed transferred by the concrete by design in accord-
ance with this standard. (See fïg.1 EC“ (l+<p)
for symbols)
C 600 Fatigue strength relationships
601 Fatigue strength relationships (S-N curves) for concrete Figure 6
are to take into account all relevant parameters, such as: Modified StresdStrain Relationship for Concrete
~ concrete quality
~ predominant load effect (axial, flexural, shear, bond or ap- Guidance note:
propriate combinations of these) “Creep factor method” The method utilizes a modified stress/
~ state of stress (cycling in pure compression or compres- strain diagram for concrete. In this diagram, the short term strains
siodtension) are multiplied by (1 + p), p being the creep factor, see Figure 6
~ surrounding environment (air, submerged). and Figure 1.
The values of p shall be carefully determined in accordancewith
C 700 Deformation induced loads, prestressing and recognizedprinciples. The creep factor, p, is to be determined for
creep relevant temperature range, concrete grade and humidity.
701 Deformation induced loads created by imposed defor- “Creep eccentricity method”. In this method, the effect of creep
mations in the structure, are loads to be treated as deformation is accounted for by introducing an additional eccentricity caused
loads (D), and not as a force which requires equilibrium. by creep. The method is convenient to use. Two important con-
ditions with respect to application of the method, shall be noted:
702 In case of a ductile mode of failure, and where second
order effects are negligible, the effect of deformation loads ~ The total eccentricity is to be small enough so that cracking
may normally be neglected. is avoided.
~ The value of the load causing creep is to be small enough so
A typical example of a ductile mode of failure is a flexural fail- as to avoid non-linear material behaviour under short term
ure provided sufficient rotational capacity exists. Verification loading.
of sufficient rotational capacity may in most cases be based on
simplified considerations.
703 Imposed deformations normally have a significant influ-
ence on the shear resistance of a section, and shall be duly con- C 800 Effect of water pressure
sidered in the design.
801 The effect of water pressure in the concrete is to be fully
704 Calculation of deformation loads. considered when relevant.
The characteristic value of deformation imposed loads is nor- 802 The effect of hydrostatic pressure on the concrete
mally evaluated on the basis of defined maximum and mini- strength is to be evaluated where relevant. (For lightweight ag-
mum values for the parameters governing its magnitude. gregate concrete, this effect may be significant.)
An accurate calculation of deformation loads caused by tem- 803 The effect of hydrostatic forces acting on the faces of
perature effects can only be obtained from a non-linear analy- cracks is to be taken into account in the designs for ULS, SLS,
sis, reflecting realistic material properties of reinforced
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ALS and FLS.

concrete. In practice, effects due to imposed deformations may
be calculated using a linear elastic model, and a constant mod-
ulus of elasticity throughout the structure. Possible reductions
due to cracking may be estimated separately. D. Bending Moment and Axial Force (ULS)
The temperature expansion coefficient (a)may be taken as
given in Sec.4 D300. D 100 General
For concrete exposed to low temperatures the temperature ex- 101 The capacity for bending moment and axial force can be
pansion coefficient coefficient (a),shall be determined by rel- determined by assuming that plane cross sections remain plane
evant tests of the material. after straining, and that the stress and strain properties of the
concrete and the reinforcement are as given in C.
705 Creep effects shall be considered where relevant.
When load effects are determined by applying plastic design
Eflect of creep analysis techniques. Such structures shall be composed of
An accurate calculated assessment of creep in shell structures members which are able to develop well-defined plastic resist-
can only be obtained by computer calculations using non-line- ances and maintain these resistances during the deformation
ar finite-element programs. However, rough estimates of creep necessary to form a mechanism. The plastic resistances shall
effects may be obtained by methods originally developed for be adequately documented. See A700.

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page44 - S e c 6
102 The average calculated compressive strain over the cross pression the factor, k,, shall be set at 1.5 h/h,, but no less than
~
section shall not exceed (E,, + ~,,)/2. Strain caused by shrink- 1.o.
age and linear creep shall be added and the total strain shall be h = the cross-sectional height, and h, = 1.0 m.
within the above limit.
103 When calculating the capacity of a cross section, result- D 200 Ductility
ing from an external axial load, the axial load shall be assumed 201 Concrete structures shall be designed to have a ductile
to have a minimum eccentricity about the most unfavourable behaviour.
principle axis. The eccentricity shall not be taken less than the
largest of 20 mm or 1/30 of the cross-sectional dimension in Ductile behaviour of concrete structures is required in order to
the direction of the eccentricity. ensure that the structure, to some extent, can withstand abnor-
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
mal or accidental loads and that a redistribution of the loads

The requirements given in this subsection are in general appli- can take place.
cable to structural members where the ratio between the depth,
h, of the member and the distance between the points of zero 202 For members subjected to moment loading, it is to be en-
bending moment is less than 0.5. If this ratio is greater than 0.5, sured that the steel on the tension side of the member will
assumptions relevant to other types of structural members such achieve twice the yield strain before the concrete on the com-
as deep beams, corbels etc. shall be applied. pressive side reaches its ultimate compressive strain.
104 If the area of compressive reinforcement exceeds 4% of Where this requirement cannot be fulfilled due to high axial
the concrete area, the capacity calculation shall be based on the loads, ductility is to be ensured by use of stirrups.
net area of concrete.
The net area of concrete is defiied as the concrete area be-
tween the centroid of the reinforcement on “tensile” and “com- E. Slender Structural Members
pression” side of the member. For members reinforced using
bundled bars the centroid refers to the centroid of the bundle. E 100 General
For members with several layers of reinforcement, the centroid
refers to the outer bar on the “tensile” and “compression” side. 101 For structural instability a simplified method of analysis
will, in general, be considered acceptable if it can be adequate-
105 In axially loaded structures such as columns and walls, ly documented that, for the relevant deformation, the design
the reinforcement shall only be considered effective in com- loading effects will not exceed the corresponding design resist-
pression if sufficiently secured against buckling. The compres- ances for structural instability. General non-linear analyses are
sive reinforcement shall be braced, by crossing bars placed on described in Sec.4 D1200.
the exterior side, unless otherwise is shown to be sufficient.
Slender structural members subjected to axial compression or
106 For columns with spiral reinforcement as described in bending moment in combination with axial compression shall
R409 and with normal weight concrete of grades no higher be dimensioned for these action effects and the effect of dis-
than C55, the sectional resistance capacity can be calculated in placements of the structure (second order theory). The effect of
accordance with this clause. concrete creep shall be accounted for if it has an unfavourable
The axial capacity shall be calculated using an effective cross influence on the capacity.
section, defiied as the concrete core inside the centroid of the 102 Displacements caused by short-term actions shall be cal-
spiral reinforcement plus the equivalent concrete cross section culated in accordance with the stress-strain curve given in C.
of the longitudinal reinforcement based on modular ratios of
concrete and reinforcement. For eccentricities less than 103 The effect of creep shall be calculated in accordance
0.25Dk, an increased compressive design strength of the con- with the history of actions on the structure and characteristic
crete can be assumed equal to actions. See also Sec.4 D300.
fcd + 6 (fssd A,,) (1- 4 e/Dk) / Dk ‘S
’ ’ ’ 104 A structural member shall be assumed as slender if, in
where accordance with E109-Ell2, the effect of displacements can-
not be ignored.
~ s is the centre to centre distance between the spiral rein- Where second order effects may be significant such effects
forcement, measured in the longitudinal direction of the shall be fully considered. The design of neighbouring elements
column is to take into account possible second order effects transmitted
~ Dk is the diameter of the concrete core inside the centroid at the connections.
of the spiral reinforcement, A,,
~ fssd is the design strength of the spiral reinforcement, A,, 105 Structures structurally connected with slender compres-
~ e is the eccentricity of loading. sive members shall be designed for forces and bending mo-
ments in accordance with the assumed degree of restraint and
The strains E,, and E,, shall be assumed to increase at the same the additional moments caused by the displacements in the
ratio as the design strength. connecting members.
The capacity shall neither be taken as less than the capacity of The stiffness assumptions for the individual structural mem-
the full cross section including the longitudinal reinforcement bers shall be in accordance with the design action effects and
without adding for the effect of the spiral reinforcement, nor the corresponding state of strain.
more than 1.5 times this capacity. No less reinforcement shall be provided in any structural mem-
107 The capacity of an unreinforced cross section shall be ber than what was assumed when calculating the displace-
determined with the concrete stress-strain relationship given in ments.
C300 assuming the concrete not to take tension. 106 The compressive force in slender compression members
The eccentricity shall not be larger than to give a compressive shall be assumed to have an unintended eccentricity calculated
zone of at least a half of the cross sectional depth. in accordance with specified tolerances for curvature and incli-
108 The tensile strength for fibre reinforced concrete con- nation for the individual members.
taining at least 1 volume per cent steel fibre can be taken as k, 107 The eccentricity shall not be assumed to be less than the
ftd. For design of cross sections subjected to axial tension, the largest of 20 mm, 1,/300 or 1/30 of the cross sectional dimen-
factor, k,, shall be taken as 1.0, when designing for bending sion in the direction of eccentricity, unless special conditions
moment or bending moment in combination with axial com- provide basis for other values. The buckling length, le, is the

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.6 - Page45
length of a pin connected strut with the same theoretical buck- 114 Beams and columns in which, due to the slenderness,
ling force (Euler-force) and direction of displacement as the considerable additional forces may occur due to torsional dis-
structural member in question. placements of the structural member (lateral buckling or tor-
108 The unintended eccentricity shall be assumed to act sional buckling), shall be designed accordingly.
along that principal axis of the cross section where the effect 115 When designing thin-walled structures, consideration
will be most unfavourable, considering simultaneously the ef- shall be made to local displacements where this will influence
fect of first and second order bending moments. the design action effects. The calculation shall be based on ap-
109 The force dependent slenderness in the direction with proved methods and the principles given in E 101 through E109
the smallest resistance against buckling shall normally not be where these apply.
greater than 45. 116 If vital parts of the structure are in flexural or axial ten-
110 The geometrical slenderness A shall normally not exceed sion, and redistribution of forces due to cracking is expected,
80 (1+4 04)'.~. detailed non-linear (geometrical and material non-linearities)
analyses of the reinforced concrete may be required.
Where
@t = C(fsd ' A ~ > / ( f'~ d
A, = the area of reinforcement F. Shear Forces in Beams and Slabs
A, = the cross-sectional area of uncracked concrete.
F 100 Basis
The force dependent slenderness, AN, of a structural member is
calculated from the equation 101 The rules in this Sub-section F apply to beams, slabs and
members where the ratio between span length and depth is at
A N = A ( -nf/(1+4 O4))'.5 least 3.0 for two-sided supports and at least 1.5 for cantilevers.
where Structural members having a smaller ratio between length and
depth shall be designed in accordance with Sub-section I "Re-
A = le/ i , i = (IJA,) gions with Discontinuity in Geometry or Loads".
I, = the moment of inertia of A, 102 The capacity with respect to tensile failure (ved + v,d)
Nf and compressive failure (v,,,) shall be checked. The calcula-
nf = tion may be performed in accordance with the simplified meth-
' Ac ods in F200 truss model method in F300 or the general method
Nf = design axial force given in H.
1, = effective length, theoretical buckling length. 103 In the case of haunches or prestressed reinforcement that
are inclined compared to the longitudinal axis of the structural
The reinforcement area A, is introduced with its full value for member, the component of forces perpendicular to the longitu-
rectangular sections with reinforcement in the corners, or with dinal axis shall be added to the design shear forces from the ac-
the reinforcement distributed along the faces perpendicular to tions. If forces or support reactions are applied to the structural
the direction of the displacement. For other shapes of cross- member in such a manner that internal tensile forces are im-
sections or other reinforcement positions, the reinforcement posed in the direction of the force, these internal forces shall be
area can be entered as two thirds of the total reinforcement area transferred by reinforcement.
if more accurate values are not used.
104 In support regions an internal force system shall be cho-
111 The effect of displacements may be neglected if the sen in accordance with I.
force dependent slenderness AN based on the design actions is
less than 10. Tensile failure capacity for direct force applied within a dis-
tance a < 2d from the face of the support may, as a simplifica-
112 For a structural member with braced ends, without, lat- tion be checked by demonstrating that the cross section has
eral forces, this limit may be increased to sufficient capacity for a part of the load equal to the load mul-
AN= 18 - 8 I MOAI / I MOBI tiplied by the factor a/2d when determining the shear force.
where Where :
I MOA I Numerical smallest member end moment calcu-
= a = distance from the face of the support
lated from l . order theory d = distance from the centroid of the tensile reinforcement
I MOBI = Numerical largest member end moment calcu- to outer edge of the compression zone.
lated from l . order theory. For distributed actions which are nearly uniform the value of
if the structural member is designed over its entire length for the shear force at the distance d from the face of support may,
the numerically largest end moment calculated not considering as a simplification, be used to check the capacity for tensile
the displacements (first order theory). failure in cross sections closer to the support.
The ratio MoA/MoB is the ratio between the numerically The capacity for compressive failure shall be verified at the
smallest and largest end moment calculated not considering face of the support for the entire shear force.
the displacements (fist order theory). The ratio shall be en- 105 Shear reinforcement shall be included in the calculations
tered with a positive value when the end moments give tension of the capacity only if the provided reinforcement is at least as
on the same side of the member (single curvature) and with a given in R306 and shall consist of stirrups or bent bars. In
negative value when the opposite is the case (double curva- beams at least half of the shear capacity to be provided by shear
ture). reinforcement shall be stirrups.
If the largest end moment is less than that resulting from the The spacing between the stirrups measured along the longitu-
smallest eccentricity in accordance with D 103, the ratio shall dinal axis shall not be more than 0.6. h'(1 + cot a)< h' and not
be set to 1.0. more than 500 mm, see R306. Only shear reinforcement of an
113 If the force dependent slenderness calculated with axial angle between 45 and 90 degrees with the longitudinal axis
forces based on the characteristic long-term force for the struc- shall be included in the calculations. Inclined shear reinforce-
ture and the corresponding end moments does not exceed the ment shall be slanted to the same side of the cross section as
values given in El 10 the effect of creep may be ignored. the principal tensile stresses. The spacing between the stirrups
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page46 - S e c 6
shall neither exceed 0.4 h'.(l + cot a) nor 0.7.h' if the shear 203 The capacity for shear force with coinciding axial ten-
force is greater than 2.ftd.by.d or if in combination with shear sion can be taken as
force there is significant axial tension or if the action has fa- Vcd=Vco(1-Nf /(1.5'ftd'AC))2 0
tigue effect. Perpendicular to the span direction of the structur-
al member, the spacing shall neither exceed the depth of the 204 In cross sections where there is a bending moment coin-
beam nor be more than 600 mm. ciding with the axial force, the capacity can be taken as
Where Vcd = v,, (1 Mo/ I Mf I ) 2 0 ~
a = the angle between shear reinforcement and the longitu- if this gives greater capacity than the formula above.
dinal axis Here
h' = the distance between the centroid of the reinforcement
on the "tensile" and "compression" side of the mem- Mo = N f . W, /A,
ber. W, is the section modulus with respect to the extreme fibre
having compression
106 For slabs, the capacity in any direction shall at least be
equal to the design shear force for this direction. If the capacity When calculating V,,, the part of the tension reinforcement re-
is not sufficient without shear reinforcement, the area of shear quired to transfer only the tensile force shall be neglected.
reinforcement for the direction that has the greatest require- 205 The longitudinal reinforcement shall also be designed
ment shall be provided. for any forces from imposed strains in addition to other action
If the action is transferred to the supports primarily in one di- effects, and so that no part of the longitudinal reinforcement
rection, it is sufficient to check the shear capacity for this di- will have a greater calculated strain than E , ~ .
rection. 206 The capacity for structural members with transverse re-
If the slab is not subjected to in-plane membrane forces, the inforcement (shear reinforcement) that is distributed along the
slab can be designed for the principal shear force at the consid- longitudinal direction, may be assumed equal to the resistance
ered position. Vcd plus an additional Vsd from the transverse reinforcement.
When calculating Ved, k,, shall be set equal to 1.O.
107 A beam flange subjected to shear forces in its plane can
be designed in accordance with the rules for combined action 207 The capacity portion Vsd is determined by the force
effects in H or I. component in the direction of the shear force from transverse
reinforcement crossing an assumed inclined crack at 45 de-
F 200 Simplified method grees to the longitudinal axis of the structural member within
a depth equal to z from the tension reinforcement
201 For a structural member without shear reinforcement,
the shear capacity at tensile failure can be taken as Ved. The ca- Vsd = C (fsd 'AS, 'Sin a)
pacity for shear force without a coinciding axial force can be For transverse reinforcement consisting of units with spacing s
taken as measured along the longitudinal axis, this becomes:
V,d=Vco=0.33 (ft~+(k~A,)/(~b,d)b,dk,SO.66f~~b,k, Vsd = (fsd 'Asv 'Z/S) (I + COt a) Sin a '
where z can be taken equal to 0.9 d if the cross section has a compres-
kA = 100 MPa sive zone. If the entire cross section has tensile strain, z shall
A, = the cross section area of properly anchored reinforce- be taken equal to the distance h' between the utilized longitu-
ment on the tension side (mm2) dinal reinforcement groups (centroid) on the upper and lower
b, = width of beam (mm) side relative to the plane of bending.
d = distance from centroid of tensile reinforcement to com- 208 The capacity for compression failure shall be taken as
pression edge (mm) Vccd = 0.30 .fed 'b, 'Z (1 + COt a)< 0.45 .fed 'b, 'Z
k, = For slabs and beams without shear reinforcement the
factor k, is set equal to 1.5 d d l , but not greater than F 300 Truss model method
~
1.4 nor less than 1.O

dl = 1 O00 mm. 301 The capacity for shear force only or in combination with
other action effects can be calculated based on an assumed in-
202 The capacity at tensile failure for shear force in combi- ternal truss model with compressive concrete struts at an angle,
nation with axial compression may be taken as û, to the longitudinal axis of the beam. The shear reinforce-
Vcd = v,, + 0.8 'Mo .Vf/MfS (ftd .k, 0.25 .Nf/A,) 'b, 'Z1 ment acts as tension ties, and the tensile and the compressive
zone as chords in this assumed truss. A capacity portion Vcd in
~
where accordance with F200 shall not be included in the capacity.

Mo = -Nf.WdA, 302 For members subjected to shear force not in combina-
Nf = axial design load, positive as tension tion with axial compression, the angle 6' shall be chosen be-
Vf = design shear force for the cross section under the tween 25"and 60".
considered condition 303 For members subjected to shear force with axial com-
Mf = total moment in the section acting in combination pression, the angle ûmay be chosen less than 25 degrees, but
with the shear force Vf not less than that corresponding to the direction of the principal
Nf /Ac shall not be taken with a greater numerical value compression calculated for uncracked concrete.
than 0.4 fCd
w, = the section modulus of the concrete cross section 304 For members subjected to shear force in combination
with respect to the extreme tension fibre or the fibre with not negligible axial tension, the angle shall normally be
with least compression taken as û= 45".
-
IC the moment of inertia for the uncracked concrete 305 The shear capacity at tensile failure shall be calculated
section from the force component in the direction of the shear force
s, = area moment about the centroid axis of the cross- from the transverse reinforcement A,, crossing an assumed
section for one part of the concrete section crack at an angle 6' to the longitudinal axis for the structural
-
z1 - the greater of 0.7 d and I,/ S, member within a depth equal to z from the tensile reinforce-
b, = width of beam web (mm) ment:
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.6 - Page47
~ an area containing the loaded area is separated by the gov-

where erning section from the remainder of the slab
~ the governing section at no location is closer to the loaded
a is the angle between the transverse reinforcement and area than 1.0.d
the longitudinal axis ~ the perimeter of the governing section shall be minimized,
6' is the angle between the inclined concrete compression but straight edges may be assumed i.e. corners are not
struts and the longitudinal axis rounded, see Figure 8.
306 For transverse reinforcement consisting of units with a
spacing s measured along the longitudinal axis, the shear ca-
pacity becomes
Vsd = (fsd .Asv .z/s) (cot û+ cot a)sin a
307 The shear reinforcement for the most unfavourable load
case may be designed for the smallest shear force within a
length z cot û, corresponding to projection of the inclined
crack, measured along the longitudinal axis.
308 The capacity at compression failure shall be taken as
a) Inner column ù) Column near free edge
Vccd = fc2d 'b, 'Z (Cot 8 + COt a)/ (1 + Cot2 e)
The design compressive strength, fc2d in the compression field Figure 7
shall be determined for the calculated state of strain in accord- Cross-section for Design check of shear capacity for concentrated
ance with H. When û is assumed between 30 and 60 degrees, load on Plates
the design compressive strength can be assumed as
fc2d = 0.6 fcd
'
F 400 Additional force in the longitudinal reinforce-

ment from shear force r Free edge
401 When calculating according to the simplified method,
the longitudinal reinforcement shall be designed for an addi-
tional tensile load, Fsv caused by the shear force
Fsv = Vf in structures without shear reinforcement
Fsv = Vf 0.5 'v,d .(i + cot a) 2 O in structures with shear
~
reinforcement
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Where
Vf = Applied design shear force a) Sectiou arouud coluliiu b) Liuear sectLou
Vsd = Shear carried by shear reinforcement (See F306)
The force Fsv shall be assumed to act in both chords if this is Figure 8
unfavourable, i.e. areas near points with zero moment. Cross-section for Design check of plates with columns at the cor-
402 When calculating according to the truss model method, ner
a tensile force, F,, shall be assumed on both sides of the cross
section:
504 For concentrated mobile load near supports, the govern-
Fsv = 0.5 .Vf.(COt 8 -Cot a)2 O ing action position will be such that the distance from the
403 The maximum force in the longitudinal reinforcement boundary of loaded area to the face of the support is equal to
on the tension side shall not be taken at greater value than the 2.d.
value corresponding to the highest absolute moment in combi-
nation with the axial force found on the same part of the mo- 505 When a concentrated load is applied in the vicinity of a
ment curve as the section examined. free edge, in addition to the section given in F502, a governing
section shall be assumed extending to the free edge and per-
F 500 Slabs subjected to concentrated actions pendicular to this, see Figure 7.
501 The design of slabs subjected to concentrated actions 506 Similar rules apply to corners of slabs, see Figure Sa. In
causing compression perpendicular to the middle plane of the this case the capacity shall also be checked for a section at a
slab, i.e. column reactions or wheel actions, may be carried out distance d from the inner corner of the action. The section shall
in accordance with this section. be assumed in the most unfavourable direction and in such a
502 The calculation can normally be based on a rectangular way that it separates the corner and the action from the remain-
loaded area with equal area and equal ratio between the dimen- der of the slab, see Figure 8b.
sions in the two main directions as the actual loaded area.
507 Where the distance between the outline of an opening in
503 The capacity at tensile failure for a concentrated action the slab and the outline of the loaded area or column is less
in the inner parts of a slab is determined based on an assumed than or equal to 5. d, the portion of the governing section locat-
governing rectangular section with boundaries at a distance 1.O ed between two tangents to the outline of the opening, starting
. d from the loaded area. from the centre of gravity of the loaded area, shall be neglected
The governing section shall be chosen in such a way that when calculating the shear capacity, see Figure 9.

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page48 - Sec.6
Vsd shall at least be equal to 0.75.Vcd.

515 The required shear reinforcement calculated in the gov-
erning section shall be distributed along at least two rows at a
distance 0.5 d to 1.0.d from the face.
If I, < I,, an opening
where I is replaced by
516 Outside the section 1.0 d from the face, the required
shall be assumed.
shear reinforcement shall be calculated for plane sections in
accordance with F206, F207 and be distributed in accordance
with F105. The distance between the reinforcement units in the
direction perpendicular to the governing section can be up to
0.75 d in the span direction.
517 The shear reinforcement in the area of concentrated ac-
tions may consist of stirrups, possibly combined with bent
Figure 9 bars. Other types of steel reinforcement may be added provid-
Reduction in capacity near opening in Plates. ed the structural performance is verified by available docu-
mentation.
518 Compression failure caused by shear force shall be con-
508 The distribution of shear forces along the critical section sidered in accordance with F208 for sections at the face of the
can be calculated in accordance with the theory for elastic loaded area.
plates.
509 In a simplified approach, a linear distribution of shear
force along each of the faces of the governing section is usually G Torsional Moments in Beams
assumed. A portion of the eccentricity moment caused by a
moment introduced from a supporting column, an eccentrical- G100 General
ly located section enclosing a load at a free edge or similar
shall be assumed to be balanced by a linear variation of the 101 The capacity for torsional moment shall be checked for
shear force in the critical section. tensile and compression failure.
510 For a rectangular section, this portion of the moment can If the load transfer in the ultimate limit state is not dependent
be taken as on the torsional capacity, the design can normally be per-
formed without considering torsional moments.
M f / ( l + by /b,)
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
102 The torsional capacity of the cross section shall be cal-

Here b is the length of the side of the critical section that is culated based on an assumed closed hollow section with an
paraller to the moment axis and b, is the side perpendicular to outer boundary coinciding with the actual perimeter of the
this. For other forms of the governing section, the portion of cross section. The wall thickness of the effective cross section
the moment is determined as for a rectangular section with shall be determined as the required thickness using a design
equal area and equal side ratio. compressive concrete stress limited to fc2&where fc2d equals
511 The portion of the introduced moment that is assumed the reduced design compression strength under biaxial tensile
not to be introduced by a variation of the shear force shall be stress. However, for pure torsion the assumed wall thickness
transferred by bending moments or torsional moments along shall be limited to 0.2 multiplied by the diameter of the largest
the sides of the governing section. circle which can be drawn within the cross-section, and maxi-
mum equal to the actual wall thickness for real hollow sec-
512 The capacity Vc& per unit width of the governing sections. Concrete outside the outer stirrup shall not be included
tion at tensile shear failure for a slab without shear reinforce- in the design if the distance from the centre line of the stirrup
ment shall be determined in accordance with F20 1. to the face of the concrete exceeds half of the assumed wall
The depth d is taken as the average, d = (d, + d )/2, where x thickness, or if the total inclined compressive stress, from tor-
and y refer to the reinforcement directions. For &e reinforce- sional moment and shear force exceeds 0.4.fcd. The concrete
ment ratio, p, = A,, /(b.d) and p, = A,, /(b.d) , the geometrical outside the stirrups shall always be neglected if the concrete
mean for the two directions of tension reinforcement shall be surface is convex.
introduced. A,, and A,, are the amount of reinforcement in x- 103 The individual cross-sectional parts can be designed for
and y-direction, respectively. the calculated shear forces in accordance with the general
p = @ .p )0.5 method in H or in accordance with the requirements of G104
X Y
to G107.
The reinforcement ratios shall be determined as average values
over a width 2.d to each side of the loaded area. The capacity 104 Internal forces shall be determined in accordance with
shall be reduced in accordance with the regulations in F203, if recognized methods based on the equilibrium requirements un-
the slab is subjected to axial tension. der the assumption that the concrete cannot carry tension.
Where tensile strain occurs in the concrete, the forces shall be
The capacity shall be verified for the remaining loading condi- calculated as for a space truss model at the middle surface of
tions, including shear force in plane sections outside the gov- the assumed walls. In this truss, all tensions shall be transferred
erning section, according to F200. by reinforcement while the concrete can transfer compression.
513 If the shear capacity of a slab without shear reinforce- 105 Compressive failure limits the torsional capacity of the
ment calculated in accordance with F501 F512 is less than ~
cross section.
the calculated action effect, shear reinforcement shall be pro-
vided in areas where the shear capacity is insufficient. The capacity at compressive failure for only torsional moment
is the value giving a compressive concrete stress equal to fc2d
514 The capacity at tensile shear failure per unit width of the according to H106- H107. The compressive stress is calculated
governing section for slabs with shear reinforcement shall be for the assumed hollow section for the same equilibrium state
taken equal to the sum of the capacity, Ved, calculated using k, as the one used to design the governing torsional reinforce-
= 1.0 plus a contribution from the shear reinforcement given ment.
by: For torsional moment in combination with shear force or axial
Vsd = c f,d 'Asv 'Sin a force, the capacity for compressive failure shall be determined

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.6 - Page49
by taking the maximum compressive concrete stress in the ef- allel to the direction of reinforcement for the region. Principal
fective cross section as fc2d. stress and principal strain of the concrete are assumed to have
106 The capacity at tensile failure shall be determined by the the same direction in the assumed compression field.
maximum tensile forces that the torsional reinforcement can 104 Design of shear walls, plates and shells can be based on
transfer in the assumed spacial truss. The design may be based forces acting in the plane. When members are subjected to mo-
on a consideration of shear walls. It shall be demonstrated that ments in combination with membrane forces, the design may
the corresponding internal forces in the corners can be trans- be performed by assuming the structural member divided into
ferred. layers where the action effects are taken as membrane forces
107 For torsional moment in combination with bending mo- uniformly distributed through the thickness in each layer, and
ment, axial force or shear force, the required reinforcement where the average strain in the layers satisfies the condition of
may be calculated as the sum of required reinforcement due to linear strain variation through the thickness.
torsional moment and due to the other action effects. 105 This method of calculation may also be used when de-
108 Torsional reinforcement shall be provided as closed stir- signing for shear force in beams and slabs with shear reinforce-
rups with proper anchorage. In structures or structural mem- ment and for torsional moment in beams.
bers which according to these regulations shall be designed for 106 The design basis shall provide a relation between stress
torsion, this stirrup reinforcement in each face shall have a and strain for both reinforcement and concrete in areas subject-
minimum cross section of ed to a biaxial stress state in cracked concrete that is document-
0.25 A, ftk/fsk ed to give agreement between calculated capacity and tests.
For reinforcement, the relation between average strain and av-
where A, is the concrete area of a longitudinal section calcu- erage stress given in C308 - C309 or C3 10 can be assumed.
lated using the minimum wall thickness of a hollow section, or
0.2 multiplied by the diameter of an enclosed circle in accord- 107 For concrete subjected to compression, the relation be-
ance with G102 G103 for a solid cross section. The tensile
~
tween strain and stress given in C300, with the stress ordinate
strength, ftk, shall not be entered with a lesser value than 2.55 reduced by the factor fc2d / fCdmay be assumed.
MPa. For concrete in the assumed compression field a reduced de-
109 If the load transfer is totally dependent on the torsional sign compressive strength shall be taken as
capacity, the spacing between the stirrups shall not exceed 300 fc2d = fcd /(0.8 + 100. €1) 5 fcd
mm. If in addition the design torsional moment exceeds half of
the capacity of the cross section calculated at compressive fail- where rl is the average principal tensile strain.
ure, the link spacing shall be less than 300 mm and at fully uti- 108 The average tensile stresses between cracks shall be de-
lized concrete section not exceed 150 mm. termined by relationships documented by representative tests.
110 In addition to stirrup reinforcement, the torsional rein- 109 It shall be demonstrated that the cracks can transfer both
forcement shall consist of a longitudinal reinforcement, either the shear stresses in the concrete and the tensile stresses in the
nearly uniformly distributed or concentrated in the corners. reinforcement which are derived from the equilibrium require-
The spacing shall not exceed that given for stirrups, and the ments.
longitudinal reinforcement shall have a cross-sectional area
per unit length along the perimeter of the stirrup at least equal 110 If the concrete tensile stresses between the cracks are not
to the minimum area required per unit length for stirrups. considered (o1=O), the check of the stress condition in the
cracks can be waived.
111 The longitudinal reinforcement may be less than this
provided axial compression is acting simultaneously or the 111 The stresses in the reinforcement at the cracks shall be
stirrup reinforcement is placed nearby parallel to the principal determined from the equilibrium conditions and shall not ex-
tensile stress direction, and provided that the capacity is suffi- ceed the design strength of the reinforcement.
cient. At least one bar shall be provided in each corner of the H 200 Membrane (in-plane) shear resistance
stirrups and having at least the same diameter as the stirrups.
201 Resistance to membrane forces in plates and shells is to
112 Torsional reinforcement, both stirrups and longitudinal be determined by recognized methods based on equilibrium
reinforcement, shall be distributed in the cross section in such considerations. The tensile strength of concrete is to be ne-
a way that all cross-sectional parts get at least the required min- glected
imum reinforcement.
202 For Membrane forces only, i.e. when the slab element is
subjected to in-plane forces only (Figure 10) and the reinforce-
ment is disposed symmetrically about mid-depth, the element
H. General Design Method for Structural may be designed as outlined below when at least one principal
Members Subjected to In-plane Forces membrane force is tensile. The concrete is considered to carry
compressive stress (o,)at angle 6' to the x-axis (in the sense
H100 General corresponding to the sign of N,,).
101 Design for forces acting in the middle plane of a struc- The two sets of reinforcing bars are designed to carry the forc-
tural member may be performed by a method based on an as- es F, and F, where:
sumed internal force model satisSling equilibrium conditions
and compatibility requirements for the local region to be de- F, = N, + I Nxy I . Cot 6'
signed. F, = N,+INxYI.tan6'
102 The concrete is assumed to transfer compression by
compression fields, and the reinforcement in two or more di- O, = I Nxy I / (b. sin 6'. COS 9
rections transfers tension. Under certain conditions, a limited
transfer of shear forces parallel to the cracks and tension in (the units for F are in forcehit length)
concrete between the cracks may be assumed. valid for positive values of F, and F, and taking tensile stresses
103 Strains and stresses shall be calculated as average values as positive.
over a cracked region. The strains can be assumed constant in The angle 6' may be chosen arbitrarily for each loading case
local regions and through the thickness. Average strain in the and each slab element, paying due regard to the requirements
reinforcement can be assumed equal to the average strain par- of Subheading R concerning minimum reinforcement.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page50 - Sec.6
For N, < - INxyl. cot 6‘ no reinforcement is required in the x-

direction. F, and ocare then given by:
F, = Ny-NxY2/Nx
oc = (N, + Nx,2rnx> /h
For Ny < - INxyl tan 6’no reinforcement is required in the y-di-

rection F, and ocare then given by: NY+
F, = N,-NxY2/Ny NXO Nm
!
Ni N;
oc = (Ny + Nxy”rny>/h
a) N o d Force b) ShearForce
Finally, a situation may occur where both N, and Ny are nega-
tive and Nx.Ny > Nxy2.No reinforcement is required and prin-
cipal membrane forces may be calculated in accordance with
conventional formulae. .
N,’
NY
a)Benduyhhmt b) Torsionìvbnmî
Figure 11
Applied Forces and Moments resolved into Membrane Forces in
f
*x Sandwich Layers
NX
I. Regions with Discontinuity in Geometry or

Loads
A”’ I \
I100 General
t \ 101 In areas with discontinuities in geometry or loads such
AX that assumptions of plane sections remaining plane are invalid,
the calculation may be based on force models in sufficient con-
Figure 10 formity with test results and theoretical considerations. The
Slab Element Subjected to Membrane Forces models might be truss systems, stress fields or similar that sat-
isfy the equilibrium conditions.
203 Membrane forces und bending moments combined. If there is no recognized calculation model for the member in
question, the geometry of the model may be determined from
In cases where a slab element is subjected to combinations of the stress condition for a homogeneous uncracked structure in
moments and membrane forces, or to moments only, the slab accordance with the theory of elasticity.
element may be regarded as a sandwich consisting of two outer
layers and a central zone. The applied forces and moments may 102 The provisions of this Sub-section shall be used to de-
be resolved into statically equivalent “.membrane” forces on termine internal forces in the member at a distance less than d
the outer layers as shown in Figure 11. Each layer is then de- from the support or from concentrated loads. The internal forc-
signed in accordance with the general principles given for es may be used at distances up to 2. d.
“Membrane forces only”. 103 Internal forces shall be calculated based on an assumed
force model of concrete compression struts and ties of rein-
forcement. Effective cross section for concrete compression
struts shall be assumed in accordance with recognized calcula-
tion models.
104 Tensile forces caused by possible deviation in the as-
sumed compressive field shall be considered.
The reinforcement shall be shaped in accordance with the ana-
lytical model and be anchored in accordance with the provi-
sions of K at the assumed joints.
105 Calculated concrete stresses in struts shall not exceed
f& as given in H107. When calculating fc2d, the average prin-
cipal tensile strain is derived from the principal compressive
strain in the strut and the tensile strain in the reinforcement
crossing the strut.
106 It shall be demonstrated that the calculated forces in the
assumed struts and ties can be transferred in the joints, with de-
sign concrete compressive strength in accordance with 1105,
and the other provisions of this standard. Increased design con-
crete compressive strength may be taken into account for par-
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.6 - Page51
tially loaded areas. Where there is no special reinforcement or imum capacity shall be used in the design.
compressive stress normal to the compressive struts in the
force model, reduced compressive concrete strength shall be Table J1 Values for force transfer in construction ioints I
assumed. U , > 0.001 A,
Contact or o, < - 0.4 MPa
107 If the reduced compressive concrete strength fc2d is not
surface Combination 1 Combination 2
derived from the strain condition, the calculated compressive
concrete stress in the assumed joints shall not exceed the fol- P P
lowing values: Smooth O 0.70 O 0.7
Rough O 1.50 0.6ftd 0.8
1.1 'fed in joints where no tensile reinforcement is anchored Toothed O 1.80 1.5 ftd 0.8
(bi- or triaxial compression)
0.9 'fed in joints where tensile reinforcement in only one di- 108 When the contact surfaces are toothed, the design shear
rection is anchored strength z,d shall be assumed to act on an cross-section giving
0.7 'fed in joints where tensile reinforcement in more than the smallest net area at the base of the toothing.
one direction is anchored. 109 The design strength, z,d, in the contact surface shall be
determined for the concrete part having the lowest strength.
110 Reinforcement may be omitted in rough or toothed con-
struction joints transferring shear forces, in the following cas-
J. Shear Forces in Construction Joints es:
J100 General ~ where the parts are sufficiently secured against moving
from each other perpendicular to surfaces by other means.
101 In concrete joints between hardened concrete and con- The capacity shall be calculated in accordance with J105
crete cast against it, the transfer of shear forces can be assumed through J 109.
in accordance with the provisions given in this clause. ~ in structures with uniformly distributed dominantly static
102 Construction joints shall not be assumed to transfer larg- live load not exceeding 5 kPa and minor failure conse-
er forces than if the structure was monolithically cast. quences. The design bond strength of the concrete shall be
taken as O.5.zcd, and the forces in the concrete joint shall
103 A hardened concrete surface is classified as smooth, be determined in accordance with the method described
rough or toothed. A surface may be assumed as rough if it has for composite structures in A500.
continuously spread cavities of depth no less than 2 mm. When ~ in structures where the composite action between the parts
surfaces are assumed as toothed, the toothing shall have a is not accounted for when calculating the capacity It shall
length parallel with the direction of the force not exceeding 8 be verified that this has no detrimental effects in the serv-
times the depth and the side surfaces of the toothing shall make iceability limit state.
an angle with the direction of the joint no less than 60". The
depth shall be minimum 10 mm. 111 When calculating capacity for transfer of shear forces in
concreted joints between precast members, the provisions in
104 The design shear strength of concrete, z,d, can be taken J105 through J109 may be waived provided there is sufficient
into account only for contact surfaces that are cleaned and free basis to assuming other values than given in table J1.
of laitance before concreting, and where there are no tensile
stresses perpendicular to the contact surface.
105 The shear force capacity parallel to a construction joint K. Bond Strength and Anchorage Failure
with an effective area A, and reinforcement area A, through
the joint surface, shall be taken as K l o 0 General
Vd = z,d 'A, + fsd 'A, (COS a+,D 'Sin a)- p.0,'A, < 0.3 'fed 'A, 101 The distances between the reinforcement bars shall be
such as to ensure good bond.
where
102 Reinforcement in different layers is to be aligned in
a = the angle between the reinforcement and the contact planes leaving sufficient space to allow for the passage of an
surface, where only reinforcement with an angle be- internal vibrator.
tween 90" and 45" (to the direction of the force) shall 103 Lap joints shall be made in a way that secures transfer of
be taken into account force from one rebar to another. The reduction of strength of a
As = the reinforcement area that is sufficiently anchored on lap joint due to closely spaced lap joints is to be taken into ac-
both sides of the joint and that is not utilized for other count where relevant.
purposes 104 The lap joints shall be distributed. The maximum
p = the friction factor number of lap joints occuring at a given cross sectional plane
o, = the smallest simultaneously acting concrete stress per- is normally limited by the smaller of
pendicular to the contact surface.
112 of the reinforcement area
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
106 The reinforcement crossing the joint shall have a total ~ one reinforcement layer (the layer with largest reinforce-
cross-sectional area no less than 0.00 1 A, or there shall be a si- ment area).
multaneously acting compressive normal stress of minimum Larger lengths of the lap joint than 80.4 are not to be utilized.
0.4 MPa.
105 Resistance against bond and anchorage failure is to be
107 In joints parallel to the longitudinal axis the distance be- determined by recognized methods. Both local bond and an-
tween the reinforcement units shall not exceed 4 times the min- chorage bond shall be investigated.
imum concrete thickness, measured perpendicular to the
contact surface or 500 mm. In zones of reduced bond (e.g. where gravitational settling of
the concrete may reduce the compaction around the reinforce-
The combination of values given in table J1 that gives the min- ment) the design bond strength is not to be taken higher than

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page52 - Sec.6
70% of the value for good bond zones.

Consideration is to be given to the state of stress in the anchor-
age zone. Adequate bond resistance is to be assured by trans-
verse reinforcement, stirrups, spirals, hooks or mechanical
anchorages.
106 Individual reinforcement bars shall have a development
length no less than
lb = 0.25' 4 0, 1 fbd + t '
where
4 is the diameter of the reinforcement bar
o, is the calculated stress in the reinforcement bar in ulti-
mate limit state at the cross section in question
fbd is the design bond strength, calculated in accordance
with K116.
t is the specified longitudinal tolerance for the position
of the bar end. If such tolerances are not specified on
the drawings the value o f t shall not be taken less than
3. 4.
107 Required lap length when splicing shall be taken equal
to the calculated development length. The lap length shall be
not less than the greater of 20. 4 and 300 mm. Smooth release of Sudden release of
108 Bundled reinforcement bars shall have a development Type of prestressing tension prestressed tension
reinforcement force force
length no less than
l(kn 'fbc + fb,) + t
ib = 0.25. (be 'o,
a ß a ß
Plain wire 10 0.20
Indented wire O 0.17 10 0.21
equivalent diameter in term of reinforcement Strand O I 0.14 I 5 1 0.17
cross section. Ribbed bar O I 0.07 I 0 1 0.08
design bond strengths in accordance with
K116 with 4 = QC The part a . 4 in the formula for 1bp defines a length where no
a factor dependent on the number of bars in force transmission is assumed.
the bundle and is taken as: 111 Post tensioning anchorages shall be designed for the ul-
0.8 for bundle of 2 bars timate strength of the tendon. The anchorage unit is to be de-
signed so that transfer of forces to the surrounding concrete is
0.7 for bundle of 3 bars possible without damage to the concrete. Documentation veri-
0.6 for bundle of 4 bars sling the adequacy of the anchorage unit is to be approved.
the specified longitudinal tolerance for the 112 The design of anchorage zones is to be in accordance
position of the bar end, see K106. with recognized methods. Reinforcement is to be provided,
The development length shall not be assumed to be effective where required, to prevent bursting or splitting.
over a length exceeding 80. QC. The design strength of such reinforcement is to be limited to
For lapped splices of bundled reinforcement with equivalent 300 MPa.
diameter larger than 32 mm, the bars shall be lapped individu- 113 The release of prestressing force may be assumed to be
ally and staggered at least the development length lb. When ter- smooth if one of the following requirements is fulfilled:
minated between supports, the bars shall be terminated
individually and staggered in the same way. The development ~ the prestressing force is released gradually from the abut-
length shall be calculated for each individual bar by entering ments:
the diameter of the bar in question for QC in the formula. ~ the impact against the end of the concrete structure is
109 The development length for welded wire fabric shall be damped by a buffer between the end of the concrete struc-
no less than ture and the point where the reinforcement is cut
~ both concrete and prestressed reinforcement are cut in the
same operation by sawing.
where
114 Development of tensile force caused by external loads
CF,/y, = sum of forces F,, corresponding to shear failure shall be calculated in accordance with K106. Within the devel-
at cross wire welds within the development opment length for prestressed tensile force, fbd ,shall be re-
length duced by the factor (1 - oplfbc).In this calculation, long-term
lb
-
development length in accordance with K106. reduction of opcaused by shrinkage, creep and relaxation shall
l'b shall not be taken as larger than the development be considered. The development length for the reduced pre-
length in accordance with K128. stressing force shall be assumed to be unchanged, equal to lbp.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.6 - Page53
fs As
A,
0,
________ Force caused by external load
Op As
Prestressing force
I l
lbp lb
End of
reinforcement unit
Figure 12
Prestressed Force introduction length where prestressed force is anchored in bond.
115 Transverse tensile forces in the development zone shall

be resisted by reinforcement, unless it is shown that reinforce-
ment can be omitted.
I Table K2 Values of k, for various types of Reinforcement
I TvDe ofReinforcement I kl I
116 The design bond strength fbd for ribbed bar, indented
bar, indented wire and strand can be taken as
I Ribbed bar 11.4
Intented bar and wire 11.2
Strand 11.2
where Plain bar 0.9
Plain wire in welded wire fabric and prestressed rein- 0.5
fbc k1 .k2 'ftd (u3 + 2.d3.4) = forcement
fbs k3 (Ast / q.4) 5 1.5 MPa =
k1 a factor depending of the type of reinforcement, given
=
in Table K2
c = the least of the dimensions c1, c2 and (sl - @)/2given in
Figure 13
l
@ =the diameter of the anchored reinforcement
k3 = a factor dependent on the transverse reinforcement and
its position as given in Figure 14. The factor k3 is taken
k, = 40 Nimm' k, = 20 Nimm' k, = O
as zero for strands.
Ast = the area of transverse reinforcement not utilized for
other tensile forces and having a spacing not greater
than 12 times the diameter of the anchored reinforce- Figure 14
Values of k3 for various types of transverse reinforcement for cal-
ment. If the reinforcement is partly utilized, the area culation of bond strength
shall be proportionally reduced
s1 = the spacing of the transverse reinforcement
k2 = has the value 1.6 if the spacing s between the anchored 118 When calculating development of force in reinforce-
bars exceeds 9 . @ or (6.12+ @)whichever is the larger, ment which during concreting has an angle less than 20" to the
k2 has the value 1.O ifs is less than the larger Of 5 @ and horizontal plane, the following reduction of the portion fbc, of
(3c + 4). For intermediate values interpolate linearily
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
the design bond strength fbd according to K116 shall be made:

117 For plain reinforcement take fbd = kl 'ftd ~ if the concreting depth below the reinforcement exceeds
250 mm, the reduction for ribbed bars is 30% and for other
types of bars 50%. If the concreting depth is 100 mm or
less, no reduction is made. For intermediate values linear
interpolation shall be performed.
~ if there is a tensile stress perpendicular to the anchored re-
inforcement larger than 0.5 . ftd in the development zone,
the reduction is 20%.
The highest of the reductions given above shall be applied. The
reductions shall not be combined.
(Section in way of rebar overlap)
119 At a simply supported end, the development length de-
Figure 13 termined according to K106 through K115 may be reduced
Values of concrete cover and bar spacing for calculation of bond
strength above the support, if the support reaction is applied as direct
compression against the tension face. In this case the stirrups
shall continue throughout the support region.
a) Distance for anchorage, b) Distance for splices. When calculating the development length, the value fbc may be

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page54 - Sec.6
increased by SO%, but fbd shall not have a higher value than - 3 transverse bars are located in the anchorage zone for
what corresponds to the maximum value in accordance with welded wire fabric of bars with diameters from 4 to 9
K116. mm
- 4 transverse bars are located in the anchorage zone for
120 Reinforcement that is taken into account at the theoreti-
cal support, shall normally be extended at least 100 mm be- welded wire fabric of bars with diameters from 10 to
yond this. The position of the reinforcement shall be given on 12 mm.
the drawings, with tolerance limits. In addition, the anchorage length shall be no less than
121 If reinforcement in several layers are spliced or an- 30.4for mesh made of indented bars
chored in the same section, the capacity shall be limited to the 40.4for mesh made of plain bars.
value that can be calculated for the bars in only one layer, using
the layer that gives the highest capacity. This provision may be The development of the force along the anchorage length may
waived if otherwise demonstrated by a more accurate design. be assumed uniform.
122 Reinforcement can also be anchored with special anchor For reinforcement which has a concrete depth below the rein-
units such as end plates. forcement larger than 150 mm or an angle less than 20" to the
horizontal plane, the anchorage length shall be increased by 1O
A combination of several anchorage methods may be utilized. 4 for ribbed bars and welded wire fabric of indented bars, and
The total anchorage capacity can be calculated as the entire ca- 20.4 for plain bars.
pacity from the anchorage method giving the highest portion 125 The required minimum reinforcement in accordance
and half of the anchorage capacity from each of the remaining with Q and R shall be spliced for its full capacity.
anchorage methods. For plain steel, a combination of bond and
end anchorage shall not be utilized. 126 Along the development length, a transverse reinforce-
ment or stirrups shall be provided in accordance with Q303,
123 For tensile reinforcement of ribbed bar or indented bar unless a more accurate assessment is made.
with an anchorage hook a concentrated force development
along the bent part of the hook may be assumed. A hook shall
only be assumed effective if it has transverse reinforcement
and is formed in accordance with Q408. If the hook is bent L. Partially loaded areas
with an angle of 90", the straight end after the bend shall be at
least ten times the diameter of the bent bar. If the angle is 135", L 100 General
the straight part may be reduced to five times the diameter of
the bar. 101 Where a compression force Ff is transferred to a con-
crete member with nearly uniformly distributed compressive
For bars of steel grade B500A to C (see Q400), the concentrat- stresses over a limited loading area A, increased compressive
ed force in the bend may be taken as 25% of the capacity of the stress over the loaded area relative to fcd may be allowed pro-
bar, if the hook has an angle of 90". If the angle is 135" the vided this area represents only a part of the surface (cross sec-
force can be taken as 40%. tion) of the concrete member, and if the force can be assumed
Anchorage for the remaining portion of the force in the bar transferred fwther in the same direction and distributed over a
shall be calculated by force development along the bar outside larger distribution area, A, in the concrete member.
the bent part. 102 The loaded area A, used in the calculation and the as-
Tensile reinforcement of quality B500B or B500C with an- sumed distribution area A, shall be such that their centroids
chorage hook as described above, may be presumed to be an- coincide with the applied force resultant. The side faces of the
chored in the bent part of the bar provided the bar is bent with cut pyramid or cone which are formed between loaded area and
a mandrel of diameter equal to or less than 4.4 and otherwise distribution area shall not have an inclination larger than 1:2.
bent in accordance with Q400. 103 The cross-sectional dimensions of the distribution area
shall not be assumed larger than the sum of the dimensions of
124 If the development length is not calculated in accord- the loaded surface measured in the same main direction and the
ance with K106 through K108, the anchorage length of rein- concrete thickness measured parallel to the direction of the
forcement in one layer in normal density concrete may force.
simplified be determined as follows:
104 If more than one load act simultaneously the respective
For ribbed bar, the anchorage length shall be taken as 50.4 distribution areas shall not be overlapping each other.
for B500A to C. This applies provided the concrete cover 105 The compressive capacity for normal density concrete
is at least 4 and the spacing between the anchored bars is can be- taken as
at least 8.4.If the transverse reinforcement is located clos-
est to the concrete surface and the concrete cover of the an- Fcd = A,. fcd (A,/A1) ' I 3
chored reinforcement is at least 1.5. @, the spacing shall be 106 The compressive capacity for lightweight concrete can
at least 5.4. be taken as
For plain bars with end hooks, the anchorage length is tak- Fcd = A,.fcd (A,/A1) 'I4
en as 40.4 assuming that fsk 5 250 MPa. 107 The dimensions of the distribution area shall not be as-
For welded wire fabric, the anchorage length shall be at sumed greater than 4 times the dimensions of the loaded area
least so large that measured in the same main direction, see Figure 15.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.6 - Page55
43
<:
I /
i xl
A,
t g a l % ; a,< a,+c t g a I % ; a,< a,+c,a,/b,=a2/b2<_2
I 1,5a, I1,5a,
I I VI I
Figure 15
Geometrical limitations for partial loaded areas
108 If the ratio between the larger and smaller dimension of Here s is the spacing of the reinforcement bars. For reinforce-
the loaded area is less than 2, and the distribution area A, is as- ment near the free surface parallel to the plane of the bent re-
sumed to be geometrically identical to the loaded area A,, the inforcement, the spacing s shall not be greater than twice the
compressive capacity for normal density concrete may be tak- distance from the centre of the bar to the free surface.
en as If it is necessary to provide reinforcement for transverse ten-
Fcd = A,.fcd (A,/A1) 5 3.A,.fcd sion, the total area of this reinforcement shall be at least 40%
109 The compressive capacity for lightweight aggregate of the area of the bent bar. The transverse reinforcement shall
concrete may be taken as consist of at least 2 bars placed within the curve of the bend.
Transverse reinforcement may be omitted provided there are
Fcd = A,.fcd (A,/A1) 1'3 5 2.A, .fed compressive stresses at least equal to ftd normal to the plane of
see Figure 15 the bent bar.
110 The concrete shall be sufficiently reinforced for trans- In order to limit the contact pressure in the bend, the reinforce-
verse tensile forces. ment shall not be bent around a mandrel diameter less than de-
termined by the equations
In the two principal directions perpendicular to the direction of
the compressive force reinforcement for the transverse forces D = 45 (45%) % os/fcd for normal density concrete
shall be provided according to and
0.25.Ff (1 - a1/a2) and 0.25.Ff (1 - bl/b2) D = 1.5 45 (ds)% os/fcd for lightweight aggregate concrete
see Figure 15. In this calculation, s shall not exceed 4.45.
The transverse tensile reinforcement shall be placed such that For requirements to the mandrel diameter, see also Q400
the centroid of the reinforcement is located at a distance from
the loaded area equal to half the length of the side of the distri- It is not necessary to cheek that stirrups made in accordance
bution area in the same direction, but not larger than the dis- with Q408 are in accordance with the provisions of this clause.
tance to the distribution area. The reinforcement may be
distributed over a width corresponding to the length of the side
of the distribution area normal to the direction of the reinforce-
ment and over a height that corresponds to half the side of the M. Fatigue Limit State
distribution area parallel to the direction of the reinforcement. M100 General
Additional reinforcement shall be provided, if additional trans- 101 All stress fluctuations imposed during the life of the
verse forces can develop caused by transverse expansion of structure which are significant with respect to fatigue evalua-
soft supports (shims), fluid pressure or similar. tion shall be taken into account when determining the long
111 It shall be demonstrated that forces caused by bent rein- term distribution of stress range, (see Sec.5 D2000).
forcement can be resisted. If no reinforcement is provided for 102 Statistical considerations for loads of a random nature
transverse tension normal to the plane of the bent reinforce- are required for determination of the long term distribution of
ment, the reinforcement shall not be bent around a mandrel di- fatigue loading effects. Deterministic or spectral analysis may
ameter less than determined by the equation be used. The method of analysis shall be documented.
D = o.4'&'oS/(s'ftd) (I - @/S) COS (ß/2) 103 The effects of significant dynamic response shall be
where ßis the opening angle of the bend properly accounted for when determining stress ranges. Spe-
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page56 - S e c 6
cia1 care is to be taken to adequately determine the stress rang- O-= the numerically largest compressive stress, calculated
es in structures or members excited in the resonance range. The as the average value within each stress-block
amount of damping assumed is to be appropriate to the design. O
, = the numerically least compressive stress, calculated as
104 The geometrical layout of the structural elements and re- the average value within each stress-block.
inforcement is to be such as to minimize the possibility of fa- When O ,, is tension, it shall be taken as zero when calculat-
,
tigue failure. Ductility is to be assured by confinement of the ing the design life.
concrete by appropriate reinforcement.
The factor Cl shall be taken as
105 Fatigue design may alternatively be undertaken utilizing
methods based on fatigue tests and cumulative damage analy- 12.0 for structures in air
sis, methods based on fracture mechanics, or a combination of 10.0 for structures in water for those stress-blocks having
these. Such methods shall be appropriate and adequately doc- stress variation in the compression-compression range
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
umented. 8.0 for structures in water for those stress-blocks having
106 For structures subject to multiple stress cycles, it shall be stress variation in the compression-tension range.
demonstrated that the structure will endure the expected stress-
es during the required design life. If the calculated design life log N is larger than the value of x
given by the expression
107 Calculation of design life at varying stress amplitude can
be based on cumulative linear damage theory. x = c 1 /(l-(Omin/frd)+O.l'C1)
The stresses due to cyclic actions may be arranged in stress- The design life may be increased fwther by multiplying the
blocks (action effect-blocks) each with constant amplitude and value of log N by the factor C2 where this is taken as
a corresponding number of stress cycles, ni. C2 = (1 + 0.2 (log N - x)) > 1.0
A minimum of 8 blocks is recommended. 202 The design life of reinforcement subjected to cyclic
The design criterion is stresses may be calculated based on
k logN = C3 - C4 log AO
ni/Ni < 7 where
i=1 Aois the stress variation of the reinforcement (
where 1
C3 and C4 are factors dependent on reinforcement type:
k = the number of stress-blocks For straight reinforcement, the value of C3 and C4 can be taken
ni = the number of cycles in stress-block i from Table M2
Ni = the number of cycles with constant amplitude which
causes fatigue failure For reinforcement bent around a mandrel diameter as given in
7 = the ratio of fatigue utilization Table M3,
108 The characteristic fatigue strength or resistance (S-N
C3 is 15.9 and C4 is 4.8.
curve) of a structural detail is to be applicable for the material, For intermediate bending diameters between 3. q5 and straight
structural detail, state of stress considered and the surrounding members, interpolated values from Tables M2 and M3 may be
environment. S-N curves are to take into account material used.
thickness effects as relevant. The shortest of the fatigue lives calculated for straight bars and
109 The cumulative damage ratio (7)to be used in the design bent bars, respectively, shall be applied for bent bars.
is to depend on the access for inspection and repair. Cumula- Infinite fatigue life may be assumed if the calculated value of
tive damage ratios according to Table M1 are normally accept- N is greater than 2.108 cycles.
able.
203 For structures in a reinforcement corrosion environment,
Table M1 Cumulative Damage Ratios ívì the possibility of corrosion fatigue shall be assessed separately.
No access for
inmection and rer>air
I
Below or in the
d a s h zone1)
Above splash zone 204 Corrosion fatigue is to be considered according to recog-
nized methods when calculating the fatigue life of structures or
0.33 I 0.5 I 1.o I parts of a structure exposed to aggressive environments.
In typically harsh environments (e.g. the North Sea) structural de-
tails exposed to seawater in the splash zone are normally to be con- Table M2
sidered to have no access for inspection and repair, i.e. the Level of Stress Variations
cumulative damage ratio is to be reduced to 0.33. 400>Ao<235 I 2 3 5 > A o > 6 5 I 6 5 > A o > 4 0
I I
110 The action effects shall be calculated according to the

theory of elasticity.
111 The capacity may be assumed to be adequate, when cal-
culated design life for the largest acting amplitude corresponds
to at least 2.0 x lo6 cycles if the fatigue loading is caused by I Tahle M3 I
randomly variable actions such as wind, waves, traffic etc.
M 200 Fatigue strength, design life I Fatigue life Bending
Diameter D
201 The design life of concrete subjected to cyclic stresses C? 15.9 3d

may be calculated from
loglo N = C 1 (1 - Omax/frd)/ (1- Omin/frd)
M 300 Bending moment and axial force
where
301 Stresses in concrete and reinforcement shall be calculat-
frd = the compressive strength for the type of failure in ed based on a realistic stress-strain relationship. The effects of
question shrinkage and creep may be taken into account when calculat-

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.6 - Page57
ing stresses. 406 When demonstrating the compressive failure capacity

For concrete subject to compression, frd is taken equal fCd the design life can be calculated in accordance with F208.
302 If a more accurate calculation is not performed, stresses
O,/f,d shall be replaced by Vm,/Vccd
in concrete and reinforcement can be calculated with a linear Omin/frdshall be replaced by Vmin/Vccd
stress distribution in the compression zone. The calculations For those stress-blocks where the shear force changes sign, use
may be based on a modulus of elasticity equal to 0.8 Eck for the
concrete.
v, = o.
Vccd shall be calculated in accordance with F208.
In such a calculation the reference strength, frd of the concrete
in compression can be taken as The factor C1 shall be entered with the values given in M402
frd = @fed 407 In addition to the checks required above, the expected
design life of cross sections subjected to simultaneously acting
The value of a m a y be calculated as a = 1.3 - 0.3 ß> 1.0 axial forces shall be calculated from the principal compressive
where stresses at the mid-height of the cross section. The shear stress-
es in this case may be assumed constant over a height corre-
ß = the ratio between the numerically smallest and largest sponding to the internal lever arm, which may be taken as
stresses acting simultaneously in the local compressive 0.9.d. The reference stress of the concrete, frd shall be taken as
concrete zone. The distance between the points used fCd
when calculating ßshall not exceed 300 mm
(O < ß< 1.0). M 500 Anchorage and splicing
501 Demonstration of the design life for force development
M 400 Shear force can be performed in accordance with M201.
401 The design life at tensile failure of concrete without O,/f,d shall be replaced by Zbm,/fbd
shear reinforcement can be calculated in accordance with
M201. Omin/frdshall be replaced by Zbmin/fbd
O,,/f,d shall be replaced by v,,/vcd The bond strength, fbd shall be calculated in accordance with
K116.
Omin/frdshall be replaced by v,in/vcd The bond stress, Zb shall be taken as
402 For those stress-blocks where the shear force changes Zb= 0.25.@0,/lb
sign, the denominator in the formula for log N in M201 shall
be replaced by 502 For structures in air C1shall be 12.0, for structures in wa-
ter C1 shall be 10.0. If the bond stresses. change sign, this re-
+ Vmin/Vcd versible effect on fatigue life shall be especially considered
If the shear force changes sign the calculation shall, if neces- when evaluating the fatigue life.
sary, be performed with both the positive and negative values
for V, and Vminrespectively in the formulas above.
Vcd shall be calculated in accordance with F200. N. Accidental Limit State
The factor C1shall be taken as
N100 General
12.0 for structures in air where the shear force does not 101 Structural calculations for an accidental limit state shall
change sign. document the capacity of the structure. The calculations can be
10.0 for structures in air where the shear force changes sign performed according to the regulations of this clause and Sub-
and for structures in water where the shear force does Sections D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, Lor P.
not change sign.
8.0 for structures in water where the shear force changes 102 The material coefficients are given in B607.
sign. 103 Strength and strain properties are as given in Sec.6
B600, C100, C200 and C300. The strain limits E,, and E,, may
403 The design life for structures with shear reinforcement however be given particular assessment.
can be calculated in accordance with M201 by assuming the
concrete at all load levels to transfer a portion of the acting 104 Structures in Safety classes 2 and 3 (see Sec.2 A300)
shear force corresponding to the contribution of the concrete to shall be designed in such a way that an accidental load will not
the combined shear capacity of concrete and shear reinforce- cause extensive failure. Offshore structures are generally de-
ment. When calculating the shear contribution of the concrete, fiied belonging to safety class 3.
the tensile strength of the concrete shall be reduced to 0.5 ftd. The design may permit local damage and displacements ex-
Alternatively, the total shear force may be assumed carried by ceeding those which are normally assumed by design in the ul-
the shear reinforcement. The design life of the concrete at ten- timate limit state, and structural models and load transferring
sile shear failure shall be demonstrated in accordance with mechanisms which are normally not permitted may be as-
F100. sumed.
404 The design life of the shear reinforcement can be calcu- N 200 Explosion and impact
lated in accordance with M202 by assuming the shear rein-
forcement at all load levels to transfer a portion of the acting 201 For explosion loads and impact type of loads, increased
shear force corresponding to the contribution of the shear rein- modulus of elasticity and material strength based on a docu-
forcement to the combined shear capacity of the shear rein- mented relationship between strength and strain rate may be
forcement and the concrete calculated with a reduced tensile taken into account. The assumed strain rate in the structure
strength equal to 0.5 ftd. The stresses in the shear reinforce- shall be documented.
ment shall be calculated based on an assumed truss model with 202 The structural calculations may take account of the load
the compression struts inclined at 45". variation with time and the dynamic properties of the structure.
405 If the shear force changes sign, account of this shall be
made when calculating the number of stress cycles in the shear N300 Fire
reinforcement. 301 Required fiie resistance is determined in one of the fol-
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSK E VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page58 - Sec.6
lowing ways: posed displacements, if any, shall be taken into account.

- An offshore structure shall be designed to resist a fire in Cracking of concrete is to be limited so that it will not impair
accordance with the requirements of DNV-OS-A1O 1, if no the function or durability of the structure. The crack size is
other requirements for the actual structure are provided controlled by ensuring that the predicted crack width by calcu-
from National Building Code or other National Regula- lations is within the nominal characteristic crack width limits
tions in Table O 1.
- For structures where the National Building Regulations 103 When it is necessary to ensure tightness of compart-
give requirements to fire resistance as a function of fiie ments against leakage due to externaYinterna1pressure differ-
loading, the fiie loading is calculated, and the required fiie ence, the concrete section is to be designed with a permanent
resistance is determined in accordance with the Building boundary compression zone, see 0500.
Code 104 Concrete structures are to have at least, a minimum
- Necessary fiie resistance can be determined based on cal- amount of reinforcement to provide adequate ability for crack
culated fire loading and fiie duration or a temperature-time distribution and resistance against minor load effects not ac-
curve for those cases which are not covered by the Nation- counted for in design.
al Building Code.
105 The material coefficients (yrn) for concrete and rein-
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
302 Structures can be demonstrated to have adequate fire re- forcement are given in B607.
sistance according to one of the following methods: 106 In the analysis and structural design it shall be ensured
- calculation in accordance with N303 that displacements and cracks, spalling of concrete and other
- use of other Internationally accepted methods local failures are not of such a nature that they make the struc-
- testing in accordance with an International standard ac- ture unfit for its purpose in the serviceability limit state, nor al-
cepted. ter the assumptions made when designing in the other limit
states.
The adequacy of the fire resistance shall be documented.
O 200 Durability
303 The temperature distribution in the structure is deter-
mined based on the actual temperature/time curve and the re- 201 For concrete structures of permanent character, depend-
quired fire resistance, taking the effects of insulation and other ent on the environmental conditions to which the structure is
relevant factors into consideration. exposed, a material composition shall be selected in accord-
ance with Sec.4.
The strength properties of the materials as a function of the
temperature are as given in Sec.6 C104 for concrete and Sec.6 202 The environment shall be classified in the following En-
C3 11 for reinforcement. Special strength properties shall be vironmental classes:
applied for concrete exposed to temperatures down to cryogen- SA: Specially aggressive environment: Structures exposed
ic temperature. to strong chemical attack which will require additional
The strain properties of the concrete are as given in Sec.5 protective measures. This may require specially mixed
D209. The strain properties of the reinforcement are as given concrete, membranes or similar.
in Sec.5 D210. MA: Severely aggressive environment: Structures in saline
A stress-strain diagram similar to that applicable for the ulti- water, in the splash zone or exposed to sea spray, struc-
mate limit state, with the stress ordinate reduced, can be as- tures exposed to aggressive gases, salt or other chemi-
sumed for the concrete when calculating the capacity. cal substances, and structures exposed to repeated
freezing and thawing in a wet condition.
Displacements and forces caused by the temperature changes NA: Moderately aggressive environment: outdoor struc-
in the structure shall be taken into account in the design. tures or indoor structures in humid environment and
304 The structure shall be so detailed that it maintains the re- structures in fresh water.
quired load bearing ability for the required period. An appro- LA: Mildly aggressive environment: Indoor structures in
priate geometrical form which reduces the risk of spalling of dry climate without aggressiveness.
the concrete cover shall be sought. The reinforcement shall be
so detailed that in the event of spalling of concrete cover at laps For structures of class SA, the requirements for material mix-
and anchorages, the reinforcement still has adequate capacity. tures shall be considered in relation to the chosen protective
measures. If the concrete may become exposed to the aggres-
305 The temperature insulation ability and gas tightness of sive environment, at least the requirements for class MA shall
partitioning structures shall be demonstrated in the accidental be fulfilled.
limit state of fire.
203 In order to protect the reinforcement against corrosion
and to ensure the structural performance, the reinforcement
shall have a minimum concrete cover as given in Q200 and the
O. Serviceability Limit State nominal crackwidths calculated in accordance with 0700 shall
be limited as given in table 0 1 .
O 100 General
Table 01: Limiting values of nominal characteristic crack
101 When calculating action effects in the serviceability lim- width wk
it state, the mode of behaviour of the structure in this limit state
shall govern the choice of analytical model.
Class
The design resistance in SLS is normally related to criteria for:
- durability
- limitation of cracking
- tightness
- limitation of deflections and vibrations. NA 0.20 mm 0.40 mm
LA 0.40 mm
102 The properties of the materials under short - and long-
term actions and the effect of shrinkage, temperature and im- 204 Cold-worked prestressed reinforcement having a stress

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.6 - Page59
exceeding 400 MPa, and reinforcement with diameter less than duce the average strain of the reinforcement and thus increase
5 mm, shall be considered as reinforcement sensitive to corro- the stiffness.
sion. Other types of reinforcement can be considered as slight- 303 Action effects when calculating displacements shall be
ly sensitive to corrosion. determined by use of actions and load factors in accordance
205 For structures permanently submerged in saline water, with Sec.5 C100. Effect of prestressing forces shall be taken
the crack width requirements given for class NA in Table O1 into account in accordance with Sec.5 D600.
apply. Exceptions are structures with water on one side and air When calculating long-term displacements, the variation of the
on the opposite side, for which the requirements for class MA variable actions with time may be taken into account.
apply on the air side.
206 The crackwidth limitations given in Table O1 are related O 400 Vibrations
to the crack width at a distance from the reinforcement corre- 401 If a structure and the actions are such that significant vi-
sponding to the minimum concrete cover in accordance with brations may take place, it shall be demonstrated that these are
Table Q 1. acceptable for the use of the structure.
When the concrete cover is larger, the nominal crackwidth
when comparing with the values in Table O1 may be taken as O 500 Tightness against leakages of fluids
wk = wCk- ~ 1 1 > ~ 0.7.
2 wCk 501 In structures where requirements to tightness against flu-
id leakages are specified, concrete with low permeability and
where suitable material composition shall be selected, see Sec.4;
wck = crackwidth calculated in accordance with 0700. - the acting tensile stresses and nominal crack widths shall
c1, = minimum concrete cover, see Table Q l be limited
c2 = actual nominal concrete cover - geometrical form and dimensions shall be chosen which
permit a proper placing of the concrete.
207 If reinforcement sensitive to corrosion is placed on the
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
inside of slightly corrosion sensitive reinforcement and with 502 Members subjected to an externallinternal hydrostatic
larger concrete cover than the minimum requirement, the nom- pressure difference shall be designed with a permanent com-
inal crackwidth when comparing with the requirements for pression zone not less than the larger of:
corrosion sensitive reinforcement in Table O 1 may be taken as:
- 0.25.h
Wk = Wck .Es2 1 Es1 - values as given in Table 0 2
where
E,, = tensile strain in reinforcement slightly sensitive to cor-
rosion on the side with highest strain
E,, = tensile strain at the level of the reinforcement sensitive Pressure Difference Depth of Compression Zone
to corrosion (@a) (m.1)
< 150 1O0
208 For cross sections with reinforcement sensitive to corro- > 150 200
sion the crack limitation requirements do also apply for cracks
parallel to this reinforcement. The above applies for the operating design condition using
209 When calculating crackwidths for comparison with the ULS combination b) (ref.: Sec.5 C105) except that a load co-
values in table 01, long-term actions shall be applied in com- efficient of 0.5 is used instead of l .3 for the environmental load
bination with short-term actions. The short-term actions shall (E).
be chosen so that the crackwidth criterion will not be exceeded 503 Oil containment structures with an ambient internal oil
more than 100 times during the design life of the structure. pressure greater than or equal to the ambient external water
210 All load coefficient in this calculation shall be taken as pressure (including pressure fluctuations due to waves) shall
1.o. be designed with a minimum membrane compressive stress
equal to 0.5 MPa for the operation design condition using ULS
211 If more accurate values are not known for short-term but combination b) (ref.: Sec.5 C 105) except that a load coefficient
frequently repeated actions such as wind, traffic and wave ac- of 0.5 is used instead of 1.3 for the environmental load (E).
tions, 60% of the characteristic value of the action may be ap- However, this does not apply if other constructional arrange-
plied. For other variable actions that rarely reach their ments, e.g. special barriers, are used to prevent oil leakage.
characteristic value, 100% of the long-term part of the actions
in combination with 40% of the short-term part of the actions 504 In structures where requirements to tightness against
may be applied. leakages are specified, the reinforcement shall meet the re-
quirements for minimum reinforcement for structures with
212 For short periods in the construction phase, the crack- special requirements to limitation of crackwidths, see R105-
width limitation given in table O1 may be exceeded by up to R106 and R503 through R506.
1OO%, but not more than 0.60 mm in the classes where limiting
values are specified, when the anticipated actions are applied. O 600 Tightness against leakage of gas
213 The strain in the reinforcement shall not exceed the yield 601 Concrete is not gas tight and special measures shall be
strain during short period loading in the construction phase or taken to ensure a gas tight concrete structures, when this is re-
any permanent SLS load condition. quired.
O 300 Displacements O 700 Crackwidth calculation
301 It shall be demonstrated by calculations that the dis- 701 Concrete may be considered as uncracked if the princi-
placements are not harmful if the use of the structure or con- pal tensile stress o,does not exceed f,/kl.
nected structural members imposes limits to the magnitude of
the displacements. With combined axial tensile force and bending moment the
following condition applies:
302 Normally, the tensile strength of the concrete shall be ig-
nored when calculating displacements. However, it may be (kW% + OM) < kw f,&l
taken into account that the concrete between the cracks will re- With combined axial compression force and bending moment

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page60 - S e c 6
the following condition applies: crackwidth is influenced by these parameters.

(ON + o,)< kw ft&l If a high predicted cracking load (cracking moment) is non
where conservative, then ftk shall be used in the calculations and k,
shall be taken as 1.0.
o, = stress due to axial force (tension positive) 702 The characteristic crackwidth of a reinforced concrete
o, = edge stress due to bending alone (tension positive) member exposed to tensile forces and shrinkage of concrete,
fm = normalized structural tensile strength of concrete can in general be calculated from:
(Table C i )
k, = Constant used in calculations of crackwidth wk = lsk ’ - €cm - €CS)
(Table 03) where
kw = Coefficient dependent on cross-sectional height h
= 1.5 -h/h,2 1.0, where h, = 1.0 m 1,k = the influence length of the crack, some slippage in the
bond between reinforcement and concrete may occur.
I Table 0 3 Values of Constant Parameter ki I E,, = the mean principal tensile strain in the reinforcement in
Environmental Corrosion sensitive None Corrosion Sensitive the crack’s influence length at the outer layer of the re-
Class Reinforcement Reinforcement inforcement
LA 1.o 1.o E,, = mean stress dependent tensile strain in the concrete at
the same layer and over the same length as E,,.
NA 1.5 1.o
E,, = the free shrinkage strain of the concrete (negative val-
I MA I 2.0 I 1.5 I ue)
In cases where the corrosion sensitive reinforcement is placed The crackwidths may be calculated using the methods outlined
only in the compression zone, then the values of k, for “None in Appendix F.
Corrosion Sensitive Reinforcement” can be used.
703 If no documentation of the characteristic crack widths is
For structures permanently submerged in saltwater, the values performed in accordance with 0702, then the requirements for
of k, for Environmental Class MA shall be used. limitation of crackwidths may be considered as satisfied if the
Stresses caused by temperatures, creep, shrinkage, deforma- actual stresses in the reinforcement do not exceed the values in
tions etc. shall be included in the evaluation provided the Table 0 4 .
I Table 0 4 : Stress limitations for simplified documentation of satisfactory state of cracking
Stress in reinforcement (MPa)
Nominal charac- Type of Spacing between the bars or bundles of bars(mm)
teristic crackwidth load effect
100 150 200 250 300
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Bending 320 250 230 200 190

Wk = 0.4 mm
Tension 300 230 210 200 190
Bending 170 160 140 120 1O0
Wk = 0.2 mm
Tension 160 150 130 110 1O0
The listed stresses apply to cracks perpendicular to the direc- the load in question is applied. Creep and shrinkage of the con-
tion of the reinforcement, and only when the amount of tensile crete may be taken into account when calculating the stresses.
reinforcement is no less than 0.005 A,.
O 900 Freezekhaw cycles
If the cross-sectional height exceeds 500 mm, then the rein-
forcement stresses for tension in Table 0 4 shall be used for 901 The general requirement to freeze/thaw resistance of
simplified documentation. concrete is given in Sec.4 D306. Where appropriate the freeze/
thaw resistance of the concrete is to be evaluated. This evalua-
704 In the calculations of stresses in reinforcement or crack- tion is to take account of the humidity of the concrete and the
width in structures exposed to water pressure of magnitude number of freeze/thaw cycles the concrete is likely to be sub-
sufficient to influence the calculated stress level or crackwidth, jected to during its lifetime. Special attention is to be given to
then the impact of the water pressure in the crack shall be in- freeze/thaw of the concrete in the splash zone.
cluded in the calculation.
Special frost resistant concrete may be required based on this
O 800 Limitation of stresses in prestressed structures evaluation.
801 Stresses in prestressed reinforcement O 1000 Temperature effects
The stresses in the prestressed reinforcement shall for no com- 1001 Thermal stresses due to temperature effects shall be
bination of actions exceed 0.8 fy, alternatively taken into account when relevant. Relevant material properties
O. 8.fo2. shall be used. Reference is made to Sec.5 D300.
During prestressing, however, stresses up to 0.85.fy alterna-
tively 0.85.fO2,may be permitted provided it is documented
that this does not harm the steel, and if the prestressing force is
measured directly by accurate equipment. P. Design by Testing
802 Stresses in concrete P 100 General
When a prestressing force acts within a concrete compression 101 Concrete structures can be designed either by testing or
zone, the stress at the outer compressive fibre of the concrete by a combination of calculation and testing. This applies to all
shall not exceed the lesser of 0.6.fCkjor O.5.fckin the servicea- limit states defined in B20 1.
bility limit state. 102 Testing can be applied to a complete structural member
The outer compressive fibre stress shall be calculated assum- (e.g. a beam), a part of a structure (e.g. a beam support) or to a
ing a linear distribution of stresses over the cross section. fckj detail of a structure (e.g. a fixing device to a beam). The test
shall be taken as the strength of the concrete at the time when can cover all properties of the structure, or only certain proper-

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.6 - Page61
ties, which are relevant in the particular case. P 400 Test procedure
Normally, the test shall be carried out on specimens of the 401 A test procedure shall be made. See also P600.
same size as the object for which the properties shall be tested. 402 Preparation and storing of the test specimen shall follow
If the test specimen is not of the true size, the model and the methods which are representative for the production of the
scale factors shall be evaluated separately. components.
103 The rules of the standard with regard to dimensions, in- 403 A test record shall be prepared, showing observations
cluding the rules for detailing of reinforcement in Q and for made during testing with indication of time and the corre-
structural details in R shall also apply to structures and parts of sponding action levels.
structures dimensioned by testing. Deviations from these rules
can be undertaken, provided it is demonstrated by the test that 404 All test records shall be signed by the person responsible
such deviations are justified. for the testing.
P 200 The test specimen P 500 Processing of the test results
201 When determining the dimensions of the test specimen, 501 In general, the test shall comprise not less than three
tolerances which exceed those given C400 worst case condi- specimens. Characteristic value (Rk), mean value (Rm), and
tion shall be taken into account. More stringent tolerances may standard deviation (s) shall be determined.The characteristic
be considered. value can be calculated according to the formula
202 The test specimen may be produced with nominal di- Rk = Rm- W S
mensions if the specified tolerances are less than the require- where
ments to C400. If the accepted deviations have been accounted
for in a conservative way, the reduced material factors in Table w has the following values:
B 1 may be used. The tolerances may be considered incorporat-
ed, if the test specimen is produced in the same form as the Number of 4-5 6-10 11-20 >20
component to be dimensioned by testing. specimens
203 The effect of unintended eccentricity, inclination and
W I 2.5 I 2.0 I 1.7 I 1.5 I 1.4 I
curvature shall be taken into account as given in A30 1, D 103, 502 If the standard deviation is particularly high or some of
E106 - E108. the test results highly deviate from the others, the causes of this
204 When determining the material strength in the test spec- should be analysed.
imen, characteristic strengths equal to those prescribed for pro- 503 The design value of the capacity is obtained by dividing
duction of the component should be aimed at. the characteristic capacity with a material coefficient, which is
205 If the concrete strength is governing for the test result, dependent of the mode of failure for the capacity of the com-
the concrete used in the test specimen shall have a strength ap- ponent. The material coefficients given in B607 shall be used.
proximately equal to, but not higher than, the specified charac- The appropriate value of material coefficient shall be used de-
teristic concrete strength for the component in question. pendent on how tolerances are accounted for in the design and
in the test specimen.
206 If there are changes regarding concrete mix, constituents
or concrete supplier during the production process of the com- 504 The design value of the capacity shall be determined
ponent, the compressive strength and the tensile strength shall with the material coefficient for concrete for all modes of fail-
be tested when the specimens are tested and when alterations ure where the concrete is governing for the capacity. The de-
are made. sign value of the capacity can be determined with the material
207 The test results for the material strength taken during
coefficient for reinforcement, if the mode of failure is gov-
production of the components shall not be less than those taken erned by the reinforcement, provided it is proved that a failure
caused by failure of the concrete would not give a lower design
from the test specimen, unless it can be proved that smaller val- value of the capacity.
ues are justifiable.
505 For failure modes where the concrete and the reinforce-
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
208 If the reinforcement is considered to be governing for ment jointly contribute to the capacity, the material coefficient
the test result, the same type of reinforcement shall be used as for concrete shall be used unless a more detailed examination
is intended for the structure to be dimensioned. The yield is performed.
strength - or 0.2 limit - shall be determined. If the tested
strength deviates from the prescribed strength of the reinforce- 506 If reinforced components have failures in an area where
ment, this shall be taken into account when determining the ca- the reinforcement is insufficiently anchored, as may be the
pacity of the test specimen, on the basis of the tested yield case with shear and bond failures in hollow core slab elements
strength and the nominal characteristic yield strength of the re- on short supports, the design value of the capacity for these
inforcement used. failure modes shall be calculated with the material coefficient
209 In order to determine the failure load for certain failure for unreinforced concrete, increased by 50%.
modes it may be necessary to prevent failures caused by other 507 For unreinforced components a material coefficient of
failure modes with possible lower failure load. In such cases it twice the value given in Table B1 shall be used, if the failure
may be necessary to modiSl geometry, concrete strength or mode is governed by the tensile strength of the concrete. Such
amount and strength of the reinforcement. If such means have an increase of the material coefficient is not required if the vol-
been used it shall be clearly stated in the test report. It shall be ume of steel fibre exceeds l % of the concrete volume.
assessed whether such modifications will influence the capac- Further, all the requirement of C500 shall be fulfilled.
ity for the failure mode which is tested.
508 If the characteristic crackwidth is to be determined, only
P 300 Design actions highly strained areas shall be considered.
301 The design actions shall be determined with the same 509 The component may be treated by areas, where each
load coefficients used when the capacity is determined by cal- area is evaluated separately.
culation, normally in accordance with Sec.4 Table C l . 510 The characteristic value may be set equal to the highest
302 The design actions shall be selected so that it is repre- measured value of crack width or displacement if the test does
sentative for the anticipated actions on the structure, if neces- not give sufficient basis for a statistical calculation of the char-
sary through simulation. acteristic value.

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page62 - S e c 6
P 600 Test report

601 The execution and the results from the test shall be re-
corded in a test report, to be signed by the person in charge of
the test.
602 The test report shall as a minimum comprise the follow-
ing information:
The aim of the test, and the principles used for selection of
testing object (specimen)
The material parameters, such as class of concrete and re-
inforcement, type and properties of the aggregates, type
and properties of additives
The detail geometry of the specimen, including reinforce-
ment layout
The result from the testing of materials, strength values for
the concrete and reinforcement
The preparation of the specimen (or component), identifi-
cation number, dimensions, weight, curing conditions,
storing and handling
Instruments used during the test
Actions
The results of the test, test records
Interpretation of the results, calculation of design values of
capacities.
Q. Rules for Detailing of Reinforcement

Q 100 Positioning
101 Reinforcement shall be placed in such a way that con-
creting will not be obstructed and so that sufficient bond an-
chorage, corrosion protection and fire resistance will be
achieved. Environmental Corrosion sensitive None corrosion sensitive
Class Reinforcement reinforcement
The positions of ribbed bars may be designed in accordance @ef. 0204) @ef. 0204)
with the given minimum spacings without regard to the ribs, SA Special considerations Special considerations
but the actual outer dimensions shall be taken into account
MA 50 mm 40 mm
when calculating clearance for placing of reinforcement and
execution of the concreting. NA 35 mm 25 mm
The positioning of reinforcement shall be designed so that the
given requirements to the concrete cover can be obtained in In tidal zone, the minimum concrete cover shall not be less
compliance with the specified tolerances. than 50 mm.
102 Ribbed bars may be arranged in bundles. Bundles shall The end surfaces of tensioned reinforcement in precast ele-
not consist of more than four bars including overlapping (see ments in very aggressive environment (MA) shall be protected.
Q303). Normally, the bars shall be arranged so that the bundle
has the least possible perimeter. Adequate corrosion protection of the end anchorage system of
post-tensioned bars shall be documented for the actual envi-
103 When using welded mesh fabric in accordance with ap- ronmental class.
proved International Standard, two layers may be placed di-
rectly against each other. Post-tension bars shall be placed in tight pipes injected with
104 Ducts for prestressed reinforcement may be assembled grout, grease etc.
in groups when this does not obstruct the concreting of the 203 For structures exposed to fire, the requirement to mini-
cross section or the direct transfer of forces to the concrete. At mum concrete cover shall additionally be determined from fire
the anchorages, special requirements for placing will apply for resistant requirements.
the various tendon systems.
Q 300 Splicing
105 With respect to concreting, the free distance between re-
inforcement units in one layer where concrete has to pass 301 Reinforcement bars may be spliced by lapping, couplers
through during casting shall be no less than Dloo + 5 mm. or welding. Splices shall be shown on the drawings.
In addition, the distance shall normally be no less than 40 mm Splices shall be staggered and as far as possible also placed in
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
in Environmental classes LA and NA, 45 mm in class MA, and moderately strained areas of the structure. Laps may be as-
no less than the outer diameter of bundles or ducts. sumed as distributed if the distance from centre to centre of the
If reinforcement is placed in more than one layer, the free dis- splices is greater than the development length calculated in ac-
tance between the layers shall be no less than 25 mm in Envi- cordance with K. However, all splices may be located in the
ronmental class LA and NA, 35 mm in class MA. same section in the case of:
The concrete cover between vertical formed surfaces and hor- - laps in columns and walls if the laps are located at a trans-
izontal reinforcement units shall normally be no less than the verse bracing (floor), and the area of the longitudinal rein-

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.6 - Page63
forcement is taken as not more than 2% of the gross area the outer third part of the lapped joint.
of the concrete When the equivalent diameter is larger than 36 mm for normal
- couplers with larger capacity than the characteristic capac-
aggregate concrete and 32 mm for lightweight aggregate con-
ity of the reinforcement crete, then the bars in bundles with up to three bars shall be
- welded splices subjected to compression only
- laps in pillars in the ground, if the area of the longitudinal lapped individually in such a way that there will be no more
than four bars in any section. The lap length shall be calculated
reinforcement is taken as not more than 2% of the gross in accordance with K108.
area of the concrete
- laps, if the lap length calculated in accordance with K107 Laps in tensile members shall be staggered and the laps shall
through K109 is increased by at least 25%, and a uniform- be enclosed by closed stirrups with a total cross-sectional area
ly distributed transverse reinforcement with at least 70% at least equal to twice the area of the spliced bar and with spac-
cross-sectional area of the spliced bar is located outside ing no larger than 1O times the diameter of one spliced bar.
the spliced reinforcement. The transverse reinforcement
shall have a part of the reinforcement, not utilized when Q 400 Bending of bars
calculating fbd, which gives, when calculating bond 401 Bent reinforcement shall be designed with the following
strength, an additional contribution to fbd of at least 25% set ofmandrel diameters (in mm) 16,20,25,32,40,50,63, 80,
of the bond stress utilized in the calculation 89,100, 125, 160,200,250,320,400,500 and 630.
- reinforcement which is not utilized in the calculations.
402 Reinforcement shall not be bent around mandrel diame-
302 At laps of tensile reinforcement, necessary development ters less than 1.5 times the diameter of the test mandrel used
length shall at least be taken equal to the necessary develop- when demonstrating the bending properties of the steel, or at a
ment length calculated in accordance with Sub-section K. lower temperature than the bending properties have been doc-
Plain bars shall in addition have end hooks. umented for. The minimum mandrel diameter is given in Table
Q2 for reinforcement in accordance with EN 10025. For rein-
303 Bars and bundles that are spliced by lapping shall be forcement in accordance with other International Standards
placed against each other. like IS06935, ASTM and ACI, bending criteria shall be in ac-
Areas where transfer of forces between adjacent bars, which cordance with the applicable material standard. Use of mandrel
are not placed against each other are required, can be designed diameters less than permissible diameters given in Table Q3
in accordance with I103 through 1104. requires documentation in accordance with L111.
Lapped reinforcement shall have a transverse reinforcement 403 The temperature in the reinforcement shall be no less
distributed along the lap length, and this shall have a total than - 10°C during bending.
cross-sectional area of at least 70% of the cross-sectional area 404 For normal bent reinforcement (EN 10025), the mandrel
of one lapped bar. diameters given in Table Q3 may be used without documenta-
If the lapped bar has a diameter greater or equal to 16 mm, then tion in accordance with L1 l l . For stirrups and anchorage
transverse reinforcement shall be provided equally spaced over hooks, see Q408.
a) Warm rolled ribbed reinforcement produced with controlled cooling can be bent with temperatures down to 20°C below zero.
b, For reinforcement tvue B500B Mandel tvues in the umer line mav be used for bendinn at temueratures above 0°C. I
I Table 0 3 Permissible mandrel diameter for bending of reinforcement without comDliance to L111
I Tensile strenpth o f" J
I Bar Diameter I
Reinforcement 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 16 20 25 32
Cr,d k f p a
500 100 125 160 160 200 200 250 250 320 400 500 630
250 50 63 80 1O0
405 Bent reinforcement which will be straightened or rebent 1.5 times the diameter of the test mandrel used when demon-
shall not have been bent around a mandrel diameter less than strating the ageing properties of the steel.
Table 4 4 Permissible mandrel diameter for bending of reinforcement complying with EN 10025 which shall be rebent or
straightened
Reinforcement Type Bar Diameter
For reinforcement in accordance with EN 10025 the mandrel Reinforcement which will be straightened or rebent shall not
diameters given in Table Q4 can be used. have a temperature less than -10°C for bar diameters 12 mm
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page64 - S e c 6
and less. For larger dimensions the temperature shall not be be- specified. This should have a cross section that is at least 25%
low 0°C. larger than the required minimum reinforcement for the parts
Reinforcement which will be straightened or rebent shall not that are concreted together.
be used in structural members where the reinforcement will be 506 In structures with prestressed reinforcement without
subjected to fatigue. continuous bond, no less reinforcement of ribbed bars shall be
406 Reinforcement bars of type "Tempcore" or similar shall specified than required as minimum reinforcement.
not be heat treated when bending or straightening. Minimum reinforcement parallel to the direction of prestressed
407 Stirrups and anchorage hooks shall be made of rein- reinforcement may nevertheless be omitted in areas with posi-
forcement of weldable quality. tive span moment provided no cracks develop in the concrete
in the serviceability limit state.
408 Verification in accordance with L1 11 is not required for
stirrups and anchorage hooks, provided the mandrel used has a 507 In slabs the prestressing units shall not have larger spac-
ing than six times the thickness of the slab.
diameter not larger than 1O0 mm, and a transverse bar with di-
ameter neither less than the diameter of the bent bar nor less
than 0.3 times the diameter of the mandrel used is located in
the bend. Regardless of the level of stresses, such reinforce- R. Structural Detailing Rules
ment shall always have a transverse bar in the bend.
The straight part following the bend of anchorage hooks may R 100 Slabdplates
be placed parallel to the surface if the diameter of the rein- 101 A structure or structural member shall be considered as
forcement bar is not larger than 16 mm. If the diameter is larg- a slab if the width of the cross section is larger than or equal to
er, the straight part shall be bent into the cross section, in such 4 times the thickness.
a way that the concrete cover does not spa11 by straightening
the hook when the reinforcement bar is tensioned. The bend 102 In general, the total depth of the cross-sectional, h, shall
shall at least be 135". be no less than
409 Welded reinforcement bars with welded attachments Li I135
can be bent around mandrel diameters in accordance with where Li is the distance between zero moment points
Q401 through Q408 provided the distance between the start of
the bend and the welding point is no less than four times the di- 103 For two-way slab systems, the lesser Li for the two span
ameter of the bar. directions shall apply, and for cantilever slabs;
Li = 2.L.
410 For structures subjected to predominantly static loads,
the bar can be bent at the welding point with a mandrel diam- Where L is the length of the cantilever.
eter as given in Table Q3. 104 Transverse to the main reinforcement and directly on
411 For structures subjected to fatigue loads, the diameter of this, a continuous minimum reinforcement shall be placed. The
bending for welded wire fabric shall be no less than one hun- reinforcement shall have a total cross-sectional area equal to
dred times the diameter of wire if the weld is located on the A, 2 0.25. k, .A, .ftk / f,k
outer periphery of the bend, or five hundred times the diameter
of the wire if the weld is located on the inside. where
412 Prestressed reinforcement shall not be bent or placed k, = 1.5-hIhl 2 1.0
with a sharper curvature than that giving a maximum stress in h = the total depth of the cross section
the steel - caused by curvature in combination with prestress- hl = 1.0m
ing - exceeding 95% of the yield stress or of the 0.2% proof ftk = defined in Q503.
stress. Where a sharper curvature is required, the steel shall be
pre-bent before being placed in the structure. This is only per- At inner supports this reinforcement may be distributed with
mitted if it is demonstrated for the steel type and dimensions in one half in the upper face and one half in the lower face.
question that such pre-bending is not harmful to the perform- 105 In structures where special requirements to limitation of
ance of the steel as prestressed reinforcement. crackwidths apply, the minimum reinforcement should be at
Q 500 Minimum area of reinforcement least twice the value given above.
501 Minimum reinforcement shall be provided so, that the
The spacing between the secondary reinforcement bars in the
reinforcement in addition to securing a minimum capacity also same layer shall not exceed three times the slab thickness nor
contributes to preventing large and harmful cracks. This is exceed 500 mm.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
achieved by transferring the tensile force present when the 106 In the span and over the support, a main reinforcement
concrete cracks to a well distributed reinforcement. no less than the required minimum reinforcement shall be
specified on the tension face. In the span and over the support,
502 In each individual case, the actual structure and state of the spacing of the main reinforcement bars shall not exceed
stresses shall be taken into consideration when determining the twice the slab thickness nor exceed 300 mm. When curtailing
minimum reinforcement. the main reinforcement, the spacing may be increased to four
503 For Structures exposed to pressure from liquid or gas times the thickness or 600 mm.
shall the numerical value of ftk be replaced by (ftk + 0.5 p,) in 107 A portion of the main reinforcement with a cross-sec-
the formulae for calculating the required amount of minimum tional area no less than the requirement for minimum rein-
reinforcement in accordance with R. Where pw = liquid or gas forcement shall be extended at least a length d beyond the
pres sure. calculated point of zero moment, where d is the distance from
504 Through all construction joints a minimum reinforce- the centroid of the tensile reinforcement to the outer concrete
ment no less than the minimum reinforcement required for fibre on the compression side. For reinforcement over the sup-
each of the parts concreted together shall normally be speci- port the distance between support and point of zero moment
fied. shall not be assumed less than the distance calculated accord-
505 In structures in a severely aggressive environment and in ing to the theory of elasticity.
structures where tightness is particularly important a well dis- 108 Of the maximum main reinforcement between supports
tributed reinforcement crossing all concreting joints shall be the following portion shall be extended beyond the theoretical

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.6 - Page65
support A, 2 0.35. k, .b .h. ftk 1 f,k

- 30% at simple support where
- 25% at fixed support or continuity
k, = as given in R105 - R106
109 At simple end support the main reinforcement shall be ftk = defined in Q503.
anchored for a force which at least corresponds to the capacity 303 In beams with flanges, a minimum reinforcement shall
of the required minimum reinforcement.
be specified for the web as for rectangular beams.
110 In two-ways slab systems, these rules apply for both di-
rections of reinforcement. Flanges subjected to tension shall be provided with additional
reinforcement in accordance with the following formula:
111 At end supports a top reinforcement which at least is
equal to the required minimum reinforcement shall normally A, Acf 'ftklfsk
be provided, even if no restraint is assumed in the calculations, where
unless the slab end support is actually fully free. For one-way
slab systems, this top reinforcement may be omitted at end ACf = the effective cross section area of the flange, hf .beff
supports parallel to the main reinforcement. beff = the part of the slab width which according to Sec.6
A400 is assumed as effective when resisting tensile
112 As for inner supports the transverse reinforcement forces
which is calculated in accordance with R105-RlO6 may be dis-
tributed with one half in the upper face and one half in the low- hf = the thickness of the flange (the slab)
er face. ftk = defined in Q503.
113 Normally no stirrups or other types of shear reinforce- In beams where the neutral axis is located near the flange, this
ment are required for slabs. To be taken into account in the quantity may be reduced to
shear capacity the shear reinforcement shall have a cross-sec- AS 2 0.5 . h f . beff. ftk 1 f,k
tional area at least corresponding to (in mm21mm2)
In flanges subjected to compression, the requirement for min-
A,, 2 0.2 'ftk/ fsk imum reinforcement is
where AS 2 0.25. A,f. ftk 1 f,k
ftk = defiied in Q503. 304 In beams, the following fraction of the maximum main
reinforcement in the span shall be extended beyond the theo-
R 200 Flat slabs retical support:
201 Flat slabs are slabs with main reinforcement in two di-
rections and supporting columns connected to the slab. The - 30% at simple support
head of the column may be enlarged to a capital. The slab may - 25% at fixed support or continuity
be made with or without drop panel above the capital.
In both cases at least 2 bars shall be extended.
The slab shall have a minimum thickness of
At least 30% of the maximum required tensile reinforcement
(1 - 0.7 .bk) 130 2 130 mm for slabs without drop panel over supports shall either be extended a distance correspond-
(1 - 0.7.bk) 135 2 130 mm for slabs with drop panel ing to the anchorage length beyond the point where calculated
tension in the reinforcement is equal to zero, or be bent down
1 is the distance between the centre lines of the columns as inclined shear reinforcement.
bk is the width of the capital at the underside of the slab or the 305 T-beams which are parallel to the main reinforcement of
strengthening. bk shall not be entered with a lower value than the slab shall have a transverse top reinforcement above the
the width of the column in the span direction or with a larger beam no less than half of the main reinforcement of the slab in
value than the value corresponding to a 60" inclination of the the middle of the span. This top reinforcement shall be extend-
face of the capital to the horizontal plane. ed at least 0.3 times the span length of the slab to both sides of
202 In each of the two main directions, the slab reinforce- the beam.
ment shall have a total cross-sectional area at least equal to 306 Normally stirrups shall be provided along the entire
A, 2 0.25. k, .A, .ftk 1 f,k length of a beam irrespective of the magnitude of the acting
k, is in accordance with R105 - R106 shear forces. This stirrup reinforcement shall have a cross-sec-
tional area corresponding to
ftk = defiied in Q503. A, 2 0.2 . A, . ftk . sin a / f &
203 At the middle of the span, the spacing of bars shall not where
exceed 300 mm.
204 Above columns in flat slabs with prestressed reinforce- A, = the concrete area of a longitudinal section of the beam
ment without continuous bond, a non-prestressed reinforce- web
ment in the upper face shall be provided with an area no less a = the angle between stirrups and the longitudinal axis of
than the required area in accordance with this clause, regard- the beam. The angle shall not be taken less than 45"
less of the state of stresses. ftk = defined in Q503.
R300 Beams The tensile strength ftk shall not have a lower value than 2.55
MPa. The distance between the stirrups shall neither exceed
301 The cross-sectional depth h shall normally be no less 0.6 h' nor 500 mm whatever is the smaller. The stirrups shall
than enclose all tensile reinforcement bars, if necessary by means of
Li 135 spliced stirrups. In beams with flanged cross section transverse
reinforcement outside the longitudinal reinforcement may be
Li is the distance between points of contraflexure. For cantilev- assumed to enclose the longitudinal reinforcement. A longitu-
er beams, Li = 2. L. and L is the length of the cantilever. dinal reinforcement bar shall be placed in all the corners of the
302 Rectangular beams should normally have a reinforce- stirrups and in any anchorage hooks. The diameter of this lon-
ment at both the tension and compression face, at least equal to gitudinal bar shall be no less than the diameter of the stirrup.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSK E VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page66 - S e c 6
If the depth of the beam exceeds 1 200 mm, an additional lon- porting transverse reinforcement, stirrup or hook than 15 times
gitudinal surface reinforcement on the faces of the beam web the diameter of the supporting bar.
shall be provided. This reinforcement shall be no less than the 408 If concrete of grade C65 or higher is used, the spacing of
required minimum stirrup reinforcement. the links shall be reduced to 10 times the diameter of the lon-
In prestressed concrete, the distance between the stirrups may gitudinal reinforcement, and the stirrups shall be ribbed bars
be up to 0.8 h' if the capacity is sufficient without shear rein- with diameter at least equal to 1O mm.
forcement, but no larger than 500 mm. In those parts of pre-
stressed beams which have compression in the entire cross 409 In spiral reinforced columns the spiral shall be bent me-
section in the ultimate limit state, minimum stirrup area may be chanically and shall have circular form in sections perpendic-
reduced to 70% of the above requirements. ular to the direction of the force. The ascent per winding shall
not exceed 1:7 of the core diameter. The clear distance be-
In wide beams, the distance between stirrups or legs of stirrups tween spiral windings shall not exceed 60 mm nor be less than
measured perpendicularly to the longitudinal axis shall not ex- 35 mm. The spiral reinforcement shall extend through the en-
ceed the depth of the beam. tire length of the column and is only permitted to be omitted
307 Requirements to minimum stirrup reinforcement may be where the column is embedded in a reinforced concrete slab on
waived for ribbed slabs with ribs in one or two directions, mon- all sides. Splicing of spiral reinforcement between floors of
olithically connected to a top slab. The following requirements concrete shall be performed as welded splices. When terminat-
shall be satisfied: ing a spiral, the spiral bar shall be bent into the core and shall
there be given an anchorage length at least equal to 25 times
- the width of the ribs shall be at least 60 mm and the depth the diameter of the bar. Plain bars shall in addition be terminat-
shall not exceed 3 times the minimum width ed by a hook. The base for a spiral reinforced column shall be
- clear distance between ribs shall not exceed 500 mm made strong enough to resist the increased stress in the core
- the thickness of the top slab shall be at least 50 mm and section. If the force transfer is not secured in another way, a
shall have reinforcement at least equal to the required min- sufficiently large transition spiral of height at least equal to the
imum reinforcement for slabs. core diameter of the columns shall be placed in the column
base.
For ribbed slabs that do not satisfj these requirements the rules
for beams shall apply. R 500 Walls
308 Compression reinforcement bars shall be braced by stir- 501 Reinforced walls shall have horizontal reinforcement
rups with spacing not exceeding 15 times the diameter of the with cross-sectional area corresponding to
compression reinforcement bar. A, 2 0.6 .A, 'ftk /fsk
R400 Columns for horizontal reinforcement in external walls
401 The dimensions of columns shall be no less than: A, 2 0.3 .A, 'ftk /fsk
- 40 O00 mm2 as gross cross-sectional area for internal walls, horizontal and vertical reinforcement
- 150 mm as minimum sectional dimension for reinforced A, 2 0.6 .A, 'ftk /fsk
columns
- 200 mm as minimum sectional dimension for un-rein- for reinforcement in shell type structures in both directions.
forced columns where ftk = defined in Q503.
402 Reinforced columns shall not have less total cross-sec- 502 In structures where strong limitations of the crack
tional area of longitudinal reinforcement than the larger of: widths is required, the horizontal reinforcement should be at
least twice the values given above. The horizontal reinforce-
0.01. A, and 0.2 . A, . fen/ f,k ment may be reduced if the wall is free to change its length in
403 The minimum reinforcement shall be symmetrical. The the horizontal direction and if it can be demonstrated by calcu-
diameter of longitudinal reinforcement shall be no less than 10 lations that the chosen reinforcement can resist the forces
mm. If the column has a larger cross section than structurally caused by loads, shrinkage and temperature changes with ac-
required the minimum reinforcement may be determined by ceptable crack widths. The spacing between horizontal bars in
the structurally required cross section. same layer shall not exceed 300 mm. --`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
404 If the longitudinal reinforcement in the column is not ex- 503 The spacing between vertical bars in the same layer shall
tended into the structure below, splicing bars shall be extended not exceed 300 mm. At openings in walls, in addition to the
up into the column with a total area at least equal to the re- minimum reinforcement given above at least 2 ribbed bars of
quired reinforcement for the column. 12 mm diameter shall be provided parallel to the edges or di-
405 If bars at the top of a column are bent towards the centre agonally at the corners, and the anchorage lengths to both sides
to allow extension into a column with a smaller section located shall be at least 40 times the diameter of the bar.
above, the longitudinal inclination shall not exceed 1:6, and the 504 In walls which primary is exposed to bending caused by
point of bend shall be located minimum 1O0 mm above the col- local pressure load, the requirements regarding minimum rein-
umn top. forcement in plates in accordance with R100 shall apply.
406 If a larger area of longitudinal reinforcement than 2% of R 600 Reinforced foundations
the cross-sectional area of the column is utilized, lapped splic-
ing at transverse bracings shall be limited to a fraction corre- 601 Foundations shall have thickness no less than 10 times
sponding to 2% of the area of the column. Spliced and the diameter of the reinforcement bar or 200 mm, whichever is
continuous bars shall be symmetrically distributed over the the smaller.
cross section of the column. 602 Tensile reinforcement at the bottom of a column founda-
407 The position of the longitudinal reinforcement shall be tion may be uniformly distributed over the full width if the
secured by stirrups enclosing the reinforcement at a spacing width does not exceed 5 times the diameter of the column
not exceeding 15 times the diameter of the longitudinal rein- measured in the same direction. If the width of the foundation
forcement. In addition the longitudinal reinforcement shall be is larger, 213 of the tension reinforcement shall be located with-
secured at any points of the bend. Required compressive rein- in the middle half of the foundation unless a more correct dis-
forcement shall not be located fwther away from corner of sup- tribution is verified.

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.6 - Page67
603 Foundations shall be considered as beams or slabs with zones extend above and below the splashhtermediate zones
respect to minimum reinforcement, reference is made to 100 - respectively. The buried zone includes parts of the structure
300. buried in seabed sediments or covered by disposed solids ex-
ternally or internally.
R 700 Prestressed structures
203 The corrosivity of the corrosion zones varies as a func-
701 The structures shall be designed, formed and construct- tion of geographical location; temperature being the primary
ed so that the deformations required according to the calcula- environmental parameter in all zones. In the atmospheric
tions are possible when applying the prestressing forces. The zones, the frequency and duration of wetting ("time-of-wet-
influence of creep shall be considered when necessary. ness") is a major factor affecting corrosion. In the external at-
702 At the anchorages, the concrete dimensions shall be suf- mospheric zone, the corrosive conditions are typically most
ficient to ensure that a satisfactory introduction and transfer of severe in areas sheltered from direct rainfall and sunlight but
the anchorage forces is obtained. The documentation shall be freely exposed to sea-spray and condensation that facilitates
based on calculations or tests for the anchorage in question. accumulation of sea salts and moisture with a resulting high
time-of-wetness. A combination of high ambient temperature
703 Directly inside anchorages for prestressed reinforce- and "time-of-wetness'' creates the most corrosive conditions.
ment, extra reinforcement in the shape of a welded wire fabric
perpendicular to the direction of the force or a circular rein- 204 In the atmospheric zones and the splashhntermediate
forcement should be provided. If the stress in the contact sur- zones, corrosion is primarily governed by atmospheric oxygen.
face between anchorage member and concrete exceeds f& this In the external submerged zone and the lower part of the splash
shall be applied. The quantity of this extra reinforcement shall zone, corrosion is mostly affected by a relatively thick layer of
be documented by tests or calculations for the type of anchor- marine growth. Depending on the type of growth and the local
age in question. conditions, the net effect might be either to enhance or retard
corrosion attack. In the buried and internal submerged zones
(i.e. seawater flooded compartments), oxygen in the seawater
is mostly depleted by bacterial activity. Similarly, steel surfac-
S. Corrosion Control es in these zones, and in the external submerged zone, are
mostly affected by biological growth that retards or fully pre-
S 100 General vents access of oxygen by diffusive mass transfer. Although
this could retard corrosion, corrosive metabolises from bacte-
101 Requirements to corrosion protection arrangement and ria can offer an alternative corrosion mechanism.
equipments are generally given in DNV-OS-C101 Sec. 10.
Special evaluations relevant for offshore concrete structures 205 Corrosion governed by biologic activity (mostly bacte-
are given herein. ria) is referred to as MIC (microbiologically influenced corro-
sion). For most external surfaces exposed in the submerged
102 Fixed and floating concrete structures associated with and buried zones, as well as internal surfaces of piping for sea-
production of oil and gas comprises permanent structural com- water and ballast water, corrosion is primarily related to MIC.
ponents in Carbon-steel that require corrosion protection, both
topside and in shafts. In addition, shafts and caissons may con-
S 300 Forms of corrosion and associated corrosion rates
tain mechanical systems such as piping for topside supply of 301 Corrosion damage to uncoated C-steel in the atmospher-
seawater and for ballast, crude oil storage and export. These ic zone and in the splashhntermediate zones associated with
piping systems are exposed to corrosive environments both in- oxygen attack is typically more or less uniform. In the splash
ternally and externally. Riser and J-tubes may be routed withinzone and the most corrosive conditions for the external atmos-
or outside shafts. Drill shafts contain conductors and support pheric zone (i.e. high time of wetness and high ambient tem-
structures with large surface areas that are also to be protected
perature), corrosion rates can amount to 0.3 mm per year, and
from corrosion. Internal corrosion control of risers, tubing and
for internally heated surfaces in the splash zone even much
piping systems containing fluids other than seawater is, how- higher (up to of the order of 3 mm per year. In more typical
ever, not covered by this Standard. conditions for the external atmospheric zone and for internal
103 Concrete rebars and prestressing tendons are adequately atmospheric zones, the steady-state corrosion rate for C-steel
(i.e. as uniform attack) is normally around 0.1 mm per year or
protected by the concrete itself, (i.e. provided adequate cover-
age and type/quality of the aggregate). However, rebar por- lower. In the submerged and buried zones, corrosion is mostly
tions freely exposed to seawater in case of concrete defects, governed by MIC causing colonies of corrosion pits. Welds are
and embedment plates, penetration sleeves and various sup- often preferentially attacked. Corrosion as uniform attack is
ports which are freely exposed to seawater or the marine at- unlikely to significantly exceed about O. 1 mm per year but the
mosphere will normally require corrosion protection. rate of pitting may be much higher; 1 mm per year and even
more under conditions favouring high bacterial activity (e.g.
S 200 Corrosion zones and environmental parameters ambient temperature of 20°C to 40°C and access to organic
201 A fixed concrete structure will encounter different types material, including crude oil).
of marine corrosion environments. These may be divided into 302 In most cases, the static load carrying capacity of large
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
corrosion zones as given in Table S 1. structural components is not jeopardized by MIC due to its lo-
calized form. The same applies to the pressure containing ca-
I Table S1 Corrosion zones pacity of piping systems. However, MIC can readily cause
I External zones I Internal zones I leakage in piping by penetrating pits, or initiate fatigue crack-
External atmospheric zone Internal atmospheric zones ing of components subject to cyclic loading.
Splash zone Intermediate zones 303 Galvanic interaction @.e.metallic plus electrolytic cou-
External submerged zone Internal submerged zones pling) of Carbon-steel to e.g. stainless steel or copper base al-
Buried zone loys may enhance the corrosion rates given in F301. On
external surfaces in the submerged and buried zones, galvanic
corrosion is efficiently prevented by cathodic protection. In the
atmospheric and intermediate zones, and internally in piping
systems, galvanic corrosion shall be prevented by avoiding
metallic or electrolytic contact of non-compatible materials.
304 Very high strength steels (fsk > 1 200 MPa) and certain

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page68 - S e c 6
high strength aluminium, nickel and copper alloys are sensitive S 400 Cathodic protection
to stress corrosion cracking in marine atmospheres. If suscep- 401 For details of design of cathodic protection Systems, see
tible materials shall be used, cracking should be prevented by D N v - 0 s - c 101 sec. 10 c . “Cathodic protection”.
use of suitable coatings.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Sec.7 - Page69
SECTION 7
CONSTRUCTION
A. General documented.
103 Relevant documentation from the fabrication and con-
A 100 Application struction required for safe operation of the structure is to be
101 This Chapter apply to the fabrication and construction of readily available on the Installation.
reinforced and prestressed concrete structures and structural Such documentation is to give sufficient information to evalu-
parts or assemblies in concrete. ate damages and subsequent possible repairs and modifica-
102 Fabrication and construction of assemblies not ade- tions.
quately covered by this Standard shall be specially considered.
A 200 Codes and standards
D. Quality Control - Inspection, Testing and
201 Codes and Standards other than those stated within this
Standard may be accepted as an alternative, or as a supplement, Corrective Actions
to these Standards. The basis for such acceptance is stated in
Sec. 1. D 100 General
101 Supervision and inspection shall ensure that the works
A300 Scope are completed in accordance with this Standard and the provi-
301 The requirements of this Section apply to material test- sions of the project specification.
ing, formwork, reinforcement, concrete production, concrete 102 Quality assurance and quality control. A quality man-
coating, prestressing systems and repairs during construction agement system based on the requirements of EN IS0 9001
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
of concrete structures. shall be applied to the following phases:
- organisation
- design and procurement
B. Definitions
- equipment, shop manufacture
B 100 Terms - equipment, storage and transport
- construction, (i.e. earthworks, construction, towing, instal-
101 In the context of these Rules the term "fabrication and lation, backfilling, civil works and structural steelwork,
construction" is intended to cover fabrication and construction storage tanks, pressure vessels, separators, fimaces, boil-
workings from initial fabrication to end of design life of the in- ers, pumps, above ground piping including s~ipports,un-
stallation or component thereof, as applicable. derground piping, instrumentation, electricity, cathodic
102 The term Site used within the context of these Rules is to protection, paint work, thermal insulation, fire proofiig
mean the place of construction of the concrete structure (plac- etc). The content in brackets will vary dependent on the
ing of reinforcement, formwork assembly and pouring of con- actual structure/plant under construction.
crete into the formworks or assembling of precast concrete
units). A specific quality control programme including inspection and
tests shall be set up to monitor the quality throughout the dif-
ferent phases of the design, fabrication and construction.
C. Documentation D 200 Inspection Classes

201 In order to differentiate the requirements for inspection
C 100 General according to the type and use of the structure, this Standard de-
101 As the basis for fabrication and construction activities fiies three inspection classes:
the following documentation, as applicable, is to be approved: IC 1: Simplified inspection
drawings showing structural arrangement and dimensions IC 2: Normal inspection
with specifications and data defining all relevant material
properties IC 3: Extended inspection.
relevant fabrication and construction specifications 202 The inspection class to be used shall be stated in the
details of welded attachments/connections project specification.
drawings and description of the reinforcement and pre- 203 Inspection class may refer to the complete structure, to
stressing system certain inembers of the structure or to certain operations of ex-
requirements to extent, qualification and results of fabrica- ecution.
tion and construction, inspection, testing and examination
procedures 204 In general, inspection class 3, "Extended inspection",
specifications for the corrosion protection systems applies for Offshore Concrete Structures. Inspection class 1
"Simplified inspection' shall not be used for concrete works of
any limitations/tolerances applicable as a result of design structural importance.
assumptions.
D 300 Inspection of materials and products
102 Assumptions made during the design of the structure in-
fluencing the fabrication and construction activities shall be 301 The inspection of the properties of the materials and

Page70 - Sec.7
products to be used in the works shall be as given in Table D 1.
Subject Inspection Class 1 Inspection Class 2 Inspection Class 3

Simplijìed Normal Extended
Materials for formwork Not required In accordance with project specification
Reinforcing steel In accordance with I S 0 6935 and relevant national standards
Prestressing steel Not applicable I In accordance with IS0 6934
Fresh concrete: In accordance with this Standard
readv mixed or site mixed
Other items i) I
In accordance with project specification and this standard
Precast elements I In accordance with this Standard
I Insuection reuort I Not reauired I In accordance with this Standard
I i) Could be items such as embedded steel components,
D 400 Inspection of execution

401 General
Inspection of execution according to this Standard shall be car-
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ried out as given in Table D2 unless otherwise stated in the
project specification.
Table D2 - InsDection of execution

Suhiect Inspection Class 1 Inspection Class 2 Inspection Class 3
Scaffolding, formwork Random checking Major scaffolding and formwork All scaffolding and formwork
and falsework to be inspected before concreting shall be inspected before concret-
ing
Ordinary reinforcement Random checking Major reinforcement shall be in- All reinforcement shall be in-
suected before concreting suected before concreting
Prestressing reinforcement NIA All prestressing components shall be inspected before concreting,
threading, stressing. Materials to be identified by appropriate docu-
mentation
Embedded items
Erection of urecast elements
Site transport and casting of con- Occasional checks Basic and random inspection Detailed inspection of entire
crete urocess
Curinn and finishinn of concrete Occasional checks I Occasional checks I Rendar insuection
Stressing and grouting of pre- NIA Detailed inspection of entire process, including evacuation of stress-
stressinn reinforcement ing records prior to cutting permission
As-built geometry NIA According to project specification
Documentation of inspection NIA Required
402 Inspection of falsework and formwork - Reinforcement is properly tied and secured against dis-
Before casting operations start, inspections according to the placement during concreting
- Space between bars is sufficient to place and compact the
relevant inspection class shall include:
concrete.
- geometry of formwork After concreting, the starter bars at construction joints shall be
- stability of formwork and falsework and their foundations
checked to ensure that they are correctly located.
- tightness of formwork and its parts
- removal of detritus such as saw dust, snow andor ice and 404 Inspection of prestressing works
remains of tie wire and debris from the formwork etc. from Before casting operations start, inspections shall veriSl:
the section to be cast
- treatment of the faces of the construction joints - the position of the tendons, sheaths, vents, drains, anchor-
- wetting of formwork andor base ages and couplers in respect of design drawings. (includ-
- preparation of the surface of the formwork ing the concrete cover and the spacing of tendons)
- openings and blockouts. - the fixture of the tendons and sheath, also against buoyan-
cy, and the stability of their supports
The structure shall be checked after formwork removal to en- - that the sheath, vents, anchorages, couplers and their seal-
sure that temporary inserts have been removed. ing are tight and undamaged
- that the tendons, anchorages andor couplers are not cor-
403 Inspection of reinforcement roded
Before casting operations start, inspections according to the - the cleanliness of the sheath, anchorages and couplers.
relevant inspection class, shall confirm that:
Prior to tensioning or prior to releasing the pretension force,
Reinforcement is not contaminated by oil, grease, paint or oth- the actual concrete strength shall be checked against the
er deleterious substances; strength required.
- The reinforcement shown on the drawings is in place, at The relevant documents and equipment according to the ten-
the specified spacing sioning programme shall be available on site.
- The cover is in accordance with the specifications The calibration of the jacks shall be checked. Calibration shall

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.7 - Page71
also be performed during the stressing period if relevant. - Measures necessary to make the element acceptable
Before grouting starts, the inspection shall include: - Necessity of rejection and replacement of non-conforming
elements.
- preparatiodqualification tests for grout
- the results of any trial grouting on representative ducts Documentation of the procedure and materials to be used shall
- ducts open for grout through their full length and free of be approved before repair or corrections are made.
harmful materials, e.g. water and ice
- vents prepared and identified
- materials are batched and sufficient to allow for overflow.
E. Construction Planning
During grouting, the inspection shall include:
E 100 General
conformity of the fresh grout tests, e.g. fluidity and segre- 101 Prior to Construction, procedures for execution and con-
gation trol of all construction activities shall be prepared in order to
the characteristics of the equipment and of the grout ensure that the required quality is obtained and documented.
the actual pressures during grouting 102 Procedures detailing the construction sequences, testing
order of blowing and washing operations and inspection activities shall be prepared. Sufficient delivery
precautions to keep ducts clear of materials and storage capacity is to be ensured to accommo-
order of grouting operations date the anticipated demand for any continuous period of cast-
actions in the event of incidents and harmfd climatic con- ing.
ditions
the location and details of any re-injection. 103 The planning for all construction stages is to ensure that
there is adequate time for the concrete to harden sufficiently to
405 Inspection of the concreting operations support the loads imposed.
The inspection and testing of concreting operations shall be 104 Due consideration is to be given to access and time re-
planned, performed and documented in accordance with the in- quired for adequate survey and inspection as the construction
spection class as shown in Table D3. proceeds.
The inspection class for concreting operations shall be IC 3. 105 Constructional operations concerning transportation and
Extended inspection, unless otherwise specified in the project installation operations shall be detailed in special procedures
specification. prepared in accordance with the requirements given in Sec.3.
Different structural parts in a project may be allocated to dif-
ferent inspection classes depending on the complexity and the
importance in the completed structure. F. Materials and Material Testing
Table D3 - Requirements for planning, inspection and
documentation
Subject Inspection Inspection Inspection
I F 100 General
101 Constituent materials, reinforcement and prestressing
Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 systems used in construction, as well as fresh and hardened
concrete and grout are to satisfj the relevant requirements giv-
Planning of N/A Inspection plan, procedures and en in Sec.4.
insuection work instructions urogram Actions
I
in the event of a nbn-conformity. 102 Testing of materials is to be performed prior to and dur-
I N/A IFrequentbut I Continuous ing construction to confiim quality of the materials and to en-
Inspection
I I
random inspection. inspection of
each castinn. I I sure that the specified properties are obtained.
103 Testing of materials is to be performed in accordance
Documentation N/A All planning documents. with the requirements of Sec.4. The testing is to be conducted
Records from all inspections. with calibrated and tested instruments and equipment.
All non-conformities and corrective
action reports. 104 Testing at independent, recognized laboratories may be
required.
406 Inspection of precast concrete elements
105 Records of all performed testing shall be kept for later
When precast concrete elements are used, inspection shall in- inclusion in the Construction Records.
clude:
F 200 Constituent Materials
- visual inspection of the element at arrival at site;
- delivery documentation 201 Storage and handling of constituent materials shall be in
- conditions of the element prior to installation accordance with recognized good practice. The materials shall
- conditions at the place of installation, e.g. supports be protected from detrimental influences from the environ-
- conditions of element, any protruding rebars, connection ment.
details, position of the element, etc., prior to jointing and 202 Cement is to be delivered with mill certificate in accord-
execution of other completion works. ance with Sec.4. Different batches of cement are, as far as prac-
ticable, to be stored in different silos, such that the results of
407 Actions in the event of a non-conformity the on site testing can be referred to specific batches.
Where inspection reveals a non-conformity, appropriate action 203 Testing of cement on site is to be performed on a random
shall be taken to ensure that the structure remains fit for its in- basis during the construction period. The frequency of the
tended purpose. As part of this, the following should be inves- sampling is to be specified based on experience and is to be ap-
tigated: proved by clientherification authority prior to start of con-
struction. The sampling is to be representative for the delivered
- Implications of the non-conformity on the execution and cement. An increased frequency of sampling may be required
the work procedures being applied in the following cases:
- Implications of the non-conformity on the structure, safety
and functional ability a) Change of supplier.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page72 - Sec.7
b) Change of type/grade. site with appropriate certificates confirming compliance with

the specified requirements (see Sec.4). The steel is to be ade-
c) Change of requirements to concrete properties. quately marked for identification upon arrival. The marking is
d) Unsatisfactory test results. to be maintained to establish traceability until actual use in the
e) Unsatisfactory storage conditions. structure.
f) Other information or events that may justify an increased 302 Reinforcement is to be stored in a manner which pre-
sampling. vents harmful corrosion and erasure of marking. Reinforce-
ment of different grades and dimensions shall be stored
204 Testing of cement is at least to be performed to establish separately.
the following properties:
303 Components of the prestressing system shall be deliv-
- fineness ered with appropriate certificates confirming compliance with
- initial and final set the specified requirements. (see Sec.4). The marking is to be
- oxide composition maintained to establish traceability until actual use in the struc-
- mortar strength. ture.
304 Components for prestressing systems, including cables,
Testing is to be performed as specified in Sec.4, and the test re- shall be stored in a dry environment without any danger of
sults are to satisfy the requirements in Sec.4. Cement failing to harmful corrosion. They shall be given additional protection
meet the requirements, is not to be used. with water soluble, protective oil. The oil is to be documented
205 Aggregates shall be tested upon delivery at site. If differ- not to adversely affect the bond to the grout or alternately shall
ent sources of aggregates are used the properties shall be estab- be cleaned prior to use.
lished for each source. The following properties shall be 305 Regular spot checks shall be performed on site to ensure:
established:
- particle size distribution (grading) including silt content - proper traceability, marking and stocking of reinforcement
- content of organic matter and components of prestressing system
- density and specific gravity - that bending of bars is performed within approved diame-
- strength in standard mix of concrete and mortar ters and temperatures.
- petrographical composition and properties that may affect
the durability of the concrete. 306 Procedures for welding of reinforcement steel and weld-
- water content. er’s qualification are documented in accordance with the re-
quirements of Sec.4.
206 Aggregates delivered to the site shall be stored separate- All welds shall be 100% visual examinated. Samples of weld-
ly and such that the aggregates are protected from accumula- ing shall be taken and tested at regular intervals. Comprehen-
tion of water and other harmfd influences of the environment, sive documentation may be required by the clientherification
and have markings identifying their contents. authorities for critical welds.
207 Testing of aggregates is to be performed on a regular ba- 307 Testing of mechanical splices in reinforcement are to
sis during the construction period. The frequency of the sam- comprise:
pling is to be specified based on the quality and consistency of
the supply as well the concrete production volume, and is to be - Prior to construction; 3 tensile tests of the splices
approved prior to start of construction. An increase in the test - During construction; tensile tests of 1% of all splices per-
frequency may be required when tests are not giving satisfac-
tory results, upon “a change of supplier” or if changes in the formed.
uniformity of the supply are observed. 308 Testing of prestressing steel prior to its use is to be per-
208 The water source(s) shall be investigated for the suitabil- formed at regular intervals. The intervals shall be part of the
ity and dependability of the water supply. The water is not to procedure and the result of the testing shall be documented.
contain organic impurities, detrimental salts or other matter
that may have harmful or adverse effects on fresh or hardened 309 Testing of components for the prestressing system and
concrete as well as reinforcement. The supply is to be suffi- testing and calibration of stressing equipment may be required
cient and dependable enough to ensure adequate supply during and shall be documented.
any foreseen extensive production period.
F 400 Production testing
209 The quality of mixing water is to be documented by test-
ing at intervals adjusted in each case to type of water supply 401 Prior to start of construction, the properties of the in-
(public of other) as agreed between the Client and the Society. tended concrete mix shall be verified by testing of samples
from series of trial mixes. The testing and test method is to be
210 Admixtures delivered to a site for mix shall be furnished in accordance with the requirements of Sec.4.
with test reports confirming the specified properties. Handling
and storage of admixtures shall be in accordance with the sup- 402 The following properties shall be documented:
plier’s recommendations.
- mix proportions and the resulting consistence, bleeding
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
211 The effect of the admixtures on concrete shall be tested and air content
at intervals on site in terms of the following properties: - compressive strength
- consistence, e.g. at 5 and 30 minutes after mixing - setting times and strength development
- water requirement for a given consistence - modulus of elasticity in compression
- shrinkagehwelling - permeability of hardened concrete
- strength in compression and tension (bending) at 7,28 and - durability in accordance with the approved specification
91 days. requirements
- effect of admixtures.
F 300 Reinforcement and prestressing system compo-
nents 403 During production, the concrete is to be tested regularly
301 All reinforcement is to be delivered to the construction for strength, air content, consistency, temperature and density,

E VERITAS
Sec.7 - Page73
as given in Table F1. - the concrete has been subjected to chemical attack or fire
- the concrete during curing has been exposed to freezing or
Table F1 Freauencv of Production Testing of Concrete I premature drying out
Parameter Frequency - inadequate compaction, curing or other unfavourable con-
Strength One sample per shift, and normally not less ditions are observed or suspected.
than one sample for every commenced 1O0
m3 or at least one sample per change of 502 The procedures to be followed together with calibration
constituent materials or mix proportion methods and criteria for non-destructive examination shall be
whichever gives the largest number of sam- approved in each case.
ules 503 When test results are compared, a relationship is to be
Air content, Tempera- Three times per shift, or whenever a
ture and consistencv
Density
strength samule is taken
Once per shift I
I established between the results from standard specimens tested
in accordance with the approved specification and the results
of the additional testing of the concrete in the structure.
Each sample for strength testing, taken from one batch at the F 600 Non-cementitious materials
form after transportation, is to comprise of at least 4 test spec- 601 Non-cementitious materials are materials such as epox-
imen unambiguously marked for identification. The collection, ies and polyurethanes which are specially made for use in com-
curing and testing is to be performed in accordance with an ap- bination with structural concrete either to improve the concrete
proved specification. properties or to supplement, repair or replace the concrete.
404 Until the uniformity of a concrete has been demonstrat- 602 Non-cementitious materials shall be delivered with test
ed, higher rates of testing may be required. During continuous reports specifying the composition and properties of the mate-
production, rates of testing may be reduced as agreed with par- rial. The material is to be handled and stored in accordance
ties involved. with the supplier's recommendations.
405 Records shall be kept of all testing and are to identify 603 Non-cementitious materials are not to be used unless a
mix designs against test results in addition to stating date and careful evaluation and testing has been performed prior to their
time of sampling. use and procedures for the use/application have been ap-
406 The properties of a grout shall be tested at regular inter- proved.
vals during the production of grout. The frequency of produc-
tion testing of grout is as a minimum to be as given in Table F2.
Table F2 Freauencv of Production Testing of Grout G Formwork
Parameter I Freauencv I G 100 Design, materials and erection
Strength Once per shift, not less than one sample for every
commenced 100 m3 or at least once per change of 101 Falsework and formwork, including their supports and
constituentmaterials or mix proportion whichever foundations, shall be designed and constructed so that they are:
I
gives the largest number of iests.
- capable of resisting any actions expected during the con-
I
Initial and final Three times per shift or once per strength sample struction process
setting time - stiff enough to ensure that the tolerances specified for the
Expansion and Three times per shift or once per strength sample structure are satisfied and the integrity of the structural
hleedina
member is not affected.
Viscosity I Once per strength or every 3 hours
Densitv I Once per strength or even 3 hours Form, function, appearance and durability of the permanent
structure shall not be impaired due to falsework and formwork
Until uniform quality of the grout has been demonstrated, or their removal.
higher frequencies of testing may be required. 102 Formwork is to have sufficient strength, stiffness and di-
407 Testing of grout is to be performed on specimens taken mensional stability to withstand the loadings from casting,
from samples collected during grout production. The collec- compaction and vibration of fresh concrete. In addition the
tion, curing and testing is to be performed in accordance with support conditions for the formwork and possible live and en-
an approved specification. vironmental loads prior to, during and after the casting shall be
considered.
408 Samples for testing of fresh and hardened grout are,
whenever possible, to be collected from evacuation points of 103 For special and critical casting operations it may be re-
the compartments being grouted and the samples taken from quired to submit design calculations for the formwork for ad-
the emerging, surplus grout. vance approval.
409 Records shall be kept of all testing and are to identify 104 Special care is to be taken when designing formwork for
mix designs against test results in addition to stating the day, concrete with long setting time where large heights of fresh
time and sectiondparts grouted. concrete may exert significant loading on the formwork.
105 Slipforming operations shall be described in a slipform-
F 500 Testing of concrete in the structure ing procedure. The procedure shall contain structural design,
501 The quality of the concrete in the structure may be re- jacking arrangement, power supply, method for dimensional
quired verified by tests of sawn, drilled or in-situ cast cores control, criteria for lifting and emergency procedures in case of
from the structure, or by non-destructive examination. The ex- stoppage.
tent, location and methods of such testing is to be agreed upon 106 Feasibility tests on site may be required for complicated
by clientherification authority in each case. Increased exami- slipform operations.
nation of concrete in the structure is to be considered if one of
the following conditions occur: 107 Slipforms with variable dimensions shall be specially
considered.
- standard strength test specimens indicate abnormally low 108 Materials for formwork are to accommodate the require-
strength ments to strength, stiffness and low water absorption. Form-
- the concrete has visible signs of inferior quality work is to be erected by experienced personnel working in
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page74 - Sec.7
accordance with detailed drawings. Wooden spacers are not to distributed around the form.
be used. 206 There shall be contingency plans prepared for unintend-
109 Any material that leads to the fulfilment of the criteria ed situations such as break-down in concrete supply, problems
given for the structure may be used for formwork and false- with the lifting devices, hardening of the concrete, etc.
work. The materials shall comply with relevant product stand-
ards where such exist. Properties of the specific materials, such G 300 Jumpforming systems
as shrinkage, shall be taken into account if they can affect the 301 Jumpforming systems, when used, shall have adequate
end product. strength and stiffness for all loads exerted during the erection
110 The materials employed shall be consistent with any and casting period. There shall be a robust system for support
special requirements for the surface finish or later surface of the forms in the previously cast concrete. Inserts for support
treatment. shall be approved for the actual application.
111 The method statement shall describe the method of erec- 302 The jumpform, when installed, shall allow the necessary
tion and dismantling of temporary structures. The method preparation and cleaning of construction joints. The jumpform
statement shall speciSl the requirements for handling, adjust- system shall accommodate the necessary walkways and access
ing, intentional precambering, loading, unkeying, striking and platforms to ensure that the concreting works can be performed
dismantling. in an appropriate manner.
112 Deformations of formwork during and after concreting G 400 Inserts in formwork, recesses and blockouts
shall be limited to prevent deleterious cracking in the young
concrete. This may be achieved by limiting the deformations 401 Temporary inserts to keep the formwork in place bars,
and by organizing the casting operations in a manner such as ducts and similar items to be cast within the section and em-
to avoid harmful deformations. bedded components, e.g. anchor plates, anchor bolts, etc. shall:
113 Formwork shall keep the concrete in its required shape be fixed robustly enough to ensure that they will keep their
until it is hardened. prescribed position during placing and concreting
114 Formwork and the joints between boards or panels shall not introduce unacceptable loading on the structure
be sufficiently tight against loss of water and fiies. not react harmfully with the concrete, the reinforcement or
prestressing steel
115 Formwork that absorbs moisture or facilitate evapora- not produce unacceptable surface blemishes
tion shall be suitably wetted to minimize water loss from the not impair functional performance, tightness and durabili-
concrete, unless the formwork was designed specifically for ty of the structural member
that purpose. not prevent adequate placing and compaction of the fresh
116 The internal surface of the formwork shall be clean. concrete.
When slipforming is used, the form panels shall be thoroughly
cleaned and a grease-like mould-release agent shall be applied 402 Any embedded item shall have sufficient strength and
prior to assembling of the form. stiffness to preserve its shape during the concreting operation
and be free of contaminates that would affect them, the con-
G 200 Slipform systems crete or the reinforcement.
201 When using the slipforming method, the design and 403 Recesses used for temporary works shall be filled and
erection of the form and the preparation of the works shall take fiiished with a material of similar quality as the surrounding
into account the difficulties controlling the geometry and the concrete, unless it is otherwise specified. Block-outs and tem-
stiffness of the entire working platform. The entire slipform porary holes shall generally cast with normal concrete. Their
structure shall be designed with the appropriate stiffness and surfaces shall be keyed or slanted and prepared as construction
strength. Due account shall be taken of friction against harden- joints.
ing concrete, weight of materials stored on the form, systems G 500 Removal of formwork and falsework
for adjusting geometry such as diameter, wall thickness, as
well as climatic conditions to be expected during the slipform- 501 Falsework and formwork shall not be removed until the
ing period. concrete has gained sufficient strength to:
202 The lifting capacity of the jacks shall be adequate. The resist damage to surfaces that may arise during the striking
climbing rods shall be sufficiently strong not to buckle. Nor- take the actions imposed on the concrete member at that
mally, the climbing rods are left totally encased within the con- stage
crete. If the climbing rods shall be removed, the holes thus left avoid deflections beyond the specified tolerances due to
in the concrete shall be properly filled with grout via grouting elastic and inelastic (creep) behaviour of the concrete.
inlets at the bottom or by injection hoses threaded in from the
top. The grout consumption shall be monitored to confirm 502 Striking shall be made in a manner that will not subject
complete filling. the structure to overload or damage.
203 The materials applied in the form may be either steel or 503 Propping or re-propping may be used to reduce the ef-
wood, and shall comply with the requirements for formwork fects of the initial loading, subsequent loading andor to avoid
materials. The form shall have a height and batter consistent excessive deflections. Propping may be required in order to
with the concrete to be used. The slipforming rate and other achieve to intended structural behaviour of members cast in
conditions affecting the hardening process of the concrete shall two or more casting operations.
be such as to reduce or eliminate the tendency for lifting
cracks. 504 If formwork is part of the curing system, the time of its
removal shall take into account the requirements J300.
204 The slipform shall have a hanging platform below the
main form, giving access for application of curing as well as G 600 Surface treatment and final preparation
inspection and, if necessary, light repair of the hardening con- 601 At completion of formwork erection and during slip-
crete when appearing from under the slipform. forming operations it is to be ensured that the formwork is free
205 The concrete cover to the reinforcement shall be kept of all foreign matter, that casting joints are prepared and treat-
within the tolerances using sufficiently long and stiff steel ed as specified and that the formwork is given appropriate sur-
guides between the reinforcement and the form, adequately face treatment.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.7 - Page75
602 Formwork with permanent low-adhesion coating may lowed if it can be demonstrated that the prescribed bending ra-
be used. Form release agents used shall be satisfactorily docu- dius is obtained, and the work can be performed without
mented not to be detrimental to the bond between reinforce- misplacing the reinforcement.
ment and concrete. 112 The straightening of bent bars is prohibited unless the
603 The surface treatment and fiial preparation of formwork bars are originally bent over a mandrel with a diameter at least
is to be described in a special procedure. 1.5 times greater than a test mandrel used to document what
604 Release agents shall neither be harmfd to the concrete that particular steel and bar diameter can take and be straight-
nor shall they be applied in a manner that will affect the con- ened without damage, a procedure for such work shall be pre-
crete, the reinforcement or the bond between the two. pared and approved.
Release agents shall not have a detrimental effect on the sur- 113 Reinforcement delivered on coil shall be handled using
face fiiish, or subsequent coatings if any. Release agents shall the appropriate equipment, straightening shall be performed
be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's specification according to approved procedures, and all required mechanical
properties maintained.
605 Dimensional control during and after completion of the
formwork is, as a minimum, to include: 114 Prefabricated reinforcement assemblies, cages and ele-
ments shall be adequately stiff and strong to be kept in shape
- geometry and dimensions of cross sections. during transport, storage, placing and concreting, they shall be
- overall geometry, including deviation from theoretical accurate so that they meet all the requirements regarding plac-
shape and out of alignment. ing tolerances for reinforcement.
115 Deformed, high bond bars may be bundled in contact to
ensure adequate concrete penetration into areas with congested
reinforcement. Special attention is to be given to the possibility
H. Reinforcement and Embedded Steel of water channels along the bars in such cases. For structures
required to be watertight, no more than 4 bars, including the
H 100 Reinforcement splices (see Sec.6 Q303), are allowed to be in the same bundle
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
101 Reinforcement is to be of the type, grade and dimensions at any section.

given in the approved specification/ drawings (see also re- 116 The reinforcement is to be supported and fixed in a man-
quirements in Sec.4) and is to be placed with the spacing, splic- ner which prevents; accidental movement during completion
es and concrete covers stated in the same documents. of the formwork, and the casting, compaction and vibration of
102 The surface of the reinforcement is to be free of sub- the concrete.
stances that may be harmful to the steel or the bond between 117 The specified concrete cover is to be ensured by securely
steel and concrete at the time of installation and is to be pro- fixed, sturdy spacers. Wooden spacers are prohibited.
tected from such substances until casting of concrete com-
mences. 118 Attention is to be paid to the execution and detailing of
103 Reinforcement is normally to be cold bent to the re-
reinforcement at construction joints and the areas around pre-
stressing anchorages.
quired shape in one operation. Hot- or rebending is only al-
lowed upon special agreement. Bending shall be done at a 119 Joints on bars shall be done by laps or couplers. Only
uniform rate. couplers whose effectiveness is tested and approved may be
used. Butt-welds may be permitted to a limited extent but only
104 Bending of reinforcement with temperature below 0°C when subject to prequalification testing with non-destructive
shall only be performed on steel of given quality specified in examination and visual quality inspection of all welds during
Sec.5. execution. The welds shall be identified on design drawings.
105 Welding of reinforcement is to be carried out by quali- 120 The length and position of lapped joints and the position
fied welders working in accordance with approved procedures. of couplers shall be in accordance with design drawings and
The welds shall be non-destructively examined to the extent the project specification. Staggering of such joints shall be
given in the approved specification. Production tests of such considered in design. For details see Sec.6.
welds shall be considered for special welds of importance. The
Production tests and quality of the welding procedures shall be 121 The reinforcement shall be placed according to the de-
documented. sign drawings and fixed within the tolerances for fixing of re-
106 Welding is only permitted on reinforcing steel that is inforcement in this Standard, and secured so that its fiial
classified as weldable in the relevant product standard, accord- position is within the tolerances given in this Standard. For de-
ing to IS0 6935 or international standards tails see Sec.5.
107 Welding shall be used and performed in accordance with 122 Assembly of reinforcement should be done by tie wire.
specifications by design, and shall conform to special require- Spot or tack welding is not allowed for the assembling of rein-
ments in International Standards as relevant. forcement unless permitted by national standards and the
project specification, and due account has been taken of the
108 Welding should not be executed at or near bends in a bar, risk of fatigue failure of the main rebar at the weld.
unless specifically approved by the design.
123 The specified cover to the reinforcement shall be main-
109 Welding of galvanized or epoxy-coated reinforcement is tained by the use of suitable chairs and spacers. Spacers in con-
only permitted when a procedure for repair is specified and ap- tact with the concrete surface in corrosive atmosphere shall be
proved. made from concrete of at least the same quality as the structure.
110 For bars, wires, welded reinforcement and fabric bent Detailed requirements to concrete cover are given in Sec.6
after welding the diameter of the mandrel used should be as QlOO and Q200.
specified by design and in accordance with the standard relat- 124 In areas of congested reinforcement, measures shall be
ing to the type of reinforcement, Under no condition shall re- taken to ascertain that the concrete can flow and fill all voids
inforcement be bent over a mandrel with diameter which is not without segregation and can be adequately compacted.
at least 1.5 times greater than a test mandrel used to document
by bending tests what that steel and bar diameter can take with- H 200 Prestressing ducts and anchorages
out cracking or damage. 201 The prestressing assembly, e.g. all components of the
111 In-place bending of steel in the formwork may be al- tendons, shall be assembled in accordance with suppliers' spec-

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page76 - Sec.7
ifications or approval documents, and as shown in the ap- 303 Embedments shall be securely fixed at their location to
proved for construction drawings. prevent any accidental movement during succeeding construc-
202 The surfaces of ducts and anchorages shall be free of tion stages.
substances that may be harmful to the material or to the bond, 304 Due consideration is to be given, where relevant, to heat
and shall be protected from such substances until casting of transfer into the concrete during welding, and the correspond-
concrete commences. All components of the entire prestressing effects on concrete quality, anchoring bond as well as the
ing assembly or system consisting e.g. of prestressing steel, quality of the welding.
ducts, sheaths, anchorage devices, couplers as well as prefab- 305 Adequate sealing is to be provided around embedments
ricated tendons and tendons fabricated on site shall be protect- to prevent ingress of seawater to the reinforcement. Materials
ed from harmful influences during transport and storage and (waterstops or similar) and procedures for the sealing shall be
also whilst placed in the structure prior to permanent protec- in accordance with the approved specification. Temporary em-
tion. The ducts and anchorages shall be examined for mechan- bedments shall be protected against corrosion, unless it can be
ical damage and corrosion before installation. demonstrated that their corrosion will not cause concrete
203 Approval documents, identification documents and cer- spalling endangering the reinforcement.
tification of tests on materials andíor tendons shall be available
on site. Each item or component shall be clearly identified and H 400 Inspection and suwey
traceable. 401 During and after installation of reinforcement, ducts, an-
204 Documentation of prestressing steel of different deliver- chorages and embedments, survey and inspection is to be per-
ies shall be made in the as-built records. formed. The survey and inspection is as a minimum to include:
205 Cutting shall be done by an appropriate method in a way dimensions, type, grade, spacing and concrete cover for
that is not harmful. reinforcement.
206 Prestressing steel shall not be subject to welding. Steel type, dimensions and location of ducts and anchorages.
in the vicinity of prestressing steel shall not be subject to oxy- type and location of embedments.
gen cutting or welding except when sufficient precaution have compliance with installatiodoperation procedures.
been taken to avoid damage to prestressing steel and ducts.
207 The prestressing assembly shall be placed in compliance
with the projectlsuppliers specification and in accordance with
the relevant construction drawings. The tendon and all compo- I. Production of Concrete and Grout
nents shall be placed and secured in a manner that maintains I100 General
their location within the permissible tolerances for position,
angular deviation, straightness andíor curvature. Tendons shall 101 All the required properties for the concrete to achieve its
not sag or have kinks of any kind. The ducts and anchorages service functions shall be identified. The properties of the fresh
shall be installed and fixed to prevent accidental movement and hardened concrete shall take account of the method of ex-
during completion of the formwork and the casting, compac- ecution of the concrete works, e.g. placing, compaction, form-
tion and vibration of concrete. work striking and curing.
208 The straight entry into anchorages and couplers as well 102 Prior to any concreting, the concrete shall be document-
as the coaxiality of tendon and anchorage shall be as specified ed by pretesting to meet all the requirements specified. Testing
by the supplier's specifications or system approval documents. may be performed based on laboratory trial mixes, but should
209 Care is to be taken during the installation and fixation of preferably also include a full-scale test from the batch plant to
ducts to avoid undulations that may cause air and water pock- be used. Documented experience from earlier use of similar
ets away from the high point vents during grouting. concrete produced on a similar plant with the same constituent
materials may be regarded as valid pretesting. The quality con-
210 Vents and drains on the sheaths shall be provided at both trol procedures shall be available at site. The procedures shall
ends, and at all points where air or water can accumulate. In the include the possible corrective actions to be taken in the event
case of sheaths of considerable length, inlets, vents and drains of nonconformity with the project specification or agreed pro-
might be necessary at intermediate positions. As alternative to cedures. For details see Sec.4.
drains, other documented methods of removing water may be
considered. 103 The various mix designs shall be approved for their in-
tended applications and the mix proportions recorded, again
211 Inlets, vents and drains shall be properly marked to iden- see Sec.4. Each approved mix design is to be allocated an iden-
tifj the cable. tification symbol and the mix designs shall be related to the
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
212 The sheaths and their joints shall be sealed against in- part of the structure or construction phase where they are in-
gress of water and the ends shall be capped to avoid, rain, dirt tended to be used.
and debris of any kind. They shall be secured to withstand the 104 The lay-out of, and mixing procedures to be used at the
effects of placing and compacting of the concrete. mixing plant, shall be described and approved prior to start of
213 Sheaths shall be checked after pouring of concrete to en- construction. The description is to contain:
sure sufficient passage for the tendons. - description of plant lay-out and equipment
214 Sheaths shall be cleared of any water immediately prior - qualification of personnel
to tendon threading. - mixing time for wet and dry mixing
- methods of weighing and required tolerances
H 300 Embedded steel - method for monitoring fresh mix consistency.
301 Embedded steel in the form of penetrations, surface em-
bedments, etc. shall be of type and dimensions and shall be 105 The constituent materials shall be weighed, volumetric
placed as shown on approved drawings. batching is not to be used unless adequate accuracy is docu-
302 The surfaces of embedments shall be free of substances mented regularly. The quantity of water used in the mixes is to
that may be harmful to the material or the bond, and shall be be adjusted according to the water content of the aggregates.
protected from such substances until casting of concrete com- 106 In special cases, it may be required to maintain the tem-
mences. The embedments shall be examined for mechanical perature of the fresh mix at certain levels. Cooling of constitu-
damage and corrosion before installation. ent materials or addition of ice may be sufficient to bring about

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.7 - Page77
the desired cooling of the fresh mix. Conversely heating of 203 Construction joints shall be prepared and roughened in
constituent materials, such as steaming of frozen aggregates accordance with project specifications. In monolithic struc-
may be applicable. The usefulness of the methods and their in- tures an adequately roughened surface may be obtained by the
fluence on the properties of the mix design is to be investigat- application of a surface retarder on the fresh concrete, and later
ed, documented and approved before such methods are used. cleaning by water jetting. Construction joints shall be clean,
107 Survey and inspection is to be performed during produc- free of laitance and thoroughly saturated with water, but sur-
tion of concrete and grout, and is as a minimum to include: face dry. Construction joints in contact with the section to be
cast shall have a temperature that does not result in the adjoin-
- compliance with mix design and mixing procedures ing concrete freezing. Particular care is to be exercised in the
- compliance with sampling and test intervals. preparation of construction joints in sections of the structure
that are to remain watertight in temporary or operational phas-
es.
204 During casting care is to be exercised when placing the
J. Transport, Casting, Compaction and Curing concrete in the forms so that accidental displacement of rein-
of Concrete forcement, embedments etc. will not occur.
J 100 Transport 205 The concrete shall be placed and compacted in order to
ensure that all reinforcement and cast-in items are properly
101 Transport of concrete from the mixing plant to the place embedded in compacted concrete and that the concrete
of casting is to be performed in a manner that provides opti- achieves its intended strength and durability. Vibration and
mum quality concrete at the place of casting. Segregation in compaction is to ensure thorough compaction, penetration of
the fresh concrete is to be avoided, and in cases where early concrete into voids and homogeneous concrete. Direct contact
setting may represent a problem the maximum time allowed between vibrators and reinforcement is to be avoided.
between emergence from the mixer and completed casting is to
be specified and approved. 206 Appropriate procedures shall be used where cross-sec-
102 Rotating truck mixers shall be used for transport from tions are changed, in narrow locations, at box outs, at dense re-
the mixing plant, and pumping or buckets be used for placing inforcement arrangements and at construction joints.
the concrete in the forms. The use of bucket transporters is to Settlement cracking over reinforcement in top surface shall be
be avoided, except for very short distances. Other methods of avoided by revibration.
transportation may be considered by the Society. 207 Casting of sections exceeding one metre in thickness,
103 Concrete shall be inspected at the point of placing and, and very large pours require preparation of special procedures.
in the case of ready-mixed concrete, also at the point of deliv- Necessary precautions to be specified in the procedures, may
ery. Samples for acceptance testing shall be taken at the point include:
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
of placing, in the case of ready-mixed concrete samples for - artificial cooling of the fresh mix
identity testing shall be taken at the point of delivery.
- cooling of the concrete during curing
104 Detrimental changes of the fresh concrete, such as seg- - insulation of the concrete to ensure an even temperature
regation, bleeding, paste loss or any other changes shall be distribution during the fiist weeks of cooling
minimized during loading, transport and unloading as well as - special formwork for the casting operation.
during conveyance or pumping on site.
105 Concrete may be cooled or heated either during mixing, 208 The rate of placing and compaction shall be high enough
during transport to site or at site if documented acceptable by to avoid cold joints and low enough to prevent excessive set-
pretesting. The temperature of the fresh concrete shall be with- tlements or overloading of the formwork and falsework. The
in the specified or declared limits. concrete shall be placed in layers of a thickness that is compat-
106 The maximum amount of water that may be added to the ible with the capacity of the vibrators used. The concrete of the
concrete during the transport is to be specified and shall be in new layer should be vibrated systematically and include re-vi-
accordance with the pretesting documentation. bration of the top of the previous layer in order to avoid weak
or inhomogeneous zones in the concrete. The vibration shall be
107 When pumping is used for the casting of large sections, applied until the expulsion of entrapped air has practically
a sufficient number of back-up units is to be provided. ceased, but not so as to cause segregation or a weak surface
layer.
J 200 Casting and compaction
209 Concrete shall be placed in such a manner as to avoid
201 A procedure for the casting process is to be prepared and segregation. Free fall of concrete from a height of more than 2
submitted for approval by clientherification authority. The m shall not occur unless the mix is demonstrated to allow this
procedure is, as a minimum, to specify: without segregation. Concrete shall be compacted by means of
- inspection requirements prior to casting high frequency vibrators. Contact between internal vibrators
- maximum thickness of each new layer of concrete. - Max- and reinforcement or formwork shall be avoided as much as
imum thickness of concrete that may remain not set possible. Vibrators shall not be used for horizontal transporta-
- maximum temperature to be allowed in the concrete dur- tion (spreading) of concrete.
ing curing NOTE: Alternative methods to the use of vibrators in order to
- maximudminimum temperature of the fresh mix at the obtain an adequately compacted concrete may be permitted
place of casting provided this can be documented for the relevant type of con-
- extent of vibration and revibration ditions by trial casting.
- contingency measures in case of form stop, blockage,
equipment failure etc. 210 Low temperature concreting may require special proce-
dures to ensure that the concrete reaches adequate maturity.
202 Before casting commences examination of the form- Necessary precautions to be specified in the procedures, may
work, reinforcement, ducts, anchorages and embedments is to include:
be completed with acceptable results. Immediately before
placing of the concrete the formwork is to be examined for de- - heating the concrete mix
bris and foreign matters detrimental to concrete quality. The - use of accelerators in the concrete mix
form shall be free of detritus, ice, snow and standing water. - heated andor insulated formwork.

DETNORSK E VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page78 - Sec.7
211 Hot weather concreting is to be performed carefully and quired, unless they are fully removed prior to the subsequent
the references to the maximum temperature of the concrete operation, or they are proven to have no detrimental effects to
during curing shall be followed, to avoid excessive dehydra- bond.
tion of the concrete. If the ambient temperature is forecasted to 306 Early age thermal cracking resulting from thermal gradi-
be above 30°C at the time of casting or in the curing period, ents or restraints from adjoining members and previously cast
precautions shall be planned to protect the concrete against concrete shall be minimized. In general, a differential in tem-
damaging effects of high temperatures. perature across a section should not be allowed to exceed 10°C
212 During placing and compaction, the concrete shall be per 100 mm.
protected against adverse solar radiation and wind, freezing, 307 The concrete temperature shall not fall below 0°C until
water, rain and snow. Surface water shall be removed during the concrete has reached a compressive strength of at least 5
concreting if the planned protection fails. MPa and also is adequate for all actions in frozen and thawed
213 For underwater concreting special procedures shall be condition until the specified full strength is gained. Curing by
prepared and the adequacy documented. methods using water shall not be done if freezing conditions
214 Records shall be kept during the casting operations. are likely. In freezing conditions, concrete slabs and other ele-
Each batch is to be recorded with regard to all specified and ments that may become saturated shall be protected from the
relevant information e.g. mix identification, contents of con- ingress of external water for at least seven days.
stituent materials, weights, mixing time, date and time of mix- 308 The peak temperature of the concrete within an element
ing, temperatures of the mix, part of the structure, reference to shall not exceed 70°C unless data are provided documenting
test samples taken, etc. that higher temperatures will have no significant adverse ef-
215 During casting of concrete survey and inspection is to be fect.
performed to ensure compliance with the approved procedure. 309 The set concrete shall be protected from vibrations and
216 Special concreting methods shall be stated in the project impacts that can damage the concrete or its bond to reinforce-
specification or agreed. ment.
310 The surface shall be protected from damage by heavy
217 Special execution methods shall not be permitted if they
may have an adverse effect on the structure or its durability. rain, flowing water or other mechanical influences.
Special execution methods might be required in cases where J 400 Completion
concrete with lightweight or heavyweight aggregates are used
and in the case of under-water concreting. In such cases, pro- 401 Formwork is not to be removed until the concrete has
cedures for the execution shall be prepared and approved prior gained the strength required to support itself and withstand
to the start of the work. Trials might be required as part of the other relevant loads imposed by the environment or construc-
documentation and approval of the methods to be used. tion activities.
218 Concrete for slipforming shall have an appropriate set- 402 After removal of the formwork tie-rods, spacer bars, etc.
ting time. Slipforming shall be performed with adequate equip- shall be broken off at a level corresponding to the concrete
ment and methods for transportation to the form and cover, and the holes patched with cement mortar.
distribution at the form. The methods employed shall ensure 403 The concrete surface is to be examined and areas subject
that the specified cover to the reinforcement, the concrete qual- to repair marked out. If any areas show visible signs of inferior
ity and the surface finish are achieved. quality, the area is to be marked for possible testing of concrete
quality.
J300 Curing
301 Concreting procedures are to ensure adequate curing in
order to obtain maximum durability, minimize plastic shrink-
age, losses in strength and durability and to avoid cracking. K. Completion of Prestressing Systems
The curing period is normally not to be less than two weeks.
The duration of curing may be fwther estimated based on test- K 100 Threading and stressing of tendons
ing of strength or alternatively by the maturity of the concrete 101 Before threading of tendons is commenced, the anchor-
on the basis of either the surface temperature of the concrete or ages and ducts shall be examined for possible damages, attacks
the ambient temperature. The maturity calculation should be of corrosion, blockage of ducts by concrete, the integrity of the
based on an appropriate maturity function proven for the type ducts and watertightness. All ducts shall be cleared by com-
of cement or combination of cement and addition used. pressed air or similar means prior to threading of tendons.
302 During curing the concrete surface is, as far as practica- 102 Tendons shall be examined for damages, corrosion, di-
ble, to be kept wet with fresh water. Care is to be taken to avoid mension and identification before they are threaded.
rapid lowering of concrete temperature (thermal shock) caused 103 Stressing of tendons is to be carried out according to the
by applying cold water on hot concrete surfaces. Seawater system manufacturer's or other approved procedure which as a
shall not be used for curing. Fresh concrete shall not be permit- minimum is to specify:
ted submerged in seawater until an adequate strength of the
surface concrete is obtained. If there is any doubt about the - the sequence of stressing for multiple cables
abilitykapacity to keep the concrete surfaces permanently wet - the number of stressing steps
for the whole of the curing period, or where there is danger of - elongation versus load
thermal shock, a heavy duty curing membrane is to be used. - amount of overstressing to compensate for creep
303 Whenever there is a possibility that the concrete temper- - requirements to equipment.
ature may fall below the freezing point during curing, adequate
insulation is to be provided. 104 Stressing of tendons is to be carried out by personnel
with documented qualification, e.g. previous experience or ad-
304 On completion of compaction and finishing operations equate training.
on the concrete, the surface shall be cured without delay. If
needed to prevent plastic shrinkage cracking on free surfaces, 105 On completion of stressing operations, protruding ends
temporary curing shall be applied prior to finishing. of tendons shall be protected.
305 Curing compounds are not permitted on construction 106 The final stress in each tendon is to be recorded.
joints, on surfaces where bonding of other materials is re- 107 During threading and stressing of tendons, survey and
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.7 - Page79
inspection is to be performed to ensure compliance with the ap- NOTE: In case of deviations between theoretical and obtained
proved procedure. results, tests to confirm friction factors and E-modulus of the
tendon assembly might be necessary.
K 200 Tensioning of tendons
404 The prestressing tendons shall be protected from corro-
201 Tensioning shall be done in accordance with an ap- sion in the period from threading to prestressing. This period
proved method statement giving the tensioning programme should normally not be allowed to exceed one week. Should
and sequence. The jacking force/pressure and elongation at the period from threading to casting exceed one week, then the
each stagehtep in the stressing operation until full force is ob- condition of the tendons shall be specially evaluated for harm-
tained shall be recorded in a log. The obtained pressures and ful conditions and special precautions may be required to pro-
elongations at each stagehtep shall be compared to pre-calcu- tect the tendons.
lated theoretical values. The results of the tensioning program
and its conformity or non-conformity to the requirements shall K 500 Protective measures, grouting, greasing, concret-
be recorded. All observations of problems during the execution ing
of the prestressing works shall also be recorded. 501 Tendons placed in sheaths or rigid ducts in the concrete,
202 Stressing devices shall be as permitted for the prestress- couplers and anchorage devices shall be protected against det-
ing system. The valid calibration records for the force measur- rimental corrosion. This protection shall be ensured by filling
ing devices shall be available on the site before the tensioning all voids with a suitable groutinghjection material such as ce-
starts. ment grout, grease or wax. Anchorage areas and end caps shall
203 Application and/or transfer of prestressing forces to a
be protected as well as the tendons.
structure may only be at a concrete strength that meets the re- 502 In case of post-tensioning with required bond, cement
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
quirements as specified by design, and under no condition grouting of sheaths shall comply with recognized international
shall it be less than the minimum compressive strength stated or national standards. Groutinghnjection shall follow as soon
in the approval documents of the prestressing system. Special as possible after tensioning of the tendons, normally within
attention in this respect shall be paid to the anchorage areas. one week. If a delay is likely to permit corrosion, protective
measures should be considered in accordance with national
K 300 Pre-tensioning regulations or recommendations by the supplier.
301 Pre-tensioning is normally carried out under manufac- 503 A method statement shall be provided for the prepara-
turer condition and the tendons are stressed prior to casting the tion and execution of the groutinghnjection, all important datal
concrete. If, during stressing, the calculated elongation cannot observations from the grouting shall be reported in a log, e.g.
be achieved within a range of volume consumed compared to theoretical volume, tempera-
ture of the structure and mix proportions and problemshtops.
I3% for a group of tendons, or
I5% for a single tendon within the group for the specified 504 Grouting devices shall be as permitted for the prestress-
tensioning force, ing system.
action shall be taken in accordance with the method statement K 600 Unbonded tendons
either to the tensioning program or to the design. 601 Anchorage areas of unbonded tendons or single strands,
302 The release of prestressing force in the rig/bed shall be their sheaths and end-caps shall be filled by non-corrosive
done in a careful manner in order not to affect the bond in the grease or wax. End caps shall be encased in concrete tied to the
anchorage zone of the tendon in a negative manner. main structure by reinforcement.
303 If the fresh concrete cannot be cast in due time after ten- 602 Sheathed unbonded tendons shall be adequately sealed
sioning, temporary protective measures shall be taken which against penetration of moisture at their ends.
will not affect the bond or have detrimental effect on the steel
and/or the concrete. K 700 Grouting of ducts
304 Pre-tensioning will normally not be used as prestressing 701 Grouting with cement-based grouts shall only be done at
method for large offshore structures, However, if the offshore temperatures in the structure in the range +5"C to +25"C. The
structure is assembled by precast elements, pre-tensioning may temperature of the grout shall not be less than + 10°C nor
be applied. above +25"C. If a frost resistant grout is used, grouting at low-
er temperatures than + 5°C may be permitted.
K 400 Post-tensioning 702 If the temperature in the structure is above +25"C grout-
401 Tensioning shall not take place at temperatures below ing may be permitted provided special precautions valid in the
+5"C within the structure unless special arrangements can as- place of grouting can ensure a successful grouting.
sure the corrosion protection of non-grouted tendons. Tension- 703 Grouting shall be carried out at a continuous and steady
ing is prohibited at temperatures below - 10°C. rate from the lowest inlet until the emerging grout has the ap-
402 If, during the stressing operation, the calculated elonga- propriate quality, not affect by evacuated water or preservation
tion cannot be achieved within a range of oil from the duct. In vertical ducts, the grouting pressure shall
be given particular attention. Normally the grout pressure in-
I5% for a group of tendons, or side the duct should not be allowed to exceed 2 MPa, unless
I10% for a single tendon within the group for the specified permitted by the design. Non-retarded grout and grout with an
tensioning force, expanding admixture shall be used within 30 min after mixing.
action shall be taken in accordance with the method statement 704 In vertical or inclined ducts or ducts of particularly large
either to the tensioning programme or to the design. diameter, post-injection might be necessary in order to remove
403 In the case of deviations from the planned performance bleed water or voids. Post-injection shall be performed before
during tensioning, tendon-ends shall not be cut off and grout- the grout is stiffened. If voids are detected at inlets or outlets
ing is not permitted. Works that can impair re-tensioning shall after the grout is stiffened, post-grouting shall be carried out, if
not be carried out. No tendons shall be cut if the obtained elon- required, by vacuum grouting.
gations deviate from the theoretical by more than 5%, without 705 A grouting procedure is to be prepared and submitted for
design approval. Further work shall be postponed until the ten- approval. The procedure is, as a minimum, to contain the fol-
don has been approved, or fwther action decided. lowing information:

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page80 - Sec.7
requirements to fresh grout properties; bleeding, viscosity, - criteria and authority for deciding implementation of re-
density, etc. pairs
requirements to hardened grout - necessary equipment
batching and mixing requirements - qualification of personnel
means of transportation of fresh grout - required ambient conditions (temperature etc.)
requirements to pumps and other equipment - repair material specification
grouting pressure - repair execution description
holding time - procedure testing
number and placing of vents - inspection and testing.
particulars of difficult operations such as grouting of long, 102 Materials for repair during construction shall be ap-
vertical ducts proved for use in advance. Documentation of relevant proper-
grout quality sampling points and procedure ties is to be submitted and is to include:
contingency measures in case of equipment failure, block-
ages, etc. - strength and strength development
- deformation characteristics
706 Prior to start of operation it is to be ensured that the - thermal properties
grouting system is operable, and that air and surplus grout may - bond to concrete
be evacuated from the ducts at a rate exceeding the filling rate, - chemical compatibility with concrete
Means shall be provided to observe the emergence of grout - stability/durability in future environment
from the various vent points of the ducts. - pot life.
707 The grouting operation is to be conducted with strict ad-
herence to the approved procedure. 103 Execution of repairs is to be performed by experienced
personnel with documented capabilities. Prior to the actual ex-
708 In case of vacuum-injection, the free volume in the ducts ecution procedure testing may be required to document:
shall be measured. The amount of grout injected shall be com-
parable with this volume. Vacuum grouting procedures, partic- - feasibility of repair
ularly in the case of vertical tendons, should be prequalified by - in-place strength
trials of relevant geometry. - special requirements.
709 Provision for vacuum grouting or reinjection shall be 104 Execution and testing of repairs shall be surveyed and
made in case of discovery of a blockage in the duct. Ducts shall inspected for compliance with approved procedures.
under no circumstances be left empty and ungrouted without
specific approval by design.
710 After completion of grouting, unintended loss of grout
from the ducts shall be prevented by sealing them under pres- M. Corrosion protection
sure of minimum 0.5 MPa for a minimum of one minute.
M100 General
711 If grouting of a duct is interrupted, corrective actions,
such as washing out all fresh grout, shall be taken. No ducts 101 Survey and inspection and execution of corrosion pro-
shall be left with incomplete filling of grout. tection systems is to be in accordance with the requirements in
Sec.5 and Sec.6 as relevant.
712 Records shall be kept during the grouting operation.
Each batch is to be recorded with regard to the specified and
relevant information e.g. mix identification, constituent mate-
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
rials, weights, mixing time, date and time of mixing, volume, N. Site Records and As-built Documentation
duct being grouted, reference to test samples taken, etc.
N100 General
713 During the grouting operation, survey and inspection is
to be performed to ensure compliance with the approved pro- 101 Adequate records related to the construction of the struc-
cedure. ture shall be prepared. Construction records shall be compiled
in parallel with the construction process. Compiled records
K 800 Greasing operations shall be systematic and fully traceable. Such records are to re-
801 Greasing shall be carried out at continuous and steady flect all testing, alterations, additions, corrections and revi-
rate. After completion of greasing, unintended loss of grease sions made during the construction period in order to provide
from the ducts shall be prevented by sealing them under pres- information required during the in-service life of the structure.
sure. 102 As a minimum the construction records are to contain:
802 The volume of the injected grease shall be checked quality assurance/quality control manual
against the theoretical free volume in the duct. The change of relevant material certification and test reports
volume of the grease with change in temperature shall be taken summary of reports of testing of constituent materials, ad-
into account. ditives and reinforcement
summary reports of production testing of concrete and
grout with reference to location in the structure
summary report of testing of concrete in the structure
L. Repairs summary reports from stressing of prestressing system, in-
cluding final stresses
L 100 General summary of repair work, including location references
101 Procedures for the execution of repairs shall be pre- documentation of welding and structural steel work
pared. General procedures, appropriate for the most common dimensional control reports of final geometry of cross sec-
types of repairs, are normally to be available at the start of con- tions, overall geometry (including deviation from theoret-
struction. Further procedures shall be prepared if repairs, not ical shape and out of alignment), placing of prestressing
covered by the initial procedures, shall be performed. The products and anchorages and location of embedments
cedures are as a minimum to contain the following informa- inspection summary reports
tion: as-built drawings

E VERITAS
Sec.7 - Page81
- information with regard to any non-conformances structure shall be checked and any necessary adjustments shall
- information with regard to any waivers or modifications be made.
from the specified requirements
- information with regard to storage, handling, installation, O 400 Jointing and completion works
testing and operation of items shipped with the structure. 401 The completion works are executed on the basis of the
requirements given in the erection program and taking climatic
conditions into account.
O. Precast Concrete Elements 402 The execution of the structural joints shall be made in
accordance with the project specifications. Joints that shall be
O 100 General concreted shall have a minimum size to ensure a proper filling.
The faces shall normally meet the requirements to construction
101 This clause specifies requirements for the construction joints.
operations involving precast elements, whether produced in a
factory or a temporary facility at or outside the site, and applies 403 Connectors of any type shall be undamaged, correctly
to all operations from the time the elements are available on the placed and properly executed to ensure an effective structural
site, until the completion of the work and final acceptance. behaviour.
102 Precast elements, when used in offshore concrete struc- 404 Steel inserts of any type, used forjoint connections, shall
tures, their manufacture and design are covered by this Stand- be properly protected against corrosion and fire by an appro-
ard, and shall meet all requirements to materials, strength and priate choice of materials or covering.
durability as if they were cast in situ. 405 Welded structural connections shall be made with weld-
103 When precast elements are used, these shall be designed able materials and shall be inspected.
for all temporary conditions as well as the structural perform- Threaded and glued connections shall be executed according
ance in the overall structure. This shall at least cover: to the specific technology of the materials used.
- joints, with any bearing devices, other connections, addi-
tional reinforcement and local grouting
- completion work (in situ casting, toppings and reinforce- P. Geometrical Tolerances
ment)
- load and arrangement conditions due to transient situa- P 100 General
tions during execution of the in situ works 101 Design tolerances are specified in Sec.6, C400 with de-
- differential time dependent behaviour for precast and in sign consequences in Sec.6, B607. The design assumption is
situ concrete. based on an alternative approach, either:
104 Precast elements shall be clearly marked and identified - design and construct in accordance with the tolerances in
with its intended position in the final structure. As built infor- Sec.6, C400 with high material factors provided in Sec.6,
mation and records of conformity testing and control shall be B607; or
available. - design and construct the for any tolerances, the maximum
105 A complete erection work program with the sequence of positive and negative tolerances have to be included in de-
all on-site operations shall be prepared, based on the lifting and sign in the most design critical way, and the construction
installation instructions and the assembly drawings. Erection work has to confirm compliance with the set of tolerances.
shall not be started until the erection program is approved.
102 This clause defines the types of geometrical deviations
O 200 Handling and storage relevant to offshore structures. See P300, P400 and P500. The
list is provided as guidelines, and the designer shall fill in the
201 Instructions shall be available giving the procedures for required tolerances to be used in construction. The tolerances
the handling, storage and protection of the precast elements. shall be marked on the drawings issued for construction.
202 A lifting scheme defining the suspension points and 103 In general, tolerances on dimensions are specified in or-
forces, the arrangement of the lifting system and any special der to ensure that:
auxiliary provision shall be available. The total mass and cen-
tre of gravity for the elements shall be given. - geometry is such as to allow parts fit together as intended --`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
203 Storage instructions for the element shall define the stor- - geometrical parameters used in design are satisfactorily
age position and the permissible support points, the maximum accurate
height of the stack, the protective measures and, where neces- - the structural safety of the structural member is ensured
sary, any provisions required to maintain stability. - construction work is performed with a satisfactorily accu-
rate workmanship
O 300 Placing and adjustment - weights are sufficiently accurate for floating stability con-
siderations.
301 Requirements for the placing and adjustment of the pre-
cast elements shall be given in the erection program, which 104 All these factors shall be considered when tolerances are
shall also defiie the arrangement of the supports and possible specified. Tolerances assumed in design (See Sec.6 C400) may
temporary stability provisions. Access and work positions for be greater than the tolerances actually found to be acceptable
lifting and guiding of the elements shall be defined. The erec- for other reasons.
tion of the elements shall be performed in accordance with the
assembly drawings and the erection program. 105 Changes in dimensions following temperature effects,
concrete shrinkage, post-tensioning and application of loading,
302 Construction measures shall be applied which ensure the including those resulting from different construction sequenc-
effectiveness and stability of temporary and final supports. es, are not part of the construction tolerances. When deemed
These measures shall minimize the risk of possible damage important, these changes shall be considered separately.
and of inadequate performance.
303 During installation, the correct position of the elements, P 200 Reference system
the dimensional accuracy of the supports, the conditions of the 201 A system for setting out tolerances and the position
element and the joints, and the overall arrangement of the points, which mark the intended position for the location of in-

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page82 - Sec.7
dividual components, shall be in accordance with IS0 4463- 1. f) shaft/deck connections:

202 Deviations of supports and components shall be meas- - deviation of best fit centre from intended centre of
ured relative to their position points. If a position point is not shaft
established, deviation shall be measured relative to the second- - deviation in distances between best fit centres of
ary system. A tolerance of position in plane refers to the sec- shafts
ondary lines in plane. A tolerance of position in height refers - position of temporary supports horizontal and vertical
to the secondary lines in height. - position of anchor bolts horizontal plane and vertical-
P 300 Member tolerances (Guidelines) ity.
301 Requirements may be given for the following type of P 400 Cross-sectional tolerances (Guidelines)
tolerances as relevant: 401 Requirements may be given for the following type of
a) skirts: tolerances:
- deviation from intended centre for circular skirts a) thickness:

- deviation from intended position for individual points - individual measured points
along a skirt - overall average for area.
- deviation from best fit circle for circular skirts
- deviation from intended elevation for tip and top of b) reinforcement position:
skirt
- deviation from intended plumb over given heights. - tolerance on concrete cover
- tolerance on distance between rebar layers same face
b) slabs and beams: - tolerance on distance between rebar layers opposite
faces
- deviation from intended elevation for centre plane - tolerances on spacing of rebars in same layer
- deviation from intended planeness measured over giv- - tolerances on laplengths.
en lengths (2 m and 5 m)
- deviation from intended slope. c) prestressing:
c) walls, columns and shafts: - tolerance on position of prestressing anchors
- position of ducts/straightness at anchors
- deviation from intended position of centre plane or - position of ducts in intermediate positions
horizontal centre line - tolerances on radius for curved parts of tendons.
- deviation from intended planeness- horizontal direc-
tion P 500 Embedments and penetrations (Guidelines)
- deviation from intended planeness - vertical direction
- deviation from intended plumb over given heights. 501 Requirements may be given for the following type spec-
ified of tolerances as relevant. Tolerances shall be for items in-
d) domes: dividually or for groups, as appropriate:
- deviation of best fit dome centre from intended centre, a) embedment plates:
horizontal and vertical directions - deviation in plane parallel to concrete surface
- deviation of best fit inner radius from intended radius - deviation in plane normal to concrete surface
- deviation of individual points from best fit inner dome - rotation in plane of plate (degrees).
- deviation of individual points from best fit exterior
dome. b) attachments to embedments:
e) circular members: - deviation from intended position (global or local sys-
- deviation of best fit cylinder centre from intended cen- tem)
tre line c) penetrations:
- deviation of best fit inner radius from intended inner
radius - sleeves deviation from intended position of centre
- deviation of individual points from best fit inner circle - sleeves deviation from intended direction
over given lengths - manholes deviation from intended position and di-
- deviation of individual points from best fit exterior mension
circle over given lengths - blackouts deviations from intended position and di-
- deviation from intended plumb over given height. mensions.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.8 - Page83
SECTION 8
IN-SERVICE INSPECTION, MAINTENANCE AND CONDITIONAL
MONITORING
A. General 402 The condition of the loadbearing structure shall be doc-

umented by periodic examinations and, where required, sup-
A 100 Application plemented by instrumentation-based systems. A programme
101 The purpose of this Section is to specify requirements for planning and implementation of inspection and condition
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
and recommendations for in-service inspection, maintenance monitoring including requirements for periodic inspections
and condition monitoring of offshore concrete structures, and shall be prepared. The programme for inspection and condition
to indicate how these requirements and recommendations can monitoring shall cover the whole structure and comprise the
be achieved. Alternative methods may also fulfil the intent of use of instrumentation data.
these provisions and can be applied provided they can be dem- 403 If values for loads, load effects, erosion or foundation
onstrated and documented to provide the same level of safety behaviour are highly uncertain, the installation shall be
and confidence. equipped with instrumentation for measurement of environ-
102 Requirements for In-service Inspection, maintenance mental condition, dynamic motion, strain, etc. to confiim the
and Condition Monitoring for Concrete Offshore Structures in applicability of governing design assumptions. Significant
general are given under this Sub-heading A “General”. changes to equipment and storage/ballast operations should be
identified and recorded.
A200 Scope 404 Continuous monitoring shall be carried out to detect and
201 The In-service inspection, maintenance and condition give warnings regarding damage and serious defects, which
monitoring programme shall be established as part of the de- significantly reduce the stability and load carrying capacity.
sign process considering safety, environmental consequences Significant events are those that within a relatively short period
and total life cycle costs. of time can cause structural failure or those that represent sig-
The overall objective for the inspection, maintenance and con- nificant risk to people or the environment or those having large
dition monitoring activities is to ensure that the structure is economical consequences. Forecasting the occurrence of these
suitable for its intended purpose throughout its lifetime. events is needed to allow sufficient lead-time for corrective ac-
tion (e.g. to repair) or abandonment.
The condition monitoring activities should include the latest
developments, knowledge and experience available. Special 405 The structure should also be monitored to detect small
attention should be paid to deterioration mechanisms for the damages and defects, which can develop to a critical situation.
relevant materials and structural components: Particular emphasis should be placed on identifying the likeli-
hood of small failures, which can lead to progressive collapse.
- time-dependent effects The type and extent of monitoring on this level should be han-
- mechanical/chemical attacks dled as a risk minimization problem, which includes the prob-
- corrosion, loading ability of damage/defect occurrence, detection probability,
- seabed conditions monitoring costs and cost savings by repairing the damage/de-
- stability fect at an early stage.
- scour protection and damage from accidents.
A 500 Programme for inspection and condition moni-
As appropriate, the condition monitoring activities should re- toring
flect the need for repair works and maintenance.
501 The first programme for inspection and condition moni-
Maintenance shall be carried out according to a plan based on toring should provide an initial assessment, as described in
the expected life of the structure or component or when the A602 of the condition of the structure, i.e. the assessment
specified inspection or monitoring efforts detect unpredicted should have an extent and duration which, as far as possible,
happenings. provides a total description of the condition of the structure
(design verification). The programme for in-service inspec-
A 300 Personnel qualifications tion, maintenance and condition monitoring shall be based on
301 Personnel involved in inspection planning and condition information gained through preceding programmes and new
assessment shall have relevant competence with respect to ma- knowledge regarding the application of new analysis tech-
rine concrete design, concrete materials technology, concrete niques and methods within condition monitoring and mainte-
construction and specific experience in the application of in- nance. As such, the programme shall be subjected to periodic
spection techniques and the use of inspection instrumentation review, and possible revision as new techniques, methods or
and equipment. Because each offshore structure is unique, in- data become available. The intervals may also be altered on the
spectors shall familiarize themselves with the primary design same basis.
and operational aspects before conducting an inspection.
A 600 Inspection and condition monitoring milestones
302 Inspectors shall have adequate training appropriate for
supervisors, divers, ROV-operators as specified in accordance and intervals
with national requirements where applicable. 601 Accumulated historical inspection data, experiences
gained from similar structures together with thorough knowl-
A 400 Planning edge based on concrete design and technology, i.e. deteriora-
401 The planning of in-service inspection, maintenance and tion processes etc., form the basis for defiiing necessary
condition monitoring activities shall be based on the: inspection and condition monitoring intervals. The extent of
work effort on inspection and condition monitoring shall be
- function of each structural element sufficient to provide a proper basis for assessing structural in-
- exposure to damage tegrity and thereby the safety for the personnel involved, with
- vulnerability to damage respect to defiied acceptable risks and consequences of fail-
- accessibility for inspection. ure.

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page84 - Sec.8
602 An early inspection to verify that the structure has no ob- documented and retained by the owner/operator.
vious defects shall be carried out soon after installation. The
inspection activities and the assessment shall be carried out A 800 Important items related to inspection and condi-
during the fiist year of operation. This initial inspection shall tion monitoring
be comprehensive and thorough, and shall address all major 801 Inspection of concrete offshore installations normally
structural elements. includes a survey of the different parts of the structure, includ-
603 During in-service, more information will become avail- ing the atmospheric zone, the splash and the tidal zones and the
able and the knowledge about the initial condition can be up- large amounts of immersed concrete. It is generally recognized
dated. that the splash zone is the most vulnerable to corrosion. The
submerged zone is also recognized as important because most
604 Inspection and condition monitoring of the structure of the structure is underwater.
shall be carried out regularly in accordance with the pro-
gramme for inspection and condition monitoring established. 802 Inspection activities, therefore, will most often seek to
identify symptoms and tell-tale signs made evident on the sur-
605 Assessment of the condition shall be carried out follow- face originating from the defect, i.e. often at a relatively ad-
ing the inspection activities. A summary evaluation shall be vanced stage of defect progression. In many cases, it is
prepared at the end of each programme for inspection and con- assumed that signs of damage will be obvious before the integ-
dition monitoring period as outlined in A700. The data gath- rity of the structure is impaired, but it should not be assumed
ered from each periodic inspection shall be compared to data that this always is the case.
gathered from previous inspections. Evaluations shall consider
not only new information, but also data trends that might indi- 803 Essential elements of a successful condition monitoring
cate time-dependent deterioration processes. programme include the following:
606 Inspection and condition monitoring should be conduct- It is focused on areas of high damage probability and areas
ed after direct exposure to a design environmental event (e.g., critical to safety
wave, earthquake, etc.). Special inspection following a design It is well documented
environmental event shall encompass the critical areas of the It is completed at the specified intervals, as a minimum
structure. Special inspections following accidental events may, It is repetitive, to enhance training of assigned personnel.
in certain circumstances, be limited to the local area of dam-
age. Inspection should also be conducted after severe acciden- Guidance note:
tal loading (e.g., boat collision, failing object, etc.) It is also important to differentiate between the extent of assess-
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ment and frequency for inspection for different structural ele-

607 In the event of change of use, lifetime extension, modi- ments. The function of each structural element will play a role in
fications, deferred abandonment, damages or deterioration of establishing the extent and frequency of assessment. The expo-
the structure or a notable change in the reliability data on sure or vulnerability to damage, of each element, shall be consid-
which the inspection scheme is based, measures should be tak- ered when establishing priorities for assessment. The
en to maintain the structural integrity appropriate to the cir- accessibility for assessment may also be highly variable. The at-
cumstances. The programme shall be reviewed to determine mospheric zone provides the least difficult access, while the sub-
the applicability to the changed conditions and shall be submerged zone the most. However, the splash zone may provide the
jected to modification as required. Risk to the environment most severe environmental exposure and a greater likelihood of
accidental impact for many concrete marine structures. There-
shall be included. fore the condition monitoring plan shall consider the function of
608 Based on a removal programme, an assessment of the each structural element and provides further consideration of el-
structural integrity may be carried out prior to removal. The ement access and exposure. Focusing on critical structural ele-
need to complete this assessment, and the extent of the assessments located in high exposure areas of the structure lead to
ment and inspection required, will depend heavily on the peri- efficiency in monitoring.
od, which has elapsed since the last periodic or special ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
inspection. As a minimum, however, this assessment needs
only consider safety of personnel. 804 Inspection and condition monitoring of the Atmospheric
Zone should focus on detecting possible damage or defects
A 700 Documentation caused by:
701 The efficiency and integrity of the inspection and condi- structural design and construction imperfections
tion monitoring activities is dependent on the validity, timeli- environmental loads
ness, extent and accuracy of the available inspection data. mechanical loads
702 To facilitate periodic inspection as specified in the pro- static and dynamic operational loads
gramme for inspection and condition monitoring, the follow- altered operational conditions
ing documents/information shall be recorded: chloride ingress
geometric anomalies, such as construction joints, penetra-
- Data from the design, construction and installation phase tions, embedments
(Summary Report). subsidence
- Basic information about each inspection performed (e.g. impact loads.
basic scope of work, important results, available reports
and documentation). Typical defects will be:
703 Up-to-date summary inspections shall be retained by the deformation/structural imperfections
owner/operator. Such records shall describe the following: cracks
reinforcement corrosion
- tools/techniques employed damaged coatings
- actual scope of work (including any field changes) freezekhaw damage
- inspection data collected including photographs, measure- spalls and delaminations
ments, videotapes, etc. local impact damage.
- inspection findings, including thorough descriptions and
documentation of any anomalies discovered. 805 In addition to the aspects listed for the atmospheric zone,
the inspection and condition monitoring of the Splash Zone
Any repairs and in-service evaluations of the structure shall be should focus on:

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
Sec.8 - Page85
- effects due to alternating wetting and drying of the surface of structural or piping components.
- marine growth. 904 Inspection of corrosion control based on use of corro-
806 In addition to the aspects listed for the Atmospheric and sion resistant materials can be integrated with visual inspection
Splash zones, the inspection and condition monitoring of the of the structural or mechanical components associated with
Submerged Zone should focus on: such materials.
Guidance note:
- scouring of the seabed under or in the immediate vicinity One of the main objectives of an inspection is to detect any cor-
of the installation or build-up of seabed substancehedi- rosion of the reinforcement. Several techniques have been devel-
ments oped for the detection of corrosion in the reinforcement in land-
- build-up of substancehediments if such build-up covers based structures. These are mainly based on electro potential
significant parts of the structure mapping, for which there is an ASTM standard. Since the corro-
- current conditions sion process is the result of an electrochemical cell measure-
ments of the electro potential of the reinforcement can provide
- movement in bottom sediments some indication of corrosion activity. These techniques are use-
- mechanical loads ful for detecting potential corrosion in and above the splash zone
- tension cable anchor points but have limited application underwater because of the low re-
- debris sistance of seawater.
- settlement ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
- cathodic protection system (anodes).
905 It has been established that under many circumstances
807 The inspection of the internal parts shall focus especially underwater corrosion of the reinforcement does not lead to
on: spalling, and rust staining. The corrosion products are of a dif-
- detecting any leakage ferent form and can be washed away from cracks, leaving no
- biological activity evidence on the surface of the concrete of buried corrosion of
- temperature, composition of seawater and ph values in the reinforcement. However when the reinforcement is ade-
quately cathodically protected any corrosion should be pre-
connection with oil storage vented. In cases where cathodic protection of the
- detecting any reinforcement corrosion reinforcement can be limited, the absence of spalling and rust
- concrete cracking. staining at cracks in the concrete cover should not be taken as
The presence of bacterial activity, such as sulphate reducing evidence for no corrosion.
bacteria (SRB), and pH shall be evaluated, considering the A 1000 Inspection and condition monitoring types
quality and thickness of the concrete cover. Necessary actions
against possible harmful effect of bacterial activity shall be 1001 The extent and choice of methods may vary depending
evaluated. on the location and function of the actual structure/structural
part. In the choice of inspection methods due consideration
808 Concrete durability is an important aspect concerning shall be taken to reduce the risk associated with the inspection
structural integrity and shall be assessed during the lifetime of activity itself. The main techniques for use underwater depend
the structure. Important factors to assess are: on visual inspection, either by divers or by ROVS. In some
- those factors that are important but are unlikely to change cases, it is necessary to clean off marine growth to examine po-
significantly with time, such as permeability and cover to tential defects in more detail.
reinforcement; 1002 The methods shall be chosen with a focus on discover-
- those factors that will change with time and need to be as- ing serious damage or defects on the structures. The methods
sessed regularly, such as chloride profiles, chemical at- shall reveal results suitable for detection and characteristic de-
tacks, abrasion depth, freezekhaw deterioration and scription of any damage/defect. Areas with limited accessibil-
sulphate attack, especially in petroleum storage area. ity should preferably be monitored through instrumentation.
1003 The following type of inspection shall be considered:
809 Chloride profiles should be measured in order to estab-
lish the rate of chloride ingress through the concrete cover. Ei- a) Global visual inspection
ther total chloride ion content or water-soluble chloride Global visual inspection is an examination of the total
content should be measured. However, the method chosen structure to detect obvious or extensive damage such as
should be consistent throughout the life of the structure. These impact damage, wide cracks, settlements, tilting, etc. The
profiles can be used for estimating the time to initiation of re- inspection can be performed at a distance, without direct
inforcement corrosion attack in the structure. access to the inspected areas, for instance by use of binoc-
A 900 Corrosion protection ulars. Prior cleaning of inspection item is not needed. The
inspection should include a survey to determine if the
901 Periodic examination with measurements shall be car- structure is suffering from uniform or differential settle-
ried out to verifj that the cathodic protection system is func- ment.
tioning within its design parameters and to establish the extent
of material depletion. b) Close visual inspection
Close visual inspection is a visual examination of specific
902 As far as cathodic protection (or impressed current) is surface area, structural part or total structure to detect in-
utilized for the protection of steel crucial to the structural in- cipient or minor damage. The inspection method requires
tegrity of the concrete, the sustained adequate potential shall direct access to the inspected area. Prior cleaning of the in-
be monitored. Examination shall be concentrated in areas with spected item might be needed.
high or cyclic stress utilization, which need to be monitored
and checked against the design basis. Heavy unexpected usage c) Non-destructive inspection/testing
of anodes should be investigated. Non-destructive inspectionhesting is a close inspection by
903 Inspection of coatings and linings is normally performed electrical, electrochemical or other methods to detect hid-
by visual inspection and has the objective to assess needs for den damage. The inspection method requires direct access
maintenance (i.e. repairs). A close visual examination will also to the inspected area. Prior cleaning of the inspection item
disclose any areas where coating degradation has allowed cor- is normally required.
rosion to develop to a degree requiring repair or replacement d) Destructive testing
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSK E VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page86 - Sec.8
Destructive testing is an examination by destructive meth- tion-induced cracks should be investigated regardless of crack-
ods such as core drilling, to detect hidden damage or to as- width. The investigation should identify the cause or causes,
sess the mechanical strength or parameters influencing the changes with time, and the likely effect on the structure.
concrete durability. 1205 Concrete crushing, spalling and delamination also re-
e) Instrumentation based condition monitoring (IBCM). quire careful determination of cause. Crushing is generally as-
In areas with limited accessibility, or for monitoring of sociated with either flexural overload, axial compression or
load effects, corrosion development, etc., additional infor- impact. Delamination and spalling can be either load related or
mation can be provided by use of instrumentation based caused by severe corrosion of embedded reinforced steel. The
condition monitoring. The instrumentation can be tempo- appropriate repair method for these distress types will vary
rary or permanent. Sensors shall preferably be fitted dur- considerably depending upon the actual distress cause.
ing fabrication. The sensors will be such as strain gauges, 1206 The interface being the main load transfer point be-
pressure sensors, accelerometers, corrosion probes, etc. tween the steel super-structure and the concrete support
1004 The structure may be instrumental in order to record should preferably be examined for structural integrity annual-
data relevant to pore pressure, earth pressure, settlements, sub- ly. The examination should include the load transfer mecha-
sidence, dynamic motions, strain, inclination, reinforcement nism (flexible joints, rubber bearings, bolts and cover) and the
corrosion, temperature in oil storage, etc. associated ring beam.
1005 In the case where the structure is equipped with active The concrete interface should be inspected for evidence of
systems which are important to the structural integrity, e.g. overstress and corrosion of embedded reinforcement steel.
pore pressure, water pressure under the base, drawdown (re- Corrosion potential surveys can be used to detect ongoing cor-
duced water level internally in the structure to increase the ex- rosion that is not visible by visual inspection alone.
ternal hydrostatic prestressing of the structural member) in 1207 Construction joints in the concrete structure represent
case of storms, etc., these monitoring systems shall be inspect- potential structural discontinuities. Water leakage and rein-
ed regularly. forcement corrosion are possible negative effects. Construc-
tion joints should be located remote from locations of high
A 1100 Marking stress and high fatigue cycling. However, achieving these rec-
1101 A marking system shall be established to facilitate ease ommendations is not always possible. As a minimum, the
of identification of significant items for later inspection. The monitoring program should identify constructionjoints located
extent of marking should take account of the nature of the de- in high stress areas, and monitor the performance with respect
terioration to which the structure is likely to be subjected and to evidence of:
of the regions in which defects are most prone to occur and of - leakage
parts of the structure known to become, or have been, highly
utilized. Marking should also be considered for areas suspect- - corrosion staining
- local spalling at joint faces,which indicate relative move-
ed to be damaged and with known significant repairs. The
identification system should preferably be devised during the ment at the joint
design phase. In choosing a marking system, consideration - evidence of poorly placed and compacted concrete, such
should be given to using materials less prone to attract marine as rock pockets and delaminations
growth and fouling. - joint cracking or separation.
A 1200 Guidance for inspection of special areas 1208 Penetrations are, by their nature, areas of discontinuity
and are prone to water ingress and spalling at the steekoncrete
1201 Poor quality concrete, or concrete containing con- interface. Penetrations added to the structure during the opera-
struction imperfections, should be identified during the initial tional phase are particular susceptible to leakage resulting
condition assessment, and monitored for subsequent deteriora- from difficulties in achieving high quality consolidation of the
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
tion. Surface imperfections of particular importance include concrete in the immediate vicinity of the added penetration.
poorly consolidated concrete and rock pockets, spalls, delami- All penetrations in the splash and submerged zones will re-
nations and surface corrosion staining. quire frequent inspections.
1202 The emphasis for the monitoring will be to detect and 1209 Vertical intersections between different structural
monitor damage caused by overstressing, abrasion, impact parts. A representative sample, chosen to coincide with the
damage, and environmental exposure. highest stredfatigue utilization as obtained from analysis,
1203 Overstressing is often evidenced by cracking, spalling, should be inspected. Areas with known defects should be con-
concrete crushing, and permanent distortion of structural sidered for more frequent examination. The significance of
members. Not all cracking is the result of structural overload. cracks, in these areas, on the structural integrity is substantial
Some cracking can be the result of creep, restrained drying and emphasises the need for frequent crack monitoring for dy-
shrinkage, plastic drying shrinkage, finishing, thermal fluctua- namic movement and length and width increases.
tions, and thermal gradients through the member thickness. 1210 Embedment plates may constitute a path for galvanic
Creep and restrained shrinkage cracks commonly penetrate corrosion to the underlying steel reinforcement. Main concerns
completely through a structural member, but are not the result are corrosion and spalling around the plates. Galvanic corro-
of overload. Plastic drying shrinkage and finishing cracks sion is especially severe where dissimilar metals are in a ma-
commonly do not penetrate completely through a member and rine environment and may lead to deterioration of the
are also not load related. reinforcing steel, which is in contact with the embedments.
1204 Non-characteristic cracking pattern. Whenever possi- 1211 Repair areas and areas of inferior construction. These
ble, inspectors should be familiar with characteristic cracking areas need to be individually assessed on the extent and meth-
patterns that are associated with loading. A second distinction od of repair and their criticality. Particular concern may be as-
that should be made is whether the observed cracks are “ac- sociated with areas that provide a permeable path through
tive” or “passive”. Active cracks are those that change in width which salt-water flow can take place. Continuous flow of sa-
and length as loads or deformation occur. Passive cracks are line and oxygenated water can cause corrosion of the rein-
benign in that they do not increase in severity with time. Sec.5 forcement and washout of cementitious paste with an ensuing
provides guidance on critical crackwidths that signal concern weakening effect of the reinforced concrete matrix. In such ar-
for the ingress of chloride ions and the resulting corrosion of eas, adequate emphasis needs to be placed on the detection of
embedded reinforced steel. Active cracks and load or deforma- local loss of reinforcement section due to chloride induced

E VERITAS
Sec.8 - Page87
(black) corrosion. Attention should be placed on the surface 1217 Sulphate reducing bacteria (SRB). SRBs occur in
and the perimeter of patched areas for evidence of shrinkage anaerobic conditions where organic material is present (such
cracking and loss of bond to the parent concrete surface. as hydrocarbons). The bacteria produce as their natural waste
1212 The splash zone can experience damage from impact of H,S (Hydrogen sulphide) which, in large enough amounts,
supply vessels, etc. and can also deteriorate from ice formation will cause a lowering of pH value of the cement paste in the
with ensuing spalling in surface cavities where concrete has concrete. Favourable conditions for SRB growth might be
been poorly compacted. present in un-aerated water in for example the water filled por-
tion of shafts and cells. An acidic environment can cause con-
Even where high quality concrete was placed originally, the crete softening and corrosion of reinforcement. An inspection
splash zone is susceptible to early deterioration as a result of of the concrete surface, which is likely to be affected by SRB
ice abrasion and freeze-thaw cycling. Both distress mecha- activity, is difficult to undertake. Some guidance can be ob-
nisms result in loss of surface concrete, with subsequent loss of tained by adequate monitoring of SRB activity and pH levels.
cover over the reinforcement steel. For structures designed for
lateral loads resulting from the movement of pack ice relative 1218 Post-tensioning. Tendons are usually contained within
to the structure, the heavily abraded concrete surface can cause ducts, which are grouted. Inspection of tendons is therefore
an increase in applied global lateral loads. Repairs to these sur- very difficult using conventional inspection techniques.
faces should be made as soon as possible to prevent fwther de- Guidance note:
terioration and structural overload.
Some problems with inadequateprotection of tendons have been
1213 Debris. Drill cuttings can build up on the cell tops a n d found through water leakage at anchorage points in dry shafts.
or against the side of the structure and should be assessed for: Partial loss of prestress in tendons is generally recognised as lo-
cal concrete cracking resulting from redistribution of stress and
- lateral pressures exerted by the cuttings should be investigatedupon discovery. Total loss of prestress can
- whether they cause an obstruction to inspection. result in member collapse. Design documents should be re-
viewed to establish the arrangement and distribution of cracking
Removal of drill cuttings needs to be assessed accordingly. that could be expected to result from partial loss ofprestress. This
Debris can cause structural damage through impact, abrasion, information should be documented with the inspection records
and made available to the inspection team.
or by accelerating the depletion of cathodic protection systems.
Also, it poses a danger to diving activities and precludes exam- Post-tensioning anchorage zones are commonly areas of com-
ination if allowed to accumulate. Particular vigil needs to be plex stress patterns. Because of this, considerable additional re-
maintained for impact damage, covered by debris. inforcement steel is used to control cracking. In many cases, the
reinforcing steel is very congested, and this condition can lead to
1214 Scour is the loss of foundation supporting soil material poor compaction of concrete immediately adjacent to the anchor-
and can be induced by current acceleration round the base of age. Also, the anchorages for the post-tensioning tendons are
the structure or by "pumping" effects caused by wave induced generally terminated in prestressing pockets in the structure, and
dynamic rocking motion. It can lead to partial loss of base sup- the recess is fully grouted after tensioning and before launch.
port and ensuring unfavourable redistribution of loads. Experience has also shown that the anchorage zones are prone to
1215 Differential hydrostatic pressure (drawdown). Struc- distress in the form of localized cracking and spalling of anchor-
tural damage, or equipment failure, can lead to ingress of water age pocket grout materials. These conditions expose the critical
and affect the hydrostatic differential pressure (see Al 005). tendon anchors to the marine environment, causing corrosion of
the anchor and additional spalling and delamination of concrete
This might call for special inspection before and during draw- and grout in the anchorage zone. Regular visual inspection of the
down. anchorages is recommended. Should evidence exist for potential
1216 Temperature of oil to storage. Continuous records of distress, a more detailed visual inspection supplemented by im-
the temperature of the oil sent to storage should be examined pact sounding for delaminations should be completed to deter-
for compliance with design limits. mine if the anchorage is distressed. The visual inspection should
focus on corrosion staining, cracking, and large accumulationsof
In cases where differential temperatures have exceeded design efflorescence deposit.
limits, following an analysis of the additional loading, special ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---
inspections might be required.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page88 - A p p A
APPENDIX A
ENVIRONMENTAL LOADING (GUIDELINES)
A. General various appurtenances, attachments and components shall be

determined.
A 100 Environmental Loads 202 The appropriate analysis procedure to compute wave
101 Wind, wave, tide and current are important sources of loads generally depends on the ratio of wavelength to a char-
environmental loads (E) on many structures located offshore. acteristic dimension of the structure, such as the diameter of a
In addition, depending on location, seismic or ice loads or both column or shafts. For ratios less than approximately 5 , a pro-
can be significant environmental loads. cedure such as diffraction analysis shall be applied that ac-
102 Loads from wind, wave and current occur by various counts for the interaction of the structure with the incident
mechanisms. The most important sources of load are: wave-field. For higher ratios, a slender body theory such as
Morison theory may be considered. Where drag forces are im-
- viscous or drag effects, generally of most importance for portant in this regime, both methods should be applied in com-
relatively slender bodies bination. In some cases, such as in the computation of local
- inviscid effects due to inertia and wave diffraction. These loads on various external attachments to a structure, both pro-
are generally of most importance in terms of global effects cedures can be required.
for relatively large volume bodies. The length of the structure relative to wave length is also of im-
portance for floating structures, as cancellation or reinforce-
103 For fixed concrete structures, static analyses can be ade- ment effects may occur if the wave length corresponds with the
quate. The possibility that dynamic analysis is required on lo- length or multiple length of the structure.
cal components or on the global platform shall be investigated.
In the specific case of wave loading, the possibility that non- 203 Model testing shall be considered to supplement analyt-
linear effects can lead to loads at frequencies either above or ical results, particularly in cases where it is anticipated that
below the frequency range in the wave spectrum both during non-linear effects will be significant, or where previous expe-
temporary floating conditions and at the permanent location rience is not directly applicable because of the configuration of
shall be investigated. Potential dynamic effects on local or glo- the structure.
bal loads from wave, wind and current sources shall also be in-
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
vestigated. A 300 Diffraction analysis
104 The influence of the structure on the instantaneous water 301 Global loads on large volume bodies shall generally be
surface elevation shall be investigated. Possible direct impact estimated by applying a validated diffraction analysis proce-
of green-water on a deck or shafts shall also be investigated. dure. In addition, local kinematics, required in the design of
Total water surface elevation depends on storm surge and tide, various appurtenances, shall be evaluated including incident,
the crest height of incident waves, and the interaction of the in- diffraction and (if necessary) radiation effects.
cident waves with the structure or other adjacent structures. 302 The fundamental assumption is that the fluid is inviscid
105 Environmental loads due to wind, wave and current re- and that the oscillatory motions of both the waves and of the
late particularly to the ultimate limit state requirements. In ad- structure are sufficiently small to permit the assumption of lin-
dition, these loads can contribute to the fatigue, serviceability, earity. The hydrodynamic interaction between waves and a
and accidental limit states. Environmental loads due to wind, prescribed structure can be predicted based on linearized three-
wave and current shall also be considered in temporary config- dimensional potential theory.
urations of the structure during construction, tow, and installa- 303 Analytical procedures shall be implemented generally
tion. through well-verified computer programs typically based on
106 The estimation of loads due to wind, wave and current sourcehink (Green's Function) panel methods or similar pro-
requires an appropriate description of the physical environ- cedures. Alternative procedures including classical analytical
ment in the form of seastate magnitude and direction, associat- or semi-analytical methods and the fiiite element procedure
ed wind magnitude and direction, and relevant current may be considered in specialized cases. Programs should be
descriptions in terms of current velocity profiles through the validated by appropriate methods.
depth and associated directional information. The derivation of 304 Diffraction analysis using panel methods shall be exe-
wind, wave and current combinations required for calculation cuted with an adequate grid density to provide a solution with
of loads is described in DNV-OS- 1O 1 Sec.3. the required accuracy. The grid density shall be sufficient to
107 Procedures for the estimation of seismic loads are pro- adequately capture fluctuations in parameters such as pressure.
vided in DNV-OS-C l O l Sec.3. In zones where the geometry changes abruptly (corners, edg-
es), denser grids shall be employed. Also, in the vicinity of the
108 The computation of ice loads is highly specialized and free surface, grid densities will generally be increased. Grid
location dependent and is not covered in detailed by this Stand- densities shall be related to the wave period in order to provide
ard. There is an extensive relevant body of literature available an adequate description of fluctuations over the wavelength.
for the computation of ice loads that should be consulted for Six panels per wavelength are usually sufficient on a smooth
guidance. Ice loads shall be computed by skilled personnel surface. In general, convergence tests with grids of variable
with appropriate knowledge in the physical ice environment in density shall be carried out to confirm the adequacy of any pro-
the location under consideration and with appropriate experi- posed panel model.
ence in developing loads based on this environment and the
load return periods in accordance with DNV-OS-C 1O 1 Sec.3. 305 Diffraction models shall be combined with Morison
models in the assessment of various relatively slender attach-
A 200 Extreme wave loads ments to large volume structures. Diffraction methods provide
201 Wave loads from extreme conditions shall be deter- local fluid velocity and acceleration required in the Morison
mined by means of an appropriate analysis procedure supple- model. Morison theory may be applied to compute resulting
mented, if required, by a model test program. Global loads on loads.
the structure shall be determined. In addition, local loads on 306 The proximity of additional relatively large volume

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
A p p A - Page89
structures shall be included in assessing loads. Disturbances in volume fixed structures. The influence of viscosity and Rey-
the wave field around two or more structures may interact and nolds number effects shall be considered in any decision to ap-
this interaction shall be accounted for in the analysis. ply Froude scaling.
307 Structures with significantly varying cross-section near 503 Where possible, model test loads shall be validated by
the waterline, within the likely wave-affected zone, call for ad- comparison with analytical solutions or the results of prior ap-
ditional consideration. Non-wall sided structures are not con- propriate test programs.
sistent with the underlying assumptions of linear diffraction 504 Appropriate data shall be recorded in model tests to fa-
theory and both local and global loads and load effects can be cilitate computation of wave loads. Data in the form of time
significantly non-linear relative to the magnitude of the sea- history recordings may include:
state. Linear diffraction theory assumes wall-sided geometry at
the waterline. - the local instantaneous adwater surface elevation at vari-
308 The calculation of wave forces on surface piercing struc- ous locations
tures that will be overtopped by the progressing wave need - local particle kinematics
special attention and validation of the computing technique is - global loads such as base shear, vertical load or overturn-
necessary. ing moment as well as local loads as pressure distribution
acting on individual components
309 Careful consideration shall be given to potential pres- - structural response such as displacements and accelera-
sure fluctuations on the base of a platform during the passage tions, particularly if dynamic response occurs.
of a wave field. If the foundation conditions are such that pres-
sure fluctuations are expected to occur on the base, such pres- 505 Model test data shall be converted to full scale by appro-
sure fluctuations shall be included in the analysis. priate factors consistent with the physical scaling procedures
310 Diffraction analysis programs may be used to produce applied in the test program.
coefficients required in the evaluation of various non-linear ef- 506 It shall be recognized that, analogous with analytical
fects typically involving sum frequency or difference frequen- procedures, model test results have inherent limitations. These
cy effects. limitations shall be considered in assessing the validity of re-
sulting loads. The primary sources of inherent limitation in-
A 400 Additional requirements for dynamic analysis clude:
under wave load
401 In cases where the structure can respond dynamically, surface tension effects. These are not generally allowed
such as in the permanent configuration (fixed or floating), dur- for in model test program defiiition and may be signifi-
ing wave load or earthquakes or in temporary floating condi- cant particularly where large-scale factors are applied
tions, additional parameters associated with the motions of the viscous effects. The Reynolds number is not generally ac-
structure shall be determined. Typically, these additional ef- curately scaled and these effects are important where vis-
fects shall be captured in terms of inertia and damping terms in cosity is significant such as in the prediction of drag or
the dynamic analysis. damping effects
aidwater mixing and entrainment. Various loads that de-
402 Ringing can control the extreme dynamic response of pend on this type of factor such as slamming forces will
particular types of concrete gravity structure. A ringing re- not in general be accurately scaled in typical Froude scale
sponse resembles that generated by an impulse excitation of a based model tests.
linear oscillator: it features a rapid build up and slow decay of
energy at the resonant period of the structure. In high seastates, 507 The influence of different effects on loads determined in
ringing may be excited by non-linear (second, third and higher model tests shall be assessed and steps taken in the testing pro-
order) processes in the wave loading that are only a small part gram to reduce or minimize them. Such effects might be:
of the total applied environmental load on a structure.
- wave reflections from the ends of model test basins
403 The effects of motions in the permanent configuration - scattering of waves from large volume structures and re-
such as those occurring in an earthquake, floating structures or flection of spurious scattered waves from model basin
in temporary phases of fixed installations during construction, sidewalls interfering with target design wave conditions
tow or installation, on internal fluids such as ballast water in - break down of wave trains representing the target design
tanks, shall be evaluated. Such sloshing in tanks generally af- wave due to various instabilities leading to an inaccurate
fects the pressures, particularly near the free surface of the flu- realisation of design wave conditions
id. - difficulties in the inclusion of wind or currents in associa-
A 500 Model testing tion with wave fields.
501 The necessity of model tests to determine extreme wave A 600 Current load
loads shall be determined on a case-by-case basis. Generally, 601 Currents through the depth, including directionality,
model tests shall be considered when it is required to: shall be combined with the design wave conditions. The Char-
- verifj analytical procedures. Model tests should be exe- acteristic current load shall be determined in accordance with
cuted to confiim the results of analytical procedures, par- DNV-OS-C 1O 1 Sec.3.
ticularly in cases with structures of unusual shape, 602 The disturbance in the incident current field due to the
structures in shallow water with steep extreme waves, or presence of the fixed structure shall be accounted for.
in any other case where known limitations of analytical 603 Current loads on platforms shall be determined using
procedures are present recognized procedures. Typical methods are based on the use
- Complement analytical procedures. Model tests should be
of empirical coefficients accounting for area, shape, shielding,
executed where various effects such as ringing, wave run etc. Such empirical coefficients shall be validated. Model tests
up, potential occurrence of deck slamming or in cases or analytical procedures or both shall be considered to validate
where the higher order terms neglected in analytical pro- computed current loads.
cedures may be important. These effects cannot usually be
assessed in the basic analytical procedure. 604 Numerical procedures based on Computational Fluid
Dynamics (CFD) may be considered in the evaluation of cur-
502 Froude scaling is considered to be appropriate for typi- rent loads or other effects associated with current. These pro-
cal gravity driven processes like waves acting alone on large
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
cedures are based on a numerical solution of the exact

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page90 - A p p A
equations of the motion of viscous fluids (the Navier Stokes crete Structure is normally small compared to the wind forces
equations). Only well validated implementations of the CFD on the topside and to wave load effects. A simplified method
procedure shall be used in the computation of current effects. of applying the wind load effect to the concrete structure is by
The method can provide a more economic and reliable proce- using the wind forces derived for the topside structure. These
dure for predicting drag forces than physical modelling tech- forces will contribute to the overall global loads like the over-
nique s. turning moment and horizontal base shear in addition to in-
605 Disturbances in the incident current field lead to modifi- creased forces in vertical direction of the concrete shafts.
cations in the local current velocity in the vicinity of the struc- 704 Global mean wind loads on the exposed part of an con-
ture. Loads on local attachments to the structure shall be crete structure shall be determined, based on the appropriate
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
computed based on the modified current field. The possibility design wind velocity, in combination with recognized calcula-
of Vortex Induced Vibrations (VIV) on various attachments tion procedures. In a typical case global wind load may be es-
shall be investigated. timated by simplified procedures such as a block method. In
606 The presence of water motions in the vicinity of the base this type of procedure wind loads may be based on calculations
of a structure can lead to scour and sediment transport around that include empirical coefficients for simple shapes for which
the base. The potential for such transport shall be investigated. data is available, an appropriate exposed area, and the square
Typical procedures require the computation of fluid velocity of the wind velocity normal to the exposed area. Local wind
using either CFD or model test results. These velocities are loads shall generally require inclusion of a gust factor or simi-
generally combined with empirical procedures to predict lar considerations to account for more local variations of wind
scouring. velocities.
607 If found necessary scour protection should be provided 705 Global dynamic effects of wind load shall be investigat-
around the base of the structure. See DNV-OS-C101 Sec.11. ed if relevant. As an example, a structure and its mooring sys-
tem in a temporary condition during the construction, towing
A 700 Wind loads or installation phases can be susceptible to wind dynamics. An
701 Wind loads may be determined in accordance with appropriate description of wind dynamics such as a wind spec-
DNV-OS-C101 Sec.3 E700. trum shall be included in wind load estimation.
702 Wind forces on a Offshore Concrete Structure (OSC) 706 In addition to wind, wave and current loads present at
will consist of two parts: the offshore site, these loads shall also be systematically eval-
uated where relevant during construction, tow and installation/
- wind forces on topside structure removal conditions. The complete design life cycle of the
- wind forces on concrete structure above sea level. structure, from initial construction to removal, shall be consid-
ered and appropriate governing design combinations of wind,
703 The wind load on the exposed part of the Offshore Con- wave and current shall be assessed in any phase.

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
App.B - Page91
APPENDIX B
STRUCTURAL ANALYSES - MODELLING (GUIDELINES)
A. General concrete and this effect shall be allocated for in the analyses.
111 Non-linear analysis techniques are often applied to local
A 100 Physical representation components of the structure. It is typical to discretely model
101 Dimensions used in structural analysis calculations shall concrete, reinforcement and prestressing tendons in such sim-
represent the structure as accurately as necessary to produce ulations. Where this is the case, each material shall be repre-
reliable estimates of load effects. Changes in significant di- sented by appropriate stress-strain behaviour, using recognized
mensions as a result of design changes shall be monitored both constitutive models.
during and after the completion of an analysis. Where this im- 112 The density of reinforced concrete shall be calculated
pacts on the accuracy of the analysis, the changes shall be in- based on nominal sizes using the specified aggregate density,
corporated by reanalysis of the structure under investigation. mix design and level of reinforcement, with due allowance for
102 It is acceptable to consider nominal sizes and dimen- design growth. For existing structures, such densities shall be
sions of the concrete cross-section in structural analysis, pro- adjusted on the basis of detailed weight reports, if available.
vided that tolerances are within the limits set out for the Variation in effective density through the structure shall be
construction and appropriate material partial safety factors are considered, if significant.
used.
113 Unless another value is shown to be more appropriate, a
103 Where as-built dimensions differ from nominal sizes by Poisson's ratio of v= 0.2 shall be assumed for uncracked con-
more than the permissible tolerances, the effect of this dimen- crete. For cracked concrete, a value of v = O may be used. A
sional mismatch shall be incorporated into the analysis. The ef- coefficient of thermal expansion of 1.O x 1O-< /OC shall also be
fect of tolerances shall also be incorporated into the analysis used for concrete and steel in lieu of other information. Where
where load effects and hence the structural design are particu- the design of the concrete structure is particularly sensitive to
larly susceptible to their magnitude (imperfection bending in these parameters, they shall be specifically determined by the
walls, implosion of shafts, etc.). materials in use. Special considerations are required for con-
104 Concrete cover to nominal reinforcement and position- crete exposed to cryogenic temperature.
ing of prestressing cables may be provided where these are de- 114 The representation of a fixed structure foundation will
fined explicitly in detailed local analysis. Again, this is subject differ depending on the type of analysis being undertaken. For
to construction tolerances being within the specified limits and static analysis, reactive pressures applied to soil contact surfac-
appropriate material partial safety factors being applied to es shall be sufficient, but for dynamic analysis or where soil/
component material properties. structure interaction is significant, an elastic or inelastic repre-
105 The effects of wear and corrosion shall be accounted for sentation of foundation will normally be required to provide
in the analysis where significant and where adequate measures suitable stiffness. Seismic analysis is typically very dependent
are not provided to limit such effects. on soil properties, particularly at the ductility level earthquake.
Further details of foundation modelling requirements for spe-
106 It will normally be sufficient to consider centre-line di- cific analysis types may be found in Appendix D.
mensions as the support spacing for beams, panels, etc. Under
certain circumstances, however, face-to-face dimensions may 115 Reactions on the structure from its foundatiodanchor-
be permitted with suitablejustification. The effect of eccentric- age shall be based on general principles of soil mechanics in
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ities at connections shall be considered when evaluating local accordance with DNV-OS-C 101 Sec. 11. Sufficient reactive
bending moments and stability of the supporting structure. loads shall be applied to resist each direction of motion of the
structure (settlement, rocking, sliding, etc.). The development
107 Material properties used in the analyses of a new design of hydraulic pressures in the soil that act in all directions
shall reflect the materials specified for construction. For exist- should be considered where appropriate. Consideration shall
ing structures, material properties may be based on statistical be given to potential variation of support pressures across the
observations of material strength taken during construction or base of a fixed concrete structure.
derived from core samples extracted from the concrete.
116 The calculations used shall reflect the uncertainties in-
108 It is normally acceptable to simulate the concrete by herent in foundation engineering. Upper and lower bounds and
equivalent linear elastic properties in most limit states. Unless varied patterns of foundation reaction shall be incorporated
a different value can be justified, the secant modulus of plain and an appropriate range of reactive loads shall be assessed. In
concrete at zero strain may be used as the modulus of rein- particular, the sensitivity of structural response to different as-
forced concrete in such an analysis. The value used shall be in sumptions concerning the distribution of reaction between the
accordance with the concrete design rules in use. For loads that base and any skirts shall be determined.
result in very high strain rates, the increase in concrete modu-
lus of elasticity should be considered in the analyses of the cor- 117 Consideration shall also be given to the unevenness of
responding load effects. the seabed, which can potentially cause high local reactions.
109 Age effects on the concrete may be included, if suffi-
Foundation unevenness may be considered as a deformational
ciently documented by applicable tests. Effects of load dura- load in subsequent design checks in accordance with Sec.5
tion and resultant creep of the concrete shall also be B900. Other than this, foundation pressures shall be consid-
considered, where significant. Where loads may occur over a ered as reactive loads, their magnitude being sufficient to react
significant period in the life of the structure, the least favoura- all other factored loads.
ble instance shall be considered in determining age effects. 118 Upper limits of soil resistance should be considered dur-
110 Accurate evaluation of concrete stiffness is particularly ing analysis of platform removal.
important for natural frequency or dynamic analysis, and for 119 The analyses shall include intermediate conditions, such
simulations that incorporate significant steel components, such as skirt penetration and initial contact as well as the fully grout-
as the topsides or conductor framing. Consideration shall be ed condition, if significant. Disturbance of the seabed due to
given to possible extreme values of concrete stiffness in such the installation procedure should be considered in calculating
analyses. The aggregate type may influence the stiffness of the subsequent foundation pre ssures.

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page92 - App.B
120 Where it significantly affects the design of components, ditions and material conductivity. Thermal insulation effects
soil interaction on conductors shall also be incorporated in the due to insulating concrete or drill cuttings shall be considered,
analysis, particularly with regard to local analysis of conductor if present.
support structures. 206 Wave, current and wind loads shall include the influence
121 Other than direct support from foundation soils, a com- of such loads on the motion of the structure while floating. In
ponent may be supported by: cases where dynamic response of the structure may be of im-
portance, such response shall be considered in determining ex-
- external water pressure, while floating treme load effects. Pseudo-static or dynamic analyses shall be
- other components of the structure used.
- anchore supports
207 Uncertainties in topsides centre of gravity, built-in forc-
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
- any combination of the above, and foundation soils.

es and deformations from transfer of topsides from barges to
122 The load of water pressure in support of a fixed concrete the concrete structure shall be represented by a range of likely
structure while floating or a floating concrete structure shall be values, the structure being checked for the most critical ex-
evaluated by suitable hydrostatic or hydrodynamic analysis treme value.
and shall be applied to appropriate external surfaces of the 208 Structures designed to contain cryogenic gas (LNG)
structure. shall additionally be designed in accordance with the provi-
123 Representative boundary conditions shall be applied to sions made in DNV-OS-C503.
the analysis of a component extracted from the global struc-
ture. These boundary conditions shall include possible settle- A 300 Mass simulation
ment or movement of these supports, based on a previous 301 A suitable representation of the mass of the structure
analysis of the surrounding structure. shall be prepared for the dynamic analysis, motion prediction
124 In the absence of such data, suitable idealized restraints and mass-acceleration loads while floating. The mass simula-
should be applied to the boundary of the component to repre- tion shall include relevant quantities from at least the following
sent the behaviour of surrounding structure. Where there is un- list:
certainty about the effective stiffness at the boundaries of the all structural components, both steel and concrete, primary
component, a range of possible values shall be considered. and secondary
125 Force, stiffness or displacement boundary conditions the mass of all intended equipment, consistent with the
may be applied as supports to a component. Where there is un- stage being considered
certainty as to which will produce the most realistic stresses, a the estimated mass of temporary items, such as storage,
range of different boundary conditions shall be adopted and the lay-down, etc
worst load effects chosen for design. masses of any fluids contained within the structure, in-
126 Where components of the structure are not fully re- cluding equipment and piping contents, oil storage, LNG
strained in all directions, such as conductors within guides and storage, flooding, etc
bearing surfaces for deck and bridge structures, allowance the mass of solid ballast within the structure
shall be made in the analysis for movement at such interfaces. snow and ice accumulation on the structure, if significant
drill cuttings or other deposits on the structure
A200 Loads the mass of marine growth and external water moving with
201 Loads shall be determined by recognized methods, tak- the structure
ing into account the variation of loads in time and space. Such added water mass
loads shall be included in the structural analysis in a realistic added soil mass.
manner representing the magnitude, direction and time vari-
ance of such loads. 302 The magnitudes of masses within the structure shall be
distributed as accurately as necessary to determine all signifi-
202 Permanent and live loads shall be based on the most cant modes of vibration (including torsional modes) (when re-
likely anticipated values at the time of the analysis. Consider- quired) or mass-acceleration effects for the structural analysis
ation shall be given to minimum anticipated values as well as being performed. Particular attention shall be paid to the height
maximum loading. The former governs some aspects of the de- of topsides equipment or modules above the structural steel-
sign of gravity based structures. work.
203 Hydrostatic pressures shall be based on the specified 303 It is normally necessary to consider only the maximum
range of fluid surface elevations and densities. Hydrostatic mass associated with a given analysis condition for the struc-
pressures on floating structures during operation, transporta- ture. For dynamic analyses, however, this may not produce the
tion, installation and removal stages shall include the effects of worst response in particular with respect to torsional modes
pitch and roll of the structure due to intentional trim, wind heel, and a range of values of mass and centre of gravity may have
wave load or damage instability. The above also apply to fixed to be considered. For fatigue analysis, the variation in load his-
structures under transportation, installation and removal phas- tory shall be considered. If appropriate, an average value over
es. the life of the structure may be used. In such cases, it is reason-
204 Prestressing effects shall be applied to the model as ex- able to consider a practical level of supply and operation of the
ternal forces at anchorages and bends, or as internal strain platform.
compatible effects. In both cases, due allowance shall be made NOTE Calculation of the added mass of external or entrained
for all likely losses in prestressing force. Where approximated water moving with the structure shall be based on best availa-
by external reactions, relaxation in tendon forces due to the ef- ble published information or suitable hydrodynamic analysis.
fect of other loads on the state of strain in the concrete shall be In lieu of such analysis, this mass may be taken as the fullmass
considered. of displaced water by small-submerged members, reducing to
205 Thermal effects are normally simulated by temperatures 40% of the mass of displaced water by larger structural mem-
applied to the surface and through the thickness of the struc- bers. Added mass effects may be ignored along the axial length
ture. Sufficient temperature conditions shall be considered to of prismatic members, such as the shafts.
produce maximum temperature differentials across individual
sections and between adjacent components. The temperatures A400 Damping
shall be determined with due regard to thermal boundary con- 401 Damping arises from a number of sources including

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
App.B - Page93
structural damping, material damping, radiation damping, hy- performed. In the absence of substantiating values obtained
drodynamic damping and frictional damping between moving from existing platform measurements or other reliable sources,
parts. Its magnitude is dependent on the type of analysis being a value not greater than 3% of critical damping may be used.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page94 - App.C
APPENDIX C
STRUCTURAL ANALYSES (GUIDELINES)
A. General 203 Earthquakes are a particularly severe form of oscillatory

loading that shall always require detailed dynamic analysis if
A 100 Linear elastic static analysis the zone of seismic activity produces significant ground mo-
tions.
101 It is generally acceptable for the behaviour of a structure
or component to be based on linear elastic static analysis unless 204 Where dynamic effects can be significant, dynamic re-
there is a likelihood of significant dynamic or non-linear response can be evaluated on the basis of a simplified represen-
sponse to a given tvpe of loading. In such cases. dvnamic or tation of the structure or by the calculation of natural periods
ion-linear analysis approaches shall be required, as defined in and the evaluation of dynamic amplification factors. In evalu-
A200 - A400. ating dynamic amplification factors for wave loading, consid-
eration shall be given to higher frequency components of wave
102 Static analysis is always permissible where all actions and wind action that occur due to drag loading, sharp crested
on the component being considered are substantially invariant shallow water waves, fiiite wave effects, ringing, etc.
with time. Where actions are periodic or impulsive in nature,
the magnitude of dynamic response shall be evaluated in ac- 205 Where substantial dynamic response of the structure is
cordance A200 and static analysis shall only be permitted predicted, having magnitude at critical sections exceeding that
when dynamic effects are small. predicted by static only analysis, detailed dynamic analysis
shall be required. Dynamic analysis shall also be required
103 Reinforced concrete is typically non-linear in its behav- where more than one fundamental mode of the structure is sig-
iour, but it is generally acceptable to determine global load nificantly excited by the applied actions, as is the case for seis-
paths and sectional forces for ultimate, serviceability and fa- mic response.
tigue limit states based on an appropriate linear elastic analy-
sis, subject to the restrictions presented below. Non-linear 206 Where dynamic effects are relatively insignificant, a
analysis is normally required for accidental limit states, ductil- pseudo-static analysis of the structure or its components may
ity level earthquakes and local analysis. be performed, including dynamic effects in accordance with
Appendix C A300.
104 Linear stiffness is acceptable provided that the magni-
tudes of all actions on the structure are not sufficient to cause 207 Where dynamic response is likely to be significant; full
significant redistribution of stresses due to localised yielding dynamic analysis shall be performed to quantify such effects.
or cracking. Response to deformational loads, in particular, is Appropriate mass and damping simulations shall be applied to
very susceptible to the level of non-linearity in the structure the structure to enable the natural modes of vibration to be de-
and shall be carefully assessed for applicability once the level termined with accuracy.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
of cracking in the structure is determined. 208 Dynamic analysis will normally require a linearized
105 Reduction of the stiffness of components should be con- simulation of the soil stiffness for in-service conditions. This
sidered if it can be shown that, due to excessive cracking, for stiffness shall be determined with due allowance for the ex-
example, more accurate load paths might be determined by pected level of loading on the foundation. Specific require-
such modelling. Such reduced stiffness shall be supported by ments for seismic analysis are presented in Appendix D.
appropriate calculations or by non-linear analysis. 209 Actions applied to the structure or component shall in-
clude all frequency content likely to cause dynamic response
106 A linear analysis preserves equilibrium between exter- in the structure. The relative phasing between different actions
nal applied loads and internal reaction forces. Linear solutions shall be rigorously applied.
are thus always equilibrium states. The equations of a linear
system need to be solved only once and the solution results 210 Harmonic or spectral analysis methods are suitable for
may be scaled to any load level. A solution is hence always ob- most forms of periodic or random cyclic loading. Where sig-
tained, irrespective of the load levels. Linear analysis can be nificant dynamic response is coupled with non-linear loading,
carried out for many independent load cases at the time. The or non-linear behaviour of the structure, component or founda-
independent load cases may be superimposed into combined tion, then transient dynamic analysis shall be required.
cases without new solution of the equation system. 211 Where modal superposition analysis is being performed,
NOTE: Practise has shown that the use of a system represent- sufficient modes to accurately simulate structural response
ing all actions as unit loadcases that afterwards can be scaled shall be included; otherwise, a form of static improvement
in magnitude and added to represent complete load combina- shall be applied to ensure that static effects are accurately sim-
tions i.e. loading scenarios is very effective. ulated.
212 For impulse actions, such as ship impacts, slam loads
A 200 Dynamic analysis and blast loading, dynamic amplification effects may be quan-
201 Fixed structures with natural periods of the global struc- tified by the response of single- or multi-degree of freedom
ture greater than 2.5s can be susceptible to dynamic response systems representing the stiffness and mass of the components
due to wave action during in-service conditions, at least for fa- being analysed. Transient dynamic analysis will normally be
tigue assessment. Structures in shallow water or subject to ex- required.
treme wave conditions may exhibit significant dynamic
response at lower periods due to the higher frequency content A 300 Pseudo-static analysis
of shallow water or particularly steep waves. 301 In this context, pseudo-static analysis refers to any anal-
202 Other load conditions to which the structure may be sub- ysis where dynamic actions are represented approximately by
jected, such as sea tow, wind turbulence, vibration, impact and a factor on static loads or by equivalent quasi-static actions.
explosion can also impose dynamic forces of significant mag- The former approach is appropriate where static and dynamic
nitude close to fundamental periods of the structure or its com- action effects give an essentially similar response pattern with-
ponents. Structures that respond to a given set of actions by in the structure, but differ in magnitude.
resonant vibration at one or more natural periods shall be as- 302 For the former approach, dynamic amplification factors
sessed by dynamic analysis techniques. shall be used to factor static only response. Such factors will,

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
App.C - Page95
in general, vary throughout the structure to reflect the differing - for slender members in compression, where deflection ef-
magnitudes of static and dynamic response. For platform col- fects are significant (imperfection bending 01. buckling).
umns or shafts, appropriate local values of bending moment
should be used. Base shear, overturning moment and soil pres- 402 A non-linear analysis is able to simulate effects of geo-
sure are representative responses for the platform base. metrical or material nonlinearities in the structure or a structur-
al component. These effects increase as the loading increases
303 For the latter approach, additional actions shall be ap- and require an application of the loading in steps with solution
plied to the structure to represent dynamic mass-acceleration of the equations a multiple of times. The load must be applied
and inertial effects. All actions applied in a pseudo-static anal- in steps or increments, and at each loading step, iterations for
ysis may be considered constant over time except in the case of equilibrium must be carried out.
non-linear response, where knowledge of the load history may
be significant and loading should be applied to the simulation 403 Non-linear solutions can not be superimposed. This im-
in appropriate steps. plies that a non-linear analysis must be carried out for every
load case or load combination, for which a solution is request-
304 Factored dynamic results shall be combined with fac- ed.
tored static effects due to gravity, etc. in accordance with the 404 Non-linear analysis of the global structure or significant
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
limit states being checked. Load partial safety factors for dy- components may be based on a relatively simple simulation
namic loads should be consistent with the loading that causes model. Where linear elastic elements or members are included
the dynamic response, normally environmental. The most det- in this simulation, it shall be demonstrated that these compo-
rimental magnitude and direction of dynamic loading shall be nents remain linear throughout the applied actions. Appropri-
considered in design combinations. ate stress-strain or load deflection characteristics shall be
assigned to other components. Deflection effects shall be in-
A 400 Non-linear analysis corporated if significant.
401 Non-linear behaviour shall be considered in structural 405 Non-linear analysis of components to determine their ul-
analysis when determining action effects in the following cas- timate strength shall normally be performed on relatively sim-
ple simulations of the structure or on small components, such
as connections. Complex non-linear analysis of such D-re-
where significant regions of cracking occur in a structure gions using finite element methods should not be used without
such that global load paths are affected prior calibration of the method against experimental results of
where such regions of cracking affect the magnitude of ac- relevance. Material properties used in non-linear analysis
tions (temperature loads, uneven seabed effects, dynamic should be reduced by appropriate material partial safety fac-
response, etc.) tors, in accordance with Sec.5. Where components ofthe struc-
where the component depends upon significant non-linear ture rely upon nonlinear or ductile behaviour to resist extreme
material behaviour to resist a given set of loads, such as in actions, such components shall be detailed to permit such be-
response to accidents or ductility level seismic events haviour, in accordance with Sec.6.

Page96 - App.D
APPENDIX D
SEISMIC ANALYSIS (GUIDELINES)
A. General be used.
109 Soil properties, particularly shear wave velocity, dy-
A 100 Seismic analysis namic shear modulus and internal damping are dependent on
101 Two levels of seismic loading on an offshore concrete the shear strains used. These values should be adjusted for the
structure shall be considered: expected strains appropriate to the seismic excitation and the
variation in vertical effective stress and voids ratio due to the
- strength level earthquake (SLE), which shall be assessed presence of the structure.
as a ULS condition
- ductility level earthquake (DLE), for which ductile behav- 110 The simulation shall include a representation of the mass
iour of the structure assuming extensive plasticity is per- of the structure, in accordance with Appendix B A300. En-
missible provided the structure survive. closed fluids can be included as a lumped mass where the
height of water column is short.
LNG containment structures shall be designed in accordance 111 Unless a detailed evaluation is made, critical internal
with DNV-OS-C503. The LNG storage tank shall be designed damping of not more than 5% shall be used to simulate struc-
for both the SLE and DLE earthquakes. Systems which are vi- tural and hydrodynamic damping for seismic analysis. Any in-
tal for the plant system shall remain operational for both SLE creased value shall be subject to justification based on
and DLE. expected response. Values of soil damping shall be determined
102 If ductile response of specific components of the struc- based on the soil type present.
ture under the SLE event is predicted or considered in the anal- 112 For the strength level earthquake, linear dynamic global
ysis, such components shall be designed for ductile behaviour, structural analysis may be performed using the response spec-
in accordance with Sec.6. Expected best estimate of stress/ trum approach. Spectra used shall be in accordance with DNV-
strain parameters associated with ductile behaviour may be OS-C101 Sec.3 E800, but the analysis shall incorporate the ef-
adopted in the analyses. Due consideration shall be given to the fect of the platform mass on near soil motions, if appropriate.
effects of overstrength with respect to the transfer of forces
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
If degradation of soil properties and non-linear soil-structural
into adjoining members, and for the design of those failure interaction are significant, a non-linear dynamic time history
modes of such members that are not ductile, such as shear fail- analysis procedure should be adopted to address these effects,
ure. For those cases where the structure can be designed to the although the platform structure may be modelled as linear elas-
DLE event applying normal ULS criteria, no special detailing tic. Where seismic isolation or passive energy dissipation de-
for ductility is required. vices are employed to mitigate the seismic risk, a non-linear
103 Seismic events may be represented by input response time history procedure will be required. If degradation of soil
spectra or by time histories of significant ground motion, in ac- properties, non-linear soil-structural interaction or base sliding
cordance with DNV-OS-C101 Sec.3 E800. Where the global is significant, a non-linear dynamic time history analysis pro-
response of the structure is essentially linear, a dynamic spec- cedure should be adopted to address these effects.
tral analysis shall normally be appropriate. Where non-linear 113 Sufficient modes shall be included in the analysis to pro-
response of the structure is significant, transient dynamic anal- vide an accurate estimate of total global response. At least two
ysis shall be performed. modes shall be considered in each of the two principal horizon-
104 Seismic response of a structure is highly dependent on tal directions and a torsional mode about a vertical axis. This
the natural periods of the structure over a range of modes. This requirement may be considered satisfied if it is demonstrated
relies upon accurate assessments of the platform mass and that for the modes considered in the analysis, at least 90% of
stiffness, and a best estimate of soil stiffness. the participating mass of the structure is included in the calcu-
lation of response for each principal horizontal direction.
Such parameters shall be carefully assessed and, if necessary,
the sensitivity of the structure to changes in these parameters 114 One design spectrum may be used equally in each prin-
shall be evaluated. cipal horizontal direction, combined with 2/3 of this spectrum
in the vertical direction unless a lesser value can be justified
105 Interaction of the structure with its foundation is partic- based on site-specific data. These spectra may be combined to-
ularly significant for seismic analysis. The foundation shall be gether modally using the complete quadratic combination
simulated with sufficient accuracy in global structural analysis method (CQCM) and directionally using a square root sum
to ensure accurate assessment of natural periods of vibration square (SRSS) approach. Alternative methods are permitted
and a suitable distribution of soil loads into the structure. with suitable justification that all seismic action effects are in-
106 Two principal types of seismic analyses are suggested cluded.
for fixed concrete structures: 115 Secondary spectra may be developed for the analysis of
components such as deck or conductor frames to evaluate the
- direct soil-structure analysis response of substructures, appurtenances and equipment not
- impedance functiodsubstructure analysis. modelled for the global analysis. Alternatively, the design of
107 For direct soil-structure analysis, the caisson may be local components may be based on equivalent pseudo-static
modelled as a rigid structure connected to a flexible simulation analysis of such components, based on maximum vertical and
horizontal accelerations obtained from the global seismic anal-
of the foundation. In substructure analysis, the caisson may be ysis.
considered as a rigid circular disk for the computation of im-
pedance functions. 116 Action effects from seismic analysis shall be combined
108 Consideration shall be given to the range of likely values
with similar results from gravity loading to produce action ef-
of soil stiffness in the analysis. In particular, the possible deg- fects for structural design. Appropriate directions of seismical-
radation of soil properties during high-level seismic events, ly induced forces shall be considered to maximize these action
such as the ductility level earthquake, shall be considered. Ap- effects.
propriate non-linear or reduced soil stiffness properties shall 117 For the ductility level earthquake, non-linear seismic

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
App.D - Page97
analysis may be performed using a time history or transient ap- 118 The computer model for ductility level earthquake anal-
proach. Unless time histories are available by scaling or by ysis shall include discrete models of all primary components of
other means, they may be developed numerically from the de- the structure using either linear elastic or material non-linear
sign spectra. Multiple time histories are required to represent simulations. Deflection effects shall be evaluated and gravita-
the random nature of seismic ground motions. At least three tional loads included in the analysis to ensure that second order
sets of tri-axial statistically independent time histories shall be effects are simulated with sufficient accuracy.
developed and used, and the maximum response parameters 119 The action effects on components that are simulated as
shall be adopted in the design. The requirement for statistically linear elastic in either the SLE or the DLE analyses shall be
independent time histories may be considered satisfied if the evaluated and used to confiim that these components satisfj
correlation coefficient between any pair of time histories is less ULS criteria. Components that demonstrate ductile response
than 0.3. The time step for integration shall be selected to en- shall be so designed, and assessed against acceptance criteria
sure accuracy and stability of the non-linear dynamic solution, relevant for the actual limit state with respect to all relevant re-
normally it should not be more than 1/(12Q. sponse parameters.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page98 - App.E
APPENDIX E
USE OF ALTERNATIVE DETAILED DESIGN STANDARD (GUIDELINES)
A. General - the selection of adequate materials, which shall be in ac-

cordance with Sec.4
A 100 Introduction - adequate concrete cover to reinforcement, see Sec.6 Q200.
- limitation of crack-widths under SLS conditions, see Sec.5
101 The detailed design may be carried out in accordance 0200.
with Sec.6, the detailed requirements for concrete design. An
alternative detailed reference standard may be found accepta- 206 The reference standard shall give the principles for tight-
ble provided the standard satisfj the following conditions. ness control. Tightness shall be considered under SLS condi-
tions. This shall apply to ingress of water in structures in
102 The detailed design shall be carried out in accordance floating conditions and in installed condition when having in-
with a recognized reference standard, covering all aspects rel- ternal underpressure as well as leakage in particular of stored
evant for the structural design of offshore concrete structures. hydrocarbons from structures having internal overpressure.
This chapter identifies areas of the detailed design standard Leakage shall also be considered in the design of the members
that shall be checked, for adequate coverage. For complex that are affected when maintaining a pressure gradient is vital
structures, where higher grades of concrete are used, and like in suction foundations, and when using air cushions.
where the loading conditions are severe, most or all of the
items in E200 shall be covered. 207 Adequate tightness or leakage control shall be required
in ULS and ALS for those conditions where a leakage might
Guidance note: cause collapse or loss of the structure due to flooding or where
The detailed design reference standard to be used should be a pressure condition required to maintain equilibrium might be
agreed at an early stage in a project, as the choice of standard lost.
might strongly influence the platform geometry and dimensions.
208 The reference standard shall give the design principles
---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- required for design of prestressed concrete, including princi-
ples for partial prestressing, when appropriate.
A 200 Conditions 209 The effect of the presence of empty ducts during phases
of the construction period shall be considered. For the final
201 The reference standard shall give the design parameters condition, the effect of the presence of ducts on the capacity of
required for the type of concrete, e.g. normal weight or light- cross-sections shall be considered, in particular if the strength
weight concrete, and strength class used. For high strength and stiffness of the grout is less than that of the concrete. This
concretes and lightweight concrete, the effect of reduced duc- also applies if the ducts are not of steel but of flexible materi-
tility shall be considered. This in particular applies to the als.
stresdstrain diagram in compression, and the design parameter
used for the tensile strength in calculation of bond strength, 210 The reference standard shall give the principles required
and transverse shear resistance. to design all relevant types of members for second-order ef-
fects, including buckling also in the hoop direction of shell
202 Shell types of members are typical in offshore struc- types of members.
tures; the reference standard shall cover design principles ap-
plicable to members such as domes and cylinders, where 211 The reference standard shall give the principles required
relevant. The design methods shall be general in nature, con- in order to assess the effects of water pressure penetrating into
sidering equilibrium and compatibility of all the six force com- cracks and pores ofthe concrete, affecting both the load effects
ponents giving stresses in the plane of the member and all limit and the resistance. The methods to be used will be dependent
states. of how water pressure is applied in the initial calculation of ac-
tion effects.
203 The reference standard shall give the principles required
for the design for transverse shear, where the general condition 212 The reference standard shall give the principles for the
of combinations of simultaneously acting in plane forces, e.g. local design in discontinuity regions where strut and tie models
tension and compression and transverse forces shall be cov- might be used to demonstrate the mechanisms for proper force
ered. The interaction dependant of directionality of same forc- transfer.
es in members like shells, plates and slabs shall be included. 213 The reference standard shall give the principles required
Due consideration shall be given to the handling of action ef- to permit design for imposed deformations based on strains
fects caused by imposed deformations. rather than forces, in all limit states. Where brittle failure
modes are involved, such as shear failure in members with no
204 The reference standard shall give principles required for transverse reinforcement, conservative design parameters shall
the design for fatigue for all failure modes. This includes e.g. be assumed in order not to underestimate the risk of the poten-
concrete in compressiodcompression or compressiodtension, tial brittle failure modes.
transverse shear considering both shear tension and shear com-
pression, reinforcement considering both main bars and stir- 214 The reference standard shall give guidance for how to
rups including bond failure, and prestressing reinforcement. assess the effect of gain in strength beyond 28 days and also the
Material standards might give certain fatigue-related require- effect of sustained loads or repeated loads at high stress levels
ments; these are normally not adequate for offshore applica- in reduction of strength of concrete, when the gain in strength
tions. The fatigue properties will vary significantly also for is intended for use in the design.
materials that pass such general requirements for fatigue. For 215 The reference standard shall give design principles re-
the design SN-curves representing the 5% fractile should be quired for demonstration of adequate fiie resistance of mem-
prepared for rebars, and in particular for items that have stress bers subjected to fire, including relevant material and strength
concentrations such as couplers, end anchors and T-heads. parameters at elevated temperatures.
205 The reference standard should give the principles and 216 In zones with low to moderate seismic activity, the ac-
criteria applicable to ensure a durable design in marine envi- tion effects obtained from an analysis in which the platform
ronment. Important in this context is: structure is modelled as linear elastic will normally be such
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale
App.E - Page99
that the structural design can be performed based on conven- gions of the structure that are assumed to go into plasticity
tiona1 linear elastic strength analyses, employing normal de- experiencing excessive deformations shall be carefully de-
sign and detailing rules for the reinforcement design. tailed to ensure amrotxiate ductilitv and confinement.
I I I
217 In cases where the seismic action cause large amplitude

cyclic deformations which can only be sustained employing 218 The material factors shall be such that a total safety level
plasticity considerations, the reference standard shall give ad- consistent with this standard is obtained. This shall be dûCu-
êquate requirements concerning design and detailing.-The re- mented.
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETNORSKE VERITAS
Not for Resale
Page 100 - App.F
APPENDIX F
CRACKWIDTH CALCULATION (GUIDELINES)
A. General hCefshall be less than the height of the tensile zone

(h - x), where x is the distance from the concrete
A 100 Introduction edge on the tensile side to the neutral axis and h is
101 The general basis for calculation of crackwidth in an off- the total cross-sectional height.
shore structure is provided in Sec.6 0700. For double reinforce cross-sections with through
102 This Appendix provide recommendations for calcula- going tensile stresses, hCefis calculated for each
tion of crackwidth for stabilized crack pattem. Stabilized side, hCelshall in this case never be larger then h/2.
crackpattem is defined as a crackpattem developed in such a k, a coefficient which accounts for the strain distribu-
way that an increase in the load will only lead to minor changes tion within the cross-section. k, = (1 + qI/q)/2
in the number, spaces between cracks and direction of cracks. where q1/q is the ratio between minimum and max-
imum strain in the effective concrete area calculated
103 Normally, a stabilized crackpattem is used in evaluation for cracked cross-section. For a cross-section with
of crackwidth as the provision of minimum reinforcement in through going tensile stresses, k, =1.0.
the structure is intended to ensure a well spaced developed kb 0.15 n + 0.85, a coefficient which accounts for re-
crackpattem. duced bond of bundled reinforcement.
C the concrete cover for the reinforcement under in-
A 200 Stabilized crackpattern vestigation.
201 Influence length, lsk @ the diameter of the reinforcement bar
For stabilized crackpattem, the influence length, I&, equals the sb the distance between reinforcement bars or bundles
characteristic distance between cracks, s,k. of bars, maximum value in the calculation 154 (for
bundles of reinforcement 15(I . h
The characteristic distance between cracks for cracks normal n number of bars in a bundle.
to the reinforcement direction is predicted from the following
formulae: 203 Characteristic distance between cracks. sTL.shall not be
larger than 2.5 (h - x) and not less than 2.5 c,'where c < (h-x).
S,k= 1.7 S,= 1.7{S,, +k,A,,f/C [7T@/(ftkkb/Zbk)]} 204 Should the reinforcement be distributed unevenly be-
where the summation, C, covers tensile reinforcement within tween different parts of the cross-section, then the characteris-
the concrete area influencing the transfer of tensile stresses be- tic distance between the cracks, s,k, shall be predicted
tween concrete and tensile reinforcement between cracks, individually for groups with similar intensity of reinforcement.
AceF
202 In plates and slabs with single bars or bundles of bars of 205 For reinforcement with perpendicular reinforcement
equal diameter and constant spacing between the bars, the dis- bars spaced at a distance, s, then the characteristic distance be-
tance between the cracks may be calculated from: tween the cracks can be taken as n . s, where n is a whole
number, and when the predicted distance between the cracks is
greater than n . s and less than (n + 0.3) s.
20 mm (a constant length with presumed loss of A 300 Distance between cracks with deviations between
bond) the principle strain directions and the direction of the
the effective ration between tensile strength and reinforcement
bond strength and is taken as 0.75 for deformed 301 When the principal strain deviate from the direction of
bars, 1.15 for post-tension bars and 1S O for plain the reinforcement, then the distance between the crackwidth in
bars. the direction of the main reinforcement may be predicted from:
b.kef, the effective concrete area in the part of the
concrete tension zone which is presumed to partici-
pate in carrying tensile stresses which is transferred s, = l/{(sin v/s, ) + (cos v/smY)}
from the reinforcement to the concrete by bond. where
the width of the effective concrete section consid-
ered (mm). v = the angle between the principle strain and the y-direc-
the height of the effective concrete area = tion (x-direction) when the reinforcement is presumed
2.5 (h - d), where (h - d) is the distance from the to be position in the x-direction (y-direction).
-
concrete surface on tension side to the centre of smx - the predicted distance between the cracks in the x-di-
--`,,,```-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
gravity of the reinforcement. For a tension zone rection.

-
with reinforcement of single tensile bars in one lay- Smy - the predicted distance between the cracks in the y-di-
er, kef= 2.5 (c + @ /2). rection.

DETNORSKE
VERITAS
Not for Resale

Offshore Concrete Strucctures PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Offshore Concrete Strucctures PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

OFFSHORE STANDARD

DET NORSKE VERITAS

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

Amendments and Corrections

Comments may be sent by e-mail to rules@dnv.com

Sec. 1 Introduction ........................................................... 7 E. Grout and Mortar ................................

B. References ................................................................... 7 G. Prestressing Steel .................................................................. 23

............................. i: Sec. 5 Loads and Analyses Requirements ................... 25

Sec. 4 Structural Concrete and Materials ................... 19

C 600 Additions.... D 1300 Probabilistic analysis

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

G. Torsional Moments in Beams .................... 48 B. Definitions ........................................

H. General Design Method for Structural Members Subjected to c . Documentation... ................................... 69

In-dane Forces ..................................................................... 49 c 100 General.....

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

G. Formwork ............................................................................. 73 A 400 Planning .......................................................................... 83

K 400 Post-tensioning ............................................................... 79 A. General 91

L. Repairs .................................................................................. 80 App. C Structural Analyses (Guidelines) ........... 94

O 200 Handling and storage

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

A. General ~ Deep water caisson type concrete foundation of bridges

~ Artificial concrete export/import harbours, either floating

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

246 Lowest waterline: Typical light ballast waterline for

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

D. Abbreviations and Symbols D200 Symbols

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

b., I length of the side ueruendicular to b, G permanent load

~ 0.7 for bundle of 3 bars

nor less than 1.O

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

r, I radius of curvature &-TT

z1 I P, reinforcement ratio in y direction = A,, /(b.d)

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

There should be a clear and documented link between major

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

A. Overall Planning An earthquake is defined by the horizontal and vertical accel-

durability requirements. Adequate planning shall be done be- Guidance note:

rainfall, snow ~ escape routes

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

~ physical connections A 700 Documentation

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

A. Classification C. Material Requirements

crete its ductile characteristics. In these Rules reinforcement is

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

strength in compression and tension (bending) at 1-3, 28

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

made with lightweight aggregates conforming to requirements

tent of 360 kg/m 3

ment content of 320 kg/m !

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

F. Reinforcement G. Prestressing Steel

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

Copyright Det Norske Veritas

B 100 General B 200 Environmental loads

Copyright Det Norske Veritas